diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:45:34 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:45:34 -0700 |
| commit | a9dec2273a92fcf28dd140acedb8b9f6de18b20e (patch) | |
| tree | 8f81d45c725d51f7bdc8ddeb647973a4449ec6c2 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 614082 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/14879-h.htm | 5403 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/images/1-tb.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49117 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/images/1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 333953 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/images/cover-tb.jpg | bin | 0 -> 14623 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 127290 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879-h/images/emblem.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1641 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879.txt | 5234 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 14879.zip | bin | 0 -> 84654 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
12 files changed, 10653 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/14879-h.zip b/14879-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..443c9b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h.zip diff --git a/14879-h/14879-h.htm b/14879-h/14879-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb85ffe --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/14879-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5403 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island, by Cyril Burleigh. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */ + .sidenote {width: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; margin-left: 1em; + float: right; clear: right; margin-top: 1em; + font-size: smaller; background: #eeeeee; border: dashed 1px;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;} + + .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;} + .poem br {display: none;} + .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + .poem span {display: block; margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;} + .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em;} + .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em;} + img {border: 0;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island, by Cyril Burleigh + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island + +Author: Cyril Burleigh + +Release Date: February 2, 2005 [EBook #14879] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Emmy and the PG Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + + + + + +</pre> + + + + +<h1>THE HILLTOP BOYS</h1> +<h1>ON LOST ISLAND</h1> +<p class="figcenter"><a href="./images/cover.jpg"><img src="./images/cover-tb.jpg" alt="Cover" title="Cover" /></a></p> + + +<h3>BY</h3> + +<h2>CYRIL BURLEIGH</h2> + +<p class="center">AUTHOR OF "THE HILLTOP BOYS" AND OTHER STORIES</p> + +<p class="figcenter"><img src="./images/emblem.jpg" alt="Emblem" title="Emblem" /></p> + +<p class="center">THE GOLDSMITH PUBLISHING CO.</p> + +<p class="center">CLEVELAND +MADE IN U.S.A.</p> + + +<p class="center">1917</p> + +<p class="center">PRESS OF</p> + +<p class="center">THE COMMERCIAL BOOKBINDING CO.<br /> +CLEVELAND</p> + +<p class="figcenter"><a href="./images/1.jpg"><img src="./images/1-tb.jpg" alt="He plunged the blade into the creature's vitals" title="He plunged the blade into the creature's vitals" /></a></p><p class="figcenter"><i>He plunged the blade into the creature's vitals</i></p> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> + +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td> +<td></td> +<td align='right'>PAGE</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>I</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE FLOATING ACADEMY</td> +<td align='right'>13</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>II</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>JACK'S DARING RESCUE</td> +<td align='right'>22</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>III</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS</td> +<td align='right'>29</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>IV</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>CAUGHT ON LOST ISLAND</td> +<td align='right'>37</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>V</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>EXPLORING THE ISLAND</td> +<td align='right'>45</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>VI</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>A WALK UNDER WATER</td> +<td align='right'>54</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>VII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>A REMARKABLE FIND</td> +<td align='right'>63</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>VIII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>DISCUSSING THE FIND</td> +<td align='right'>70</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><b>IX</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE LAST VISIT TO THE WRECK</td> +<td align='right'>81</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><b>X</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>A THRILLING ENCOUNTER</td> +<td align='right'>89</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><b>XI</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE VOICES IN THE WOODS</td> +<td align='right'>98</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><b>XII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>ADVENTURES IN THE WOODS</td> +<td align='right'>107</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><b>XIII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>A STRANGE LIGHT AT SEA</td> +<td align='right'>118</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><b>XIV</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE MAN WITH THE WHITE MUSTACHE</td> +<td align='right'>125</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><b>XV</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>JESSE W. IS SENT FOR HELP</td> +<td align='right'>132</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><b>XVI</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>BEN'S STRANGE STORY</td> +<td align='right'>140</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><b>XVII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>DISCOVERIES AND DISAPPOINTMENTS</td> +<td align='right'>148</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><b>XVIII</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>IN THE LAIR OF THE FOX</td> +<td align='right'>160</td></tr> + +<tr><td align='right'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><b>XIX</b></a></td> +<td align='left'>THE WAY OUT FOUND</td> +<td align='right'>170</td></tr> + +</table> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I" />CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>THE FLOATING ACADEMY</h3> + + +<p>"Well, if this is a life on the ocean wave or anything like it, I am +satisfied to remain on shore."</p> + +<p>"I knew that the Hudson river could cut up pretty lively at times, but the +frolics of the Hudson are not a patch on this."</p> + +<p>"They said we would not be seasick, but if I am not I don't know what you +call it. I don't want it any worse, at any rate."</p> + +<p>"They said it wouldn't hurt any if you were sick, but I wonder if they +ever tried it themselves?"</p> + +<p>"No, they are like the old bachelors who write about how to bring up +children. They never had any, so they don't know anything about them."</p> + +<p>"Well, if we get much more of this I shall get out and walk."</p> + +<p>"And I'll go with you, my boy."</p> + +<p>There were three boys on the deck of a large steam yacht, now about two +days out from New York, bound to the West Indies on a voyage combining +pleasure and education.</p> + +<p>The boys belonged to the Hilltop Academy, situated in the Highlands of the +Hudson, and their names were Billy Manners, Harry Dickson, and Arthur +Warren, all being close chums, and ready to share any adventure except +that of being seasick.</p> + +<p>They were none of them sick, but they were all afraid they would be, hence +their remarks upon the subject.</p> + +<p>There were close upon a hundred of the Hilltop Boys, and they were now on +a tour of the islands of the Spanish Main, having been invited by the +father of one of them, a man largely interested in the shipping business, +who had put at their service a commodious steam yacht large enough to hold +them all.</p> + +<p>Besides the boys there were Dr. Theophilus Wise, the principal, and a +number of his instructors, the negro coachman at the Academy, who was now +serving in the capacity of cook and general handy man to the doctor and +the boys, and the captain and crew, a considerable party all told.</p> + +<p>The sky was bright, there was none too much motion, and there was really +no reason why a lot of healthy boys should be seasick, and perhaps they +only feared they would be, and were just a little uncomfortable.</p> + +<p>They were to spend the Easter vacation and a few weeks longer among the +islands, continuing their studies as usual, and getting a knowledge of +geography and of many other things, which they could not get by merely +studying books, Dr. Wise having practical ideas on these points, and +having now a chance to carry them out through the generosity of Mr. Smith, +the shipping merchant, who had furnished the yacht.</p> + +<p>His son, Jesse W., one of the youngest boys at the Academy, had been found +and brought home when lost on the mountains by one of the Hilltop boys by +the name of Jack Sheldon, a general favorite at the Academy, and it was in +recognition of this act that he had decided to give the boys this glorious +vacation.</p> + +<p>As the three boys were complaining about the rough seas, and the chance of +becoming seasick, they were joined by two others, one of whom said in a +breezy voice and with a lively air:</p> + +<p>"Well, boys, how are you enjoying yourselves? Glorious weather, isn't it? +Fine breeze, just the thing to send us along, although we do not need it, +going under steam."</p> + +<p>"I'm glad you like it, Jack!" said Harry with a wry face, "but I can't say +that I do. You may be used to the water, but I am not."</p> + +<p>"I have never been at sea before," laughed Jack, "so I cannot be any more +used to it than you are. Perhaps you have been eating too much, that might +make you sick. You don't look it, at any rate."</p> + +<p>"I don't know how I look," muttered Billy Manners, stopping suddenly in +his walking, "but I know how I feel," and he made a dash for the cabin, +and was gone for some time, the others continuing their walk on deck.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes a smiling negro in a white jacket and cap came out of the +cabin carrying a tray containing cups of beef tea, which he offered to the +boys, saying with a grin:</p> + +<p>"Dis ain't like de beef soup yo' get at de 'cademy, sah, but mebby yo' +would like a bite or two dis mon'in' to sha'pen yo' appetite fo' dinnah?"</p> + +<p>"No, thanks, Bucephalus," said one of the boys, Dick Percival by name, who +was walking arm in arm with Jack. "I don't need anything to sharpen my +appetite, which is always good on sea or land."</p> + +<p>"The idea of offering a fellow anything to eat when he feels as I do," +growled Harry. "Take it away, Buck, or I'll throw you overboard."</p> + +<p>The high sounding name of the negro was often contracted to Buck by the +Hilltop boys, as in the present instance, but he was used to both, and +answered as readily to one as to the other, now saying with a broad grin:</p> + +<p>"Dat am a mistake, Mistah Harry. De worser yo' feel, de mo' yo' should put +in yo' stomach, dat is to say when yo' get good nourishmental food like +dis yer. Of co'se dey is detrimental substances which——"</p> + +<p>"That sort of talk will make me sick if nothing else will," said Harry, +hurrying away, while Jack and Dick sat down, and gazed out upon the +horizon, while sipping their bouillon and nibbling at their biscuits.</p> + +<p>"We will be in summer seas, as the advertisements call them, before long," +said Jack. "The air is pleasant enough as it is. Down here in the summer +it is pretty hot I take it, but in April it will be all right."</p> + +<p>"Think of us cruising around the Spanish main where the old buccaneers +used to roam," laughed Dick. "Perhaps we will dig up a pot of gold buried +on one of the islands by some of them."</p> + +<p>"If Captain Kidd had buried all the gold that folks said he did," replied +Jack, "he would have been kept busy till now. If people would work instead +of trying to find gold that was never buried, they would accomplish +something. The only treasure you dig out of the earth is the good crop you +get by working at your corn and potatoes."</p> + +<p>"That's true philosophy, Jack. I have never had to dig anything for +myself, having rich folks who always looked after me. Perhaps it would +have been better for me if I had had to do more for myself."</p> + +<p>"Well, you are not a spoiled child, Dick," said Jack, "as some sons of +rich parents are. You are not idle nor vicious, and you know the value of +money. You will do for yourself when you leave school. You are going +through a training now, that will do you good later."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose so, but your having to do for yourself has made you a +stronger, more self-reliant fellow than I will ever be."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I don't know," returned Jack, half laughing, half seriously. "I am +not patting myself on the back, Dick."</p> + +<p>"No, you never would."</p> + +<p>The two boys were great friends, and were the leading spirits in the +Academy, having a great many friends, and being looked up to by the +greater part of the boys, and especially by the younger ones, who took +them as models.</p> + +<p>Dick was somewhat older than Jack, and was farther along in his classes, +having had more advantages, but Jack was studious and ambitious, and bade +fair to catch up with his older companion and schoolmate before many +months had passed, having already in the few months he had been at the +Academy greatly shortened the lead which Percival had in the beginning.</p> + +<p>Two days later the yacht was in much pleasanter waters, and the air was +quite warm and balmy, the boys going around in lighter clothing than +before, wearing mostly white flannel or duck, canvas shoes and caps, and +no waistcoats, some wearing only white trousers and shirts, and belts +around their waists, so as to get the most comfort they could.</p> + +<p>They were among the islands now, and expected to make a landing in a day +or so, when they were farther down the Spanish main than they were at that +time, the islands in the lower latitudes being more interesting in the +doctor's opinion than the larger and better known ones.</p> + +<p>It was a pleasant afternoon; none of the boys felt any touches of +seasickness now, and many of them were walking up and down the deck, some +taking their comfort under awnings spread aft near the cabin companion, +and some being on the bridge watching the steersman or looking out to sea +in search of sails or noting the flight of the gulls and other seabirds or +studying the movements of the dolphins playing around the bow, there being +many of these lively creatures about.</p> + +<p>Dick and Jack were on the bridge whence they could obtain a full view of +the deck and look all about them, ahead and astern, and on all sides, Jack +greatly enjoying gazing out upon the wide expanse and searching the +horizon for sails or a hazy view of some distant island.</p> + +<p>Below, on the quarter deck, which was guarded by a low rail only, was +young Jesse W. Smith, who took great pride in his full name and always +insisted upon being called by it, for whom primarily this expedition had +been gotten up, strutting up and down in sailor's trousers and shirt, +seeming to feel as if he were the commander of the entire southern fleet.</p> + +<p>"There's young Jesse, enjoying himself and seeming ready to say with the +fellow in the poem that he is monarch of all he sees," laughed Dick.</p> + +<p>"That was supposed to be Alexander Selkirk, the original Robinson Crusoe, +Dick," said Jack. "The line is 'I am monarch of all I survey.' You must +have recited it more than once in your younger days. That is not +altogether a safe place for young Jesse W., though. That rail is not very +high, and if we should happen to give a roll——"</p> + +<p>"You don't think there is any danger, Jack! Hadn't you better warn him!"</p> + +<p>"No, but I will go down and——" and Jack started to go to the main deck +and speak quietly to the boy. But before he had hardly said the words +there was a sudden startled cry and Jack, looking down quickly, saw that +the very thing he had feared had taken place.</p> + +<p>How it came about no one knew, but all of a sudden there was a loud cry of +"man overboard!" and Jack saw the boy just going down in the water.</p> + +<p>He was on the lower deck in a moment, and in another had thrown aside his +coat and kicked off his shoes, running to the rail as he did so.</p> + +<p>The cook had just been killing chickens on the forward deck, and was going +aft with two or three fowls in one hand, a knife in the other.</p> + +<p>As Jack reached the rail he saw something out on the water, just where the +boy had gone down that made him turn icy cold in a moment.</p> + +<p>Snatching the knife from the cook's hand, he sprang to the rail and leaped +overboard, taking neither rope nor life preserver with him.</p> + +<p>"By George! that's just what Jack feared, and there he is going to the +rescue before any one has shouted, almost!" exclaimed Percival, as he +hurried below.</p> + +<p>"H'm! pretty clever of Sheldon," sneered a stout, unprepossessing boy, who +seemed to be always scowling. "Knocks the kid overboard, and then goes to +his rescue to make himself solid with the father. Very clever stroke, +that, and just like him!"</p> + +<p>"If you say anything like that of Jack Sheldon, Pete Herring," stormed +Dick, who had heard the ill-natured remark, "I'll knock you overboard!"</p> + +<p>Herring, who was by no means a favorite in the Academy, quite the reverse, +in fact, had not supposed that Percival had heard his uncalled for and +utterly false assertion, and now hurried away with a snarl, evidently +fearing that Dick would carry out his threat.</p> + +<p>The captain, as soon as possible, gave orders to stop the engines, and to +hold the yacht near to the place where the boys had gone down, being ready +to turn and go to their assistance when they should appear again.</p> + +<p>All was excitement on board, for, until now, nothing had happened out of +the ordinary, and no one thought of being seasick or of complaining of the +monotony of the voyage.</p> + +<p>Jack came to the surface, looked around him, saw young Jesse W. just +coming up and shouting for help while he swam, and then, not far behind, +what had caused him to take the knife with him, the sharp dorsal fin of a +good-sized shark moving rapidly through the water.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II" />CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>JACK'S DARING RESCUE</h3> + + +<p>Straight toward the swimming boy swam Jack, rapidly estimating the +distance between them and the distance to be covered by the shark, the +presence of which was not yet known by the younger boy.</p> + +<p>He could swim, but he was more or less encumbered by his clothes, wide +bottomed trousers and full shirt, and could not make as good progress as +Jack in any event.</p> + +<p>Then, as he was only a little fellow, and probably not accustomed to +swimming very far out of his depth, Jack looked for his strength giving +out at any moment.</p> + +<p>"Keep up, J.W., you are doing fine!" he shouted, swimming straight on with +a long, even stroke, which carried him rapidly toward the struggling boy.</p> + +<p>Then some one on the yacht, with more anxiety than good judgment, shouted +out so that all could hear him:</p> + +<p>"Look out for the shark, look out!"</p> + +<p>The instant that the younger boy heard this, he turned his head and cast a +frightened look behind him, seeing the sharp fin just beginning to turn +over in the water.</p> + +<p>"Don't look, Jesse W., don't look, swim straight ahead!" cried Jack, who +had come up with the boy.</p> + +<p>Then he dove deep down so as to come up under the shark before he could +turn and rush at the boy so near him.</p> + +<p>Down went Jack, and presently began to rise, seeing the white belly of the +man eater just above him.</p> + +<p>With a fierce upward thrust of his right arm, which held the knife he had +taken from the cook, he plunged the blade into the creature's vitals, +drawing it downward and toward him, and turning his hand as he drew, thus +making a jagged cut, and fairly laying open the shark's belly.</p> + +<p>Young Smith, encouraged by Jack's shout, had darted ahead with his little +remaining strength, not again looking back, and knowing too well what was +about to happen when Jack dove.</p> + +<p>As the shark, mortally wounded, floated away, to be eaten by others of his +kind, Jesse W. suddenly became faint and felt himself giving out.</p> + +<p>Jack arose in a moment, however, and called out cheerily:</p> + +<p>"Hold on a moment, young fellow, and I'll be there. You mustn't give out +yet, because they haven't put about to take us aboard."</p> + +<p>The younger boy held out till Jack reached him, but seemed about to go +under again when Jack said quickly:</p> + +<p>"Here, get on my back and you won't have to swim. I'll tow you all right, +and you can get rested."</p> + +<p>"Did you kill him, Jack?" gasped the younger boy, as he obeyed the older +one's instructions.</p> + +<p>"Yes, yes, but never mind about that. Don't look behind you, just look +straight ahead. I don't know that there's anything there anyhow, but it is +always a good plan to look the way you're going to avoid accidents."</p> + +<p>"You're a funny fellow, Jack," said the other. "You don't want me to see +the sharks and be frightened."</p> + +<p>"That's all right, old man, but there are no sharks at present, and if any +come they will be too busy taking bites out of the other to bother me for +a time. H'm! they are putting about. That's all right."</p> + +<p>"You can carry me and swim yourself all right, Jack?" asked Jesse W. +"Maybe I can swim a bit myself now."</p> + +<p>"Never you mind about that," said Jack. "You just stay on my back till I +tell you to get off," and the boy swam with a good, steady stroke toward +the approaching yacht, keeping a lookout for sharks, as he knew they would +be sure to appear soon, seeming to scent blood for miles.</p> + +<p>Without letting the younger boy know that he was on the lookout he kept a +strict watch on all sides for more of the rapacious creatures, and at +length discovered two making for him in different directions, one of them +suddenly appearing between him and the yacht, which was rapidly +approaching.</p> + +<p>"That fellow will be frightened off or perhaps go under the vessel," he +thought, "but the other one is coming on pretty fast. I hope he won't get +to the yacht before me."</p> + +<p>The people on the yacht saw the shark between them and Jack, and Dick +Percival seized a gun from the captain, aimed at the creature and fired, +doing no great damage, but causing the voracious monster to rush off to +one side, and out of his direct course.</p> + +<p>Sharks have other fish to guide them, and without these they are helpless, +which was the case with this one, who, in his sudden change of course, got +away from his pilots, and had to be hunted up by them before he could get +his bearings on the boys in the water.</p> + +<p>This created a diversion in Jack's favor, and he swam on sturdily, +splashing and kicking, and making a great disturbance to frighten away the +second shark, which was coming alarmingly close to him.</p> + +<p>The yacht was coming on, however, and now they bore down toward him, +slackening speed a bit, one of the sailors throwing the boy a line.</p> + +<p>Jack caught it with one hand, as it settled over his head, and said to the +boy on his back:</p> + +<p>"Hang on, young fellow, and they'll haul us both up together. You are no +sort of weight, but just hang on."</p> + +<p>Jesse W. did as he was told, and both boys were hauled on board the yacht, +Dick, Harry, Arthur, Billy Manners and half a dozen others pulling in +heartily on the line.</p> + +<p>They were drawn on board just in time, for the baffled shark made one +terrific jump out of water as they reached the deck, the gangway having +been opened, and banged his nose against the plankshire, falling back into +the sea with a great splash.</p> + +<p>Bucephalus was at the gangway, an axe in his hand, and as the shark gave +his jump he aimed a swinging blow at the monster, but failed to hit him.</p> + +<p>"Go back dere, yo' sassy feller," he sputtered. "Ah jus' like to get one +good crack at yo' an' Ah rip yo' side open. Don' yo' perambulate dis yer +way again if yo' know what am salubrious fo' yo', yo'heah?"</p> + +<p>Bucephalus was fond of using big words, but did not always use them in the +most appropriate manner, so that the boys were always kept guessing as to +what he was next going to say when excited.</p> + +<p>The boys nearest the rail seized Jack and young Smith as they came on +deck, and bore them in triumph to the cabin.</p> + +<p>"Bully for Jack Sheldon!" shouted Harry, and fifty boys gave him the +heartiest kind of a cheer.</p> + +<p>"That's some nerve he showed," declared Arthur Warren, "but then, he +always did have nerve, Jack did. If he didn't he wouldn't have done the +things he has."</p> + +<p>"H'm! anybody could do that," said Herring with a snarl. "The yacht was +close to him all the time. You fellows are all the time cracking up Jack +Sheldon, but I don't see that he is any great shakes."</p> + +<p>"No, you wouldn't," said Billy Manners, with an emphasis on the pronoun, +"but decent fellows can see it. Would you have gone over after young +Smith?"</p> + +<p>"There wasn't any need to do it," growled Herring. "If I'd seen him first +I'd have done it."</p> + +<p>"You saw it as soon as any one except Jack himself, and you were nearer +the deck," said Percival, who came up in time to hear what Herring had +said. "I heard you say that Jack pushed the boy overboard so as to get the +name of rescuing him. You know that this is a lie, because Jack was on the +bridge at that time, and could not have done it. Jack and I both saw young +Jesse W. go overboard. Jack feared he might, and had started to go to the +deck when the thing happened."</p> + +<p>Herring did not care to get into a quarrel with Percival, who was much +stronger and better built than himself, and he, therefore, went away +muttering something which the boys could not make out.</p> + +<p>"He is always saying something nasty against Jack," declared Arthur. "He +hates Jack because Jack is smarter, and a general favorite. I wish he had +stayed on shore, but as Mr. Smith invited the whole Academy he could not +very well be left behind."</p> + +<p>"He ought to be marooned on some solitary, uninhabited island, and left +there to hate himself," chuckled Billy Manners.</p> + +<p>"They don't do those things nowadays, Billy," said Percival. "You have +been reading the lives of the pirates, and are full of that sort of +romantic stuff."</p> + +<p>"Maybe I am," chuckled Billy good naturedly, "but here come Jack and young +Jesse W., looking as fine as fiddles, and not a bit worse for their baths. +Whoop it up for them, boys!"</p> + +<p>Every boy in sight responded to the summons, and gave both boys the +heartiest cheers, both Jack and his young companion being favorites.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III" />CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS</h3> + + +<p>Neither Jack nor young Smith felt any the worse for his tumble into the +warm waters of the Caribbean, and after they had changed their clothes +they went on deck to assure their schoolmates that they were all right, +and suffering no inconvenience from their trip overboard.</p> + +<p>"Jack is a great sport," declared Jesse W., "but somebody called out +'shark!' a little too quick, for I nearly went to pieces. It may Have been +kind in him, but it was injudicious, to say the least."</p> + +<p>The boys smiled at the young fellow's wisdom, and Billy Manners replied:</p> + +<p>"Well, it wasn't me, J.W., although I know I do a good many fool things. +You can't lay that at my door, however."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you are a facetious fellow, and keep us amused, but you do think of +things," replied the younger boy. "The person who shouted 'shark,' is one +of the sort who yell 'fire' at the first sign of smoke, and raise a panic +in a crowded hall. They should be suppressed."</p> + +<p>"Very true, J.W., you have the right of it," said Billy, smiling. "You get +the right idea under your bonnet now and then."</p> + +<p>Young Smith had always been fond of Jack, but he was more so now and stuck +close to the older boy on all occasions, saying the next day to Jack as +they were walking on deck:</p> + +<p>"Do you know, Jack, you have done a lot for me, and it is time I did +something for you. I am going to speak to my father about you. It is a bit +of a job for you to get your schooling and your living and everything, +isn't it?"</p> + +<p>"Well, it is not so easy, Jesse W., and I do have a tussle now and then," +returned Jack, smiling at the other boy's earnestness. "Still, one has to +work for what he gets in this world."</p> + +<p>"Unless he steals it, and there is no satisfaction in that," said the +smaller boy wisely. "And later he has to work—in jail. What I wanted to +say was that now you have done this last thing for me, saving my life, +that's what it was, I think my father would like to do something for you, +help you through your schooling or something like that. Of course you +would not want him to give you money, for he does not put a commercial +value on my life, but he could help you to get ahead and so help yourself, +couldn't he now, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"I suppose he could," Jack laughed, "and you are a thoughtful young +fellow, J.W., but never mind about that. One of the sailors, Bucephalus, +any one, in fact, could have done what I did. In fact, it is all in the +day's work at sea, and nothing is thought of it."</p> + +<p>"No, but no one else did it, Jack. Any one might, but no one did. Only +you. Any one else could have done it, but they did not all the same. +That's nonsense about your pitching me overboard. I heard some of them +talking of it. Why, you were not there. I was on the quarter deck, where I +had no business to be, I suppose, with just a little bit of a low rail, +and when the vessel took a sudden roll I went overboard."</p> + +<p>"Jack saw you up there," said Percival, who was walking with the others, +"and spoke about warning you that it was dangerous. In fact, he was on the +way to tell you when you got ahead of him and rolled overboard."</p> + +<p>"Jack is all the time thinking of some one," said young Smith. "That's +what makes him different from the other Hilltop boys."</p> + +<p>"Oh, then you don't think I think of others, eh? That's one on me."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you haven't had to, Dick, you have always had some one to think for +you," said Jesse W. wisely, and both Dick and Jack laughed.</p> + +<p>"That young fellow will be doing something for you, Jack," said Percival a +few minutes later when the two happened to be alone. "He is thinking of it +now, and later you will hear from it."</p> + +<p>"I suppose he will," said Jack thoughtfully, "and I don't know how I can +stop him. I could not help doing what I did, but you would have done the +same if you had seen the danger before I did."</p> + +<p>"But I did not," returned Dick, "and that is just young Smith's line of +argument. It is nothing that you could have done something if you don't do +it. Well, you deserve all that can be done for you, and that is all there +is about it, old chap."</p> + +<p>Two days later in the middle of the afternoon, the day having been warm +with very little air stirring so that the boys were glad to seek the +shelter of the awnings spread across the decks, the breeze suddenly fell +away and the air became fairly stifling.</p> + +<p>The captain looked anxious, and ordered the awnings taken down, and told +the boys that they had better go below.</p> + +<p>Dr. Wise and the professors got the boys below, and none too soon, for all +of a sudden a funnel-shaped cloud appeared on the horizon, spread with +startling rapidity until it covered the entire heavens, and then from it +shot out a fierce flash of lightning, while the wind which had died out +now blew from an unexpected quarter with the greatest fury.</p> + +<p>Being under their own steam they, of course, had no use for sails, which +would have been blown away.</p> + +<p>For all that the waves dashed them ahead with great rapidity and the +propellers were now high out of water and now buried deep in the sea, the +yacht being almost unmanageable.</p> + +<p>The wind was behind them, and there was no chance of going about in such a +blow and with such great waves dashing against them, so in pitch darkness +they sped on, no one knew where.</p> + +<p>The electric lights in the cabin and the saloons were turned on so that +the boys were not in darkness, and some of the officers moved about among +them telling them that this was simply a squall, and would soon blow +itself out, and that there was nothing to be feared.</p> + +<p>The howling of the gale, the creaking and straining of the shrouds, the +thumping and pounding and groaning of the machinery, and the tramping of +men overhead made a combination of sounds that might well terrify anyone, +and the older boys tried to reassure the younger ones that it would be +over in a short time, and that they would soon be sailing on smooth seas +again, and be laughing at their former terrors, but it took a great deal +of faith to make all this believed, and some of those who urged it had +very little confidence in its truth.</p> + +<p>Herring, Merritt, and others of the same class were really terrified, and +took on dreadfully, predicting all sorts of dreadful things, and declared +that they were fools to have taken this voyage, and that they would never +undertake another.</p> + +<p>Jack Sheldon, Dick Percival, Harry Dickson, and even mercurial Billy +Manners were quite different, however, and young Jesse W. Smith acted like +a man, and although he was frightened, as any one might be, and no shame +to him, did not give way to his fright, but said very wisely that he +guessed the storm had been gotten up for their especial benefit so that +they might know what sort of things they could do in these latitudes.</p> + +<p>How long they were rushing before wind and sea they did not know, for it +seemed ages, where they were going they could not guess either as they had +come from an unexpected quarter, and so suddenly that they had not noticed +its direction, and were not where they could look at the compass.</p> + +<p>All was bright and cheerful in the cabins, but through the portholes they +could see that all was dark outside with an occasional vivid flash of +lightning, these coming less and less frequent at length till they ceased, +and then the skies began to brighten.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, however, before it was yet bright enough outside to make out any +objects, there was a sudden rush forward as if they had been struck by a +great wave, then a sudden upheaving as if they were mounting to the sky, +then another long rush forward, and then a shock as if they had struck +something, and for a few moments the lights went out.</p> + +<p>When they flared up again the vessel seemed to be at anchor, and the boys +said to each other:</p> + +<p>"What is the matter, have we struck on a rock, are we sinking, what is the +matter anyhow?"</p> + +<p>There was no confusion on deck, as there would have been if what the boys +feared had really happened, and presently one of the officers came below +and said reassuringly:</p> + +<p>"Well, we are all right as far as I can see, but where we are is another +story. In some landlocked bay, apparently, but where it is or how we +reached it I can't tell."</p> + +<p>"We were struck by a cyclone, weren't we, Officer?" asked young Smith, +with a wise air.</p> + +<p>"That's just what it was, and when those things strike you they strike +hard. Lucky for us that we happened to be going ahead of it, for if we had +been head on to it we might not have survived."</p> + +<p>"But there is no danger, we have not struck a rock or anything, we have no +holes in our hull?"</p> + +<p>"None that we can see. We are beached somewhere, and we may slide into +deeper water, but as far as we can tell now we are safe enough. Where we +are, however, will have to be determined when the sun comes out."</p> + +<p>The boys were reassured by this news, and after a time some of them went +out on deck, the yacht being now almost motionless, the waves just lapping +their sides, and running lazily up a beach, which they could now just make +out at a little distance.</p> + +<p>It grew lighter and lighter quite rapidly, and at length the sun appeared, +and they found themselves in a landlocked bay with a white beach in front +of them, beyond that a thick grove of palms of various kinds, green hills +on all sides and in the distance, straight ahead, a hill of considerable +size crowned with a thick growth of trees.</p> + +<p>As the sun grew brighter the scene increased in attractiveness, and the +greater part of the boys were charmed by it, making many exclamations of +delight, as they turned from one object to another.</p> + +<p>"It's a fine place wherever it is," said Jack. "I suppose they will locate +it to-morrow, and perhaps some one will come out to the yacht, and tell us +where we are."</p> + +<p>"I don't see any sign of dwellings," murmured Percival. "Perhaps there are +no people on it. Not all of these little islands are inhabited, and I +suppose it is an island?"</p> + +<p>"Probably, for I do not think we are near the South American coast. Some +one will know after a bit, doubtless. At any rate, we are safe and that is +a good deal."</p> + +<p>One of the officers came along where the two boys were standing, and Jack +asked him if he knew where they were.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't," was the answer. "We have not been able to get an +observation yet, and we started off at such a gait that it was impossible +to tell where we were going or at what rate. We will probably locate +ourselves in the morning, but there is no danger so you can make your +minds easy on that point, young gentlemen."</p> + +<p>"There is a good deal in that, sir," said both boys.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV" />CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>CAUGHT ON LOST ISLAND</h3> + + +<p>The sun set gloriously, and after a short twilight common to those +latitudes the full moon arose over the hills, and all the stars came out +little by little till the heavens were full of them.</p> + +<p>The moon dimmed their brightness somewhat, but they were still very +brilliant, and the night was a glorious one, the air warm and balmy, the +breeze just enough to temper the heat of the air, and all around them sea +and shore bathed in moonlight.</p> + +<p>After dinner, which was served in the saloon as usual, the boys went out +on deck for the most part, and enjoyed the beautiful evening, being +dispersed in little groups here and there, some seated and some walking +the decks.</p> + +<p>"We are safe enough, anyhow," observed Jack to Percival and a few of the +boys who were seated on deck with him, "and I suppose we will not leave +here till the morning at any rate."</p> + +<p>"We are sheltered in this bay, and even if there should be a storm outside +we will not feel it," returned Percival. "I hardly think there is one, and +it seems strange that we should have caught that cyclone at this time of +the year. Isn't it unusual?"</p> + +<p>"You can't call anything unusual in the tropics," laughed Jack. "I believe +you are liable to catch anything at any time here from yellow fever to a +tornado. They seem to have them always on hand."</p> + +<p>"Well, we are safe now, at any rate, and I am glad for that much. We will +make the best of this fine night, and take other things as they come."</p> + +<p>It was late when the last of the boys went to bed, for they all wanted to +make the most of the fine night, but they were all up early the next +morning, anxious to learn where they were, and if they would stay at the +island or put to sea again.</p> + +<p>Jack was the first of the boys on deck, and when he reached there he saw +Dr. Wise talking to the captain and the first officer, there being a +grizzled old seaman conversing with Bucephalus at a short distance.</p> + +<p>The doctor and the officers seemed to be carrying on a very earnest +conversation, and Jack heard a little of it as he came forward, and then +suddenly stopped, fearing that he might be intruding.</p> + +<p>"We are on the bottom, sir, and I don't know how long we may be there," +said Captain Storms. "The next high tide may raise us, and it may not. It +is my opinion that we have been on the bottom ever since we came into the +bay, and how we are going to lighten her I don't know."</p> + +<p>"But there are no holes, we have opened no seams, we have not taken in any +water?" asked the doctor, looking fixedly at the captain through his big +black-rimmed spectacles.</p> + +<p>"No, there are no open seams and no water. The bottom is sandy, too, I +think, and not the sharp coral rock you find in these parts that will cut +a hole in anything that touches it. No, it is simply a case of too little +water to float us, but that, as I may say, may be remedied. Time will +tell."</p> + +<p>"Then you do not think there is any cause for alarm, sir?"</p> + +<p>"Not any great amount, no, sir. The moon is not quite full, although it +looked so last night, and when it fills we may get higher water. We can +tell to-night. Meanwhile, there are the boats, and your young gentlemen +may go on shore and explore the island. I don't think there are any people +on it, as it seems very small. Many of the islands hereabouts have no one +on them."</p> + +<p>"You don't know which one it is as yet?"</p> + +<p>"No, I don't."</p> + +<p>The doctor walked forward, and looked over the rail, and Jack went up to +Bucephalus, and the old sailor and said:</p> + +<p>"You don't know where we are, either of you, I suppose?"</p> + +<p>"Ah haven't de remotest ideah, sah," replied the negro, "an' far as Ah can +make o't dis gentleman am in de same predicament. He says we am in de +tropics at a island ob not werry big size an' importance, but Ah was aware +of dese fac's mahself befo' Ah interrogated him, sah, so dat Ah am no +furder dan Ah was befo', sah."</p> + +<p>"This here is an island in the Spanish Main, the place where the old +pirates and buccaneers used to roam," said the old sailor whose name Jack +learned later was Ben Bowline, "and that's all I know about it. You didn't +come lookin' fur Cap'n Kidd's treasure, did you?"</p> + +<p>"No, we did not, and I don't believe we would find it if we had. Men are +foolish that go looking for such things. I don't believe that Captain Kidd +buried the hundredth part of the gold that he is reputed to have buried. I +have other things to do besides looking for buried gold."</p> + +<p>"You're about right," said Ben, "but there's plenty who do look for it, +and spend their lives at it and don't get nothing. This here is one of +them islands, and I thought mebby you boys had come a-lookin' for +something like that. Boys haven't anymore sense."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, but you'll find that the Hilltop boys have a good deal more +sense than that."</p> + +<p>After breakfast two of the yacht's boats were lowered, and some of the +boys went ashore to explore the island and amuse themselves in various +ways while the captain sent a party to find the outlet of the bay, and see +what their chances for leaving the island might be.</p> + +<p>Jack, Percival, Harry, Arthur and young Smith went on one boat, and were +the first to land, walking up the beach and into the woods as the other +boat came ashore.</p> + +<p>Picking a path as they went on Jack and his companions pushed into the +deep everglade, the lush undergrowth sometimes quite impeding their +progress, and making their advance very slow.</p> + +<p>"If we were going to be here any time," said Percival, "we should have to +make a path so that we could get about with greater rapidity. If we had +thought to bring an axe it would have been better."</p> + +<p>After a time their progress was more rapid, as the undergrowth was less +rank, and they went on with more comfort.</p> + +<p>Many varieties of cactus, prickly pears, plums and plants with the most +gorgeous flowers lined their path, and gave constant delight to young +Smith and some of the others, but Jack and Percival were more intent on +seeing where they would come out than in looking at plants and flowers, +and they gave the latter little attention.</p> + +<p>"There is certainly no one on the island," said Jack at length when they +came out upon an upland glade more open to the sky than the parts already +traversed, "or we should have seen them by this time. I think we have been +going in the same general direction, Dick, so suppose we push on in the +same line, and see where we come out."</p> + +<p>"All right, but there are hills, which we may have to climb if we keep +straight on. There they are ahead of us."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I see them, but they do not seem to be very high nor far away. If +they want us back at the yacht they will probably blow the bugle."</p> + +<p>They pushed on across the open space, and then through a wood where it was +not so easy to advance and at length, without noticing it, began to +descend, the way being good at times and at others very difficult so that +they were frequently obliged to halt and get breath.</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't wonder if we were the pioneers of this island," said Harry, +"for no one seems to have been through here before. How do you stand it, +young Smith, all right?"</p> + +<p>"Well, it is not so easy as walking along Broadway in New York," rejoined +Jesse W., "but I can manage it, I guess."</p> + +<p>"It strikes me that we are going down instead of up," observed Arthur, +"and we thought we would have to climb the hills we saw."</p> + +<p>"You often have to go up and down two or three times in climbing a +mountain," said Jack. "It looks all up from a distance, but there are +often intervening valleys, which have to be crossed, and then you go up +again."</p> + +<p>"This must be a pretty deep one, then," said Harry, "for we are going down +at a pretty steep incline now."</p> + +<p>They pushed on, passing through many great masses of rock, and still going +down at a decided angle until at length they came out upon a bare, rocky +shore with huge masses of rock to the right and left, and beyond a line of +reefs over which the surf was dashing, all being white both beyond and +inside the reefs.</p> + +<p>"We are on the other side of the island!" exclaimed Jack, "and we have not +climbed our hills at all or else they were so slight that we did not +notice them."</p> + +<p>"I would not like to be in a vessel driven on this side of the island," +said Percival. "See how the surf dashes over those reefs. You would go to +pieces in a short time."</p> + +<p>"That may be the reason why there are no people on it," said Jack. "It is +not very big, I take it, and is probably difficult of access. We seem to +have come to it without knowing it, and if we had I don't believe we would +have gone near it."</p> + +<p>They stood watching the surf, and taking in various parts of the shore, +seeing a great mass of rocks higher than those at hand, to the east of the +larger mass close in to land, and at length Jack suggested that they +return to the other side.</p> + +<p>"We ought to be able to follow the path we made coming across," he said, +"and in any event, we know the general direction, and if we do go astray a +bit it won't matter."</p> + +<p>They set out upon their return, and came out not far from where they had +started, finding Billy Manners and three or four of the boys on shore +waiting for them.</p> + +<p>"We thought you might be along soon," said Billy. "Would you believe it, +they don't know what this island is after all, don't know the name of it, +I mean."</p> + +<p>"How is that?" asked Harry. "Isn't it charted?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is charted all right, but there is no name given to it. The +captain says it is a sort of lost island, and they never thought enough of +it to give it a name or if it had one they didn't think it was good enough +to put on the chart."</p> + +<p>"Lost Island is a good enough name for us," observed Jack. "Suppose we +call it that while we are here. That will not be long, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"H'm! I don't know about that," Billy returned. "They have the yacht +afloat all right. They started the engines, and backed her off a sand bank +or whatever it was we were on, and are now in fairly deep water, but as to +leaving the island that is another matter."</p> + +<p>"How is it?" asked all the boys in a breath.</p> + +<p>"Because there is a line of reefs stretching right across the mouth of the +bay, and there seems to be no way of getting beyond them. There seem to be +openings here and there, but they are so narrow that the captain does not +think it wise to try to go through them."</p> + +<p>"Then we are lost on Lost Island, and are lost ourselves," said Jack.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V" />CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>EXPLORING THE ISLAND</h3> + + +<p>The boys returned to the yacht in time for dinner, and here their +situation was talked over by the doctor and the captain, the former +assuring the boys that there was no great danger, for the yacht was +equipped with a wireless service, and the captain could easily make his +predicament known, and vessels would doubtless be sent to his relief.</p> + +<p>"We may pursue our studies as usual," the doctor continued, whereupon +there were wry looks upon the faces of many of the boys, "and as soon as +we get away from here we will pursue our voyage. It is simply an incident, +not an accident in our plans as arranged."</p> + +<p>After dinner Jack got one of the yacht's boats, and took Dick and young +Smith with him to the mouth of the bay to get a view of the reefs.</p> + +<p>For some little distance they could not see the opening of the bay on +account of its windings, the hills preventing them from getting a view of +the sea, but at length in rounding a wooded point they came in sight of +it.</p> + +<p>There were reefs in front of them, at some little distance, and points of +rocks on both sides, the outer bay being of considerable size, but +generally exposed to the weather, which they were not in the inner bay.</p> + +<p>They pushed on for some little distance, but not too near the reefs, where +they would be exposed to the force of the surf that dashed over the latter +and Jack presently pointed out a strange looking object on his right and +at some little distance.</p> + +<p>"I should say that that was a flagstaff sticking out of the rocks," he +said, "if it were not the most unlikely thing in the world that there +should be one there. If any one wanted to plant a flag-pole they would go +up higher on the rocks, I should think."</p> + +<p>"See if you can get a little nearer to it, Jack," said Dick. "It looks too +big for a flagstaff, but it might be the stump of a mast."</p> + +<p>"Which is much more likely," replied Jack. "A vessel might have gone +ashore there, and show the stump of a mast above water. It is a wonder to +me that we were not in the same predicament."</p> + +<p>"The only way that I account for it is that we were hit by a tidal wave or +the end of one, and carried right over the reefs without scratching, and +then the force of the water carried us to the inner bay where it left us +stranded for a time."</p> + +<p>"That sounds reasonable, and in the absence of any other explanation may +as well be received as the right one. I think you are correct about its +being the stump of a mast, Dick."</p> + +<p>Jack rowed as close to the point of rocks as he dared, not caring to be +dashed upon them, the landing being bad, and the boys got a better view of +the object that Jack had noticed.</p> + +<p>It was out in the water, and projected about five feet, and, being broken +off apparently about half way to the crosstrees, should be at least that +distance under water.</p> + +<p>"I should say there was five or six feet of water there," said Jack, "and +you can see from the marks on it that this broken end is still below high +water mark. I don't see any sign of a bowsprit but maybe that was broken +off when she struck."</p> + +<p>"And we can't tell whether this is the fore, main or mizzen," observed +Dick; "or whether she had more than two masts. There must be some of her +hull left, but it is all under water and maybe deeper than you think."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Jack musingly, "and I am very glad that we are above it and +safe, even if we are on a lost island. The tide is coming in steadily now, +and there will be more surf, so I think it just as well not to be too near +the reefs."</p> + +<p>"We might get ashore at some other point farther back, and examine this +part of the coast," suggested Percival.</p> + +<p>"That woody point which we rounded and so came in sight of the outer bay +might be a good place," added young Smith, who seemed a boy of ideas, +although he was a little fellow and younger than the others. "We could go +ashore there, I think, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, so we might," said Jack, as he began to row back. "There is time +now, I think. We have not got to go right back."</p> + +<p>He pulled on till he reached the point of woods and then looked for a good +place to land, finally finding one where there was a narrow white beach +and a bank which sloped gradually up to a distance of twenty feet to a +ledge whence there was another rise of about twenty feet to another grassy +bank.</p> + +<p>"This seems to be a good place," he said, as he pulled in to the little +beach. "Here is an old stump to which we can tie the boat so that it may +not drift away from us when the tide comes in if it reaches this point."</p> + +<p>Making the boat fast with plenty of slack to the rope in case the tide +should rise high, he got out and then he and Percival ascended the first +slope, helping Jesse W. between them.</p> + +<p>There was room enough for all of them on the bank, but it did not appear +to extend very far, and after taking a rest of a few minutes they set out +to ascend to the next landing place where they again rested.</p> + +<p>Here there was more room than before, but it was farther to the next +stopping place, and there was still more room when that would be reached.</p> + +<p>From this point they could see much of the inner bay, and make out the +yacht at anchor, but could not see much beyond that, and Jack suggested +that they go to a still higher point, and get another observation.</p> + +<p>There were trees, big and little, and rough rocks here and there, which +would aid them in making the ascent, and they kept on till they reached +another good stopping place of greater extent whence they could see much +more than before.</p> + +<p>Jack and Dick helped young Jesse W. up the bank, as, otherwise, it would +have been hard for the little fellow, who was under the average size for +boys of his age, and he felt quite proud of being with the older boys, and +said as he looked around on the water and the island and the yacht lying +at anchor:</p> + +<p>"When I tell the other fellows that I came up here they won't believe me. +I tell you, it is something to have two such big fellows to look after a +little shrimp like me."</p> + +<p>"Never mind, J.W., you will grow if you will only wait," laughed Jack. "We +were all little fellows once."</p> + +<p>"What sort of place is this, anyhow?" asked the smaller boy, looking about +him. "There are woods and rocks, and down there I can see that stump of a +mast. I wonder if we could see more of her by——"</p> + +<p>He was walking on, looking at the mast sticking out of water more than at +the ground at his feet when suddenly Jack noticed that he was right on the +edge of a hole just discernible in the tall grass.</p> + +<p>He darted forward, and caught the boy's arm just as he was about to step +into this hole without seeing it, and pulled him back.</p> + +<p>"Look out, Jesse W., or you'll go in!" he cried. "You don't know how deep +that place is nor where it will land you."</p> + +<p>"H'm! I never noticed it. It does seem deep, doesn't it? I wonder how far +down it goes, and what's at the end? Water, do you suppose?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, I'm sure," said Jack, "but you might have had a bad fall, +my boy. You don't want to go star-gazing like that in strange places. You +never know what may be in the way. Always look where you are going."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that's good advice, but I wonder if there is anything down there +anyhow? Do you suppose we could get down?"</p> + +<p>"Possibly," returned Jack thoughtfully, "but I imagine it is a pretty good +job to get down there and a bigger one to get back, and nothing down there +anyhow."</p> + +<p>"You can't tell without going down," said the younger boy wisely, as he +knelt on the edge of the hole, and looked down. "Have you got a pocket +light with you? We might tell something with that."</p> + +<p>Jack parted the tall grass, and just then the sun shone out brightly, as +the breeze blew aside the branches, and a broad track of sunlight was let +into the hole.</p> + +<p>"It does not go straight down," said Dick, who was now at Jack's side. "In +fact, I don't think it is as steep as the path we came up. We might go +down and investigate."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but what would there be there when we got down?" asked the other +half impatiently. "We ran the risk of breaking a leg or an arm just for +the sake of exploring a hole in the ground, and get nothing out of it. If +there was anything there, now——"</p> + +<p>"Yon don't know till you look, as Jesse W. just remarked, and there might +be something there after all. Some of Captain Kidd's treasure, for +instance."</p> + +<p>"Nonsense! You are full of Captain Kidd's treasure, and so are half the +boys. You won't find anything down there, and you will have your trouble +for your pains."</p> + +<p>"I'm going to look just for the fun of it, anyhow," said Dick, "although +it would be very convenient to have a light as J.W. suggests. Another time +we can bring one."</p> + +<p>The sun shone more strongly into the hole, and Dick began to descend, +using a stout stick, which he had broken from a tree near at hand, to +assist him in going down.</p> + +<p>The smaller boy looked rather wistfully into the hole as Dick went down, +and Jack, breaking another stout stick, asked:</p> + +<p>"Do you want to go down there, young fellow, and follow Dick Percival on a +fool's errand?"</p> + +<p>"It might not be that," said the other, "and I would like to go."</p> + +<p>"All right, then, come along. Here is a staff for you. I can do without +one, I think. Keep close to me. Can you walk upright, Dick?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, generally," came back the answer in a muffled voice. "My! but the +place is filled with echoes, Jack. It goes down quite a distance I should +say. The light is a big help. Funny, but there seems to be a light down +here, although where it comes from I can't say."</p> + +<p>The boys kept going down and at length Jack said, pausing and trying to +pierce the darkness, the light that Percival had spoken of not being +visible at that moment:</p> + +<p>"I think we would better get a light, Dick. We don't know where we are +going, and it is dark. It is never safe to go anywhere in the dark unless +one is familiar with his surroundings."</p> + +<p>"That's true enough, Jack. Have you any matches? The next time we come +this way, if we do, we had better take a flashlight along."</p> + +<p>"I have matches," said Jack, and in a moment a tiny blaze shot up, +increasing till it enabled them to see to some extent where they were.</p> + +<p>They were still descending, but in a short time were on more level ground +or rock, whatever it was, proceeding till the match went out, and a few +steps farther when Dick suddenly brought up against something and +exclaimed in surprise:</p> + +<p>"Hello! we cannot go any farther, Jack. Strike another match, and let us +see where we are."</p> + +<p>Jack lighted two or three matches at once, and held them just above his +head so as to obtain a good view of his surroundings.</p> + +<p>"Hello! what is this?" exclaimed Percival. "A cave, or what?"</p> + +<p>Just before them was a jagged opening into some region beyond, but whether +it was a cave or not puzzled them.</p> + +<p>Jack went closer, and held his light in the jagged opening.</p> + +<p>"It's a hole in the side of a vessel, Dick!" he cried in amazement.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI" />CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>A WALK UNDER WATER</h3> + + +<p>"That's what it is, Jack," said Dick, after the first sensation of +astonishment had passed. "It is more in the bow than on the side, however. +You can see how she narrows a little farther on. This hole is pretty well +forward. I tell you what! This is the vessel we saw under water, or the +one that stump of a mast belongs to, at any rate."</p> + +<p>"I believe it is, Dick. Probably she drove in here, had a hole smashed in +her bow, and then sank. The earth has settled in between the masses of +rock above and around her, and hidden her, but there is still the fissure +down which we have just come."</p> + +<p>"This is as good as finding Captain Kidd's treasure, isn't it?" exclaimed +young Smith. "We never expected to find anything. Shall we go in and see +what more there is, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"We may find ourselves in the water before we know it," murmured Jack. +"No, I think we would better stay where we are. It is the safest plan by +long odds. It looks like taking too many chances to go into a place like +that. Better wait till another time."</p> + +<p>"Give me a match or two, Jack," said Percival. "I'll promise not to take +too great a risk."</p> + +<p>Jack handed him the matches, and he struck them, and advanced a step or +two into the opening.</p> + +<p>"It is plenty wide enough," Percival said. "Yes, these are ship's timbers, +all right. She must have struck hard to make such a gash. We are on a +level with the lower deck. I can't see much cargo around, but there is a +way aft. This must be a sort of steerage, and the lower hold where the +cargo is stored is below us. I believe we could walk right ahead to the +after bulkhead, and if there happens to be a door in it, as is often the +case, straight into the after cabin."</p> + +<p>"If there were anything to make a torch of, Dick, I'd go with you," said +Jack, "for I am as much interested as you are in this strange find, but we +don't know what we might stumble against or into what hole we might fall. +Wait, Dick. We shall not probably leave the island for some time, and +there will be opportunities to find out more about it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose so, but I would like to find them out now. However, you +have the right of it, and it is just as well to be cautious."</p> + +<p>"Besides, I have only a few more matches left, and we must get back to +where we started. If you and I were alone——"</p> + +<p>"Yes, quite right," and Dick came out, as his matches were extinguished, +and they started back.</p> + +<p>A match or two gave them all the light they wanted till they began to +ascend, the way up being more difficult than coming down, and both older +boys being obliged to assist the younger one.</p> + +<p>However, they reached the top at last, the light seeming to be almost +dazzling after they had been used to the darkness for even the short time +they were down in the strange place.</p> + +<p>"I never knew the sun to be so bright," said Jesse W. "It's like what men +say coming up out of a deep well is."</p> + +<p>"We'll go there again," said Percival. "I want to know more about the +place. Better not say anything to the other fellows. We'll have them +swarming over the place if we do, and then there is more or less danger in +going down there."</p> + +<p>"I believe you want to keep the discovery all to yourself in case we did +find treasure there," said Jack. "Probably there is nothing more than a +lot of spoiled beef and some old clothes."</p> + +<p>"Oh, after we have seen all there is to be seen I don't care, but I do +want to have it to ourselves until we have had a chance to see all there +is to be seen. Think of going into a vessel through a hole in the side. +Very few people can say they have done that."</p> + +<p>"There'll be no getting the vessel out of that now," said young Smith. "I +wonder how old it is!"</p> + +<p>"It cannot be so very old," replied Jack. "If she were, the moss and slime +on that stump of a mast would be thicker, and there would not be so much +of the stump. Probably she is filled with water in any event."</p> + +<p>"There was none in the part we saw."</p> + +<p>"No, as that was above water, but the lower part undoubtedly is. I do not +believe we could go all the way through as Dick suggests."</p> + +<p>They went back to the place where they had left the boat, made their way +down and rowed back to the yacht, where they went on board, and saw some +of the boys, telling them of visiting the reefs, but saying nothing of the +strange discovery of the vessel among the rocks.</p> + +<p>There was a very high tide that night, but Captain Storms decided that it +would be very unwise to try to pass beyond the reefs, none of the openings +being wide enough and the surf very heavy.</p> + +<p>"There is no use, young gentlemen," he said to Jack and Dick and a few +others. "We will have to stay here for a time until I can get in +connection with the outside world. Then, perhaps, some one may know about +this place, and a way out of it. One vessel has gone down here, and I +don't care to be the next, and leave my mainmast sticking up out of the +water to show folks the way to destruction."</p> + +<p>"We saw that stump ourselves," said Jack. "Was that wreck long ago, do you +think?"</p> + +<p>"Not so many years, twenty, perhaps, or maybe less. The rocks would hold +her tight, but I don't believe there's much left of her. Nothing worth +taking away, I guess."</p> + +<p>Jack gave Dick a peculiar look, and neither of the boys told what they had +seen.</p> + +<p>The boys had lessons and a lecture that afternoon, and again the next +morning and in the afternoon were free to go about as they pleased, +explore the island or go out on the water with some of the sailors.</p> + +<p>"I want to take another look at that old vessel," said Percival to Jack +after dinner. "I have borrowed a stout rope and an axe, and I have my +pocket light with me. Will you go along, Jack? I suppose we should take +J.W. with us, but he is a little fellow, and there might be danger."</p> + +<p>"If we find anything whatever we can take him another time," said Jack. "I +don't want anything to happen to the young fellow. Some of the boys may be +saying that I took him to a dangerous place just to have the name of +rescuing him again."</p> + +<p>"You don't mind what such fellows as Herring and some of the rest say, I +hope?" sputtered Percival.</p> + +<p>"Not altogether, but it is annoying all the same."</p> + +<p>"What those fellows need is a good thrashing."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't like this constant wrangling, and I keep away from them as +much as possible and don't give any cause for talk."</p> + +<p>"Which is the cheapest kind of goods dealt in. Never mind them, but come +along and make another investigation of the wreck. I believe we may find +something in it."</p> + +<p>"Spoiled beef and rotten clothes," laughed Jack. "However, I will go with +you, Dick."</p> + +<p>They took the boat and rowed to the woody point where they made fast, and +climbed to the top as before, having much less trouble on account of not +having the younger boy to assist.</p> + +<p>They made their rope fast to a tree near the edge of the hole among the +rocks, and by its help descended to the bottom, then lighting their way to +the hole in the side of the vessel.</p> + +<p>With the axe Percival cut away the jagged edges of the timbers at the +opening, and then he and Jack pushed forward, using the axe now and again +as rubbish of various kinds came in their way.</p> + +<p>They could see boxes and bales and casks on either side as they went on, +there being a passage-way between the tiers of the cargo, and here and +there a post or stanchion had half fallen and impeded their progress, +obliging them to cut it.</p> + +<p>As Percival had predicted, there was a door at the end of the bulkhead, +dividing the hold from the cabin, but this was fast.</p> + +<p>"It is not very thick," said Percival. "I believe I can break it in with a +blow of the axe."</p> + +<p>"Wait a moment, Dick," said Jack cautiously. "Listen! It strikes me I hear +the sound of water. We don't want to let a flood in on us. It is likely +that the after hold and cabin are full of water, and we don't want to be +swamped."</p> + +<p>Percival put his ear to the door, and then flashed his light through the +keyhole.</p> + +<p>"There's nothing there, Jack," he said. "If there were water it would come +through here. We have gone so far, and I'd like to go the rest of the way +and get to the cabin. I believe we can. There is probably a passage on one +side of the companion leading to the after cabin."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and the companion is open, and the place full of water."</p> + +<p>"There is none here, at any rate, and it will be time enough to look for +trouble when it comes," returned Percival impatiently. "Stand aside, old +man, and throw the light on the door so that I can give a good blow."</p> + +<p>Jack did as requested, and Percival raised the axe and dealt the door a +sturdy blow, which took it off its hinges and sent it crashing into a +narrow passage beyond.</p> + +<p>"There is no water there!" he exclaimed in triumph. "Come on, Jack."</p> + +<p>The two boys went into the passage, stepping over the fallen door, Jack +showing the way with the pocket electric light, which was great use to +them in the strange place.</p> + +<p>The passage was narrow, not wide enough for the two boys to walk side by +side, and was about two fathoms in length, leading to another door which +was fast like the first.</p> + +<p>In many vessels there is a passage like this leading from the after cabin +to the steerage, where the entire hold is not open from the hatches to the +keel, as in big ships, which the captain may use in reaching certain +portions of the cargo with less trouble than in the case of its being +stored in a solid bulk.</p> + +<p>"Here is another door, Jack," said Percival. "I don't see any sign of a +companionway from the deck."</p> + +<p>"No," said Jack, putting his ear to the door and listening intently. "I +can hear the swash of water just the same, Dick. We had better be a bit +careful."</p> + +<p>"We would hear it here, anyhow, Jack. There is water outside, and I don't +suppose there is much depth here. You would be very likely to hear it the +same as you hear water dashing against the side of a vessel when you are +in the hold. It doesn't follow that the water is beyond there."</p> + +<p>"No, I guess not. Well, give it a smash, and be ready to run in case there +is water there."</p> + +<p>Percival took as much room as he could in the narrow passage, swung the +axe, and sent the door crashing into the space beyond.</p> + +<p>Instead of a flood of water breaking in upon the boys, as Jack more than +half expected, there was considerably more light while the sound of water +was more distinguishable than before.</p> + +<p>"Well! I declare!" exclaimed Percival, pressing forward.</p> + +<p>The boys found themselves in the after cabin of a vessel, which was as dry +as if she had been in her dock, a soft light from overhead showing them +the details of the place perfectly, even without the light of the torch.</p> + +<p>"We are under water, Jack!" cried Percival.</p> + +<p>"So it seems."</p> + +<p>"That light comes from the bull's-eye overhead. The water over it softens +the light. Otherwise, the sun would pour right into the place."</p> + +<p>"That would be better than having the water pouring in on us, Dick. The +flashings of that skylight are tighter than most of them, however, or the +water would have gotten in here long before now."</p> + +<p>"It is just possible that the glass has been covered with sand which has +been lately washed away. That would fill all the cracks around the +flashings and make them tight. Very likely the wave that sent us in here +has uncovered the skylight, and that is how it is light in here. It is +dry, too, Jack. Why, this is like being in one of the submarines we have +read of."</p> + +<p>"Where you slide back a panel and look at the fishes in procession, +through a plate-glass port," laughed Jack. "That always seemed absurd to +me, but there are lots of things that Verne wrote about which have been +more than realized."</p> + +<p>"I should say so! Why, his balloons and his submersibles would not be a +patch upon what are actually in use these days."</p> + +<p>"Well, now that we know it is safe here, and the water is not going to +pour in upon us, let us have a look at the place," said Jack.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII" />CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>A REMARKABLE FIND</h3> + + +<p>The cabin where the boys now found themselves, so strangely lighted and so +marvelously discovered, was not of any great size and was evidently the +stateroom of the late commander of the vessel, which itself was not of any +great size so far as the boys could determine.</p> + +<p>It was furnished with a standing bed fixed against the side, a table and +two chairs, all fixed to keep them from moving about when there was any +commotion outside.</p> + +<p>The skylight was just above the table, which could be used in writing or +to have a meal served upon, there being evidences of its having been used +for both purposes at the time of the wreck, for there were papers and +writing materials scattered about, and a plate and a wine glass just under +it, having fallen off during the commotion of the wreck.</p> + +<p>There were lockers along the floor under the bed, and along the sides of +the cabin, and in one corner a heavy chest such as seamen often use to +contain their valuables, this being brassbound and padlocked.</p> + +<p>There was a small door forward and another aft, but the boys did not +attempt to see what was beyond either of them, being satisfied with what +they saw, and not knowing what dangers they might bring upon themselves by +doing so.</p> + +<p>"It's a bit uncanny, Jack," murmured Percival, "having the water so near +to us and not knowing at what moment it may come in upon us. One of those +doors probably leads to the companionway going on deck, and the other to +the cockpit, but I don't think it would be wise to open either."</p> + +<p>"No," said Jack, picking up a bit of writing from the floor.</p> + +<p>"There may be, and probably is, another door beyond this after one leading +into the cockpit," pursued Percival, "but we don't know if we would let +the water in upon us, and it is just as well to leave it alone for the +present. The other doubtless leads to the companionway, and there may be +another one beyond at the top or perhaps at the bottom. I don't see how +the water has not made its way in here, but——"</p> + +<p>"Both doors are of iron," said Jack. "Probably the skipper wanted privacy, +and—do you read Spanish, Dick! You know a number of modern languages, +more or less."</p> + +<p>"No, not very well, but what made you ask me?" replied Percival in some +surprise. "What have you got there, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"A letter addressed to some official in Mexico, but whether of the +provisional or rebel government I cannot make out."</p> + +<p>"H'm! you are always picking up strange letters."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it seems so. You are thinking of the one I found in the flying +machine. We never settled whether that was really genuine or not, Dick, +but this seems to be so. As far as I can make out it refers to a shipment +of some sort, arms or gold or—why, Dick, this wreck cannot be so old, +after all. The date of this is only that of last year and late at that."</p> + +<p>"Then that knocks the Captain Kidd idea silly!"</p> + +<p>"Never mind Captain Kidd. Let us see if we can open this chest. Do you +know, I am a bit nervous about staying down here too long. You said it was +uncanny, and so it is. I'll save these letters," picking up another from +the floor. "Suppose we try the chest, Dick."</p> + +<p>"The only reason that the water did not come in through that hole forward +is that it was probably made by the rocks when she struck and this after +part is much lower. She was caught fast and could not fall back. Well, +what about the chest, can you open it?" for Jack was kneeling before it, +and trying the fastenings.</p> + +<p>"I don't know. The lock is closed, but it is only an ordinary iron one, +and perhaps you might break it with the axe. There is no other lock that I +can see. Try breaking it open, Dick."</p> + +<p>Percival struck the padlock a terrific blow with the axe, and broke it in +half, it being just a cast-iron affair and easily broken.</p> + +<p>"It seems funny to put a lock like that upon a chest supposed to contain +something worth while," remarked Jack, as he removed the pieces of the +lock, pulled aside the hasp and opened the chest. "That is the way some +persons do, however."</p> + +<p>Throwing back the lid of the chest he found a tray containing some papers, +a pair of pistols and a knife, a few odd trinkets of very little value, +some loose cigarettes, two or three dozen in number, a cheap photograph, +and a purse made of silver mesh containing a few gold coins.</p> + +<p>"Whose picture is that, Dick?" he asked, handing the photograph to +Percival, who took it and examined it carefully.</p> + +<p>"Why, that's Villa or some of those rebel Mexicans," Dick answered. "I +have seen it in the papers often. What's in the body of the chest?"</p> + +<p>Jack removed the tray and set it on the floor, opening his eyes with +astonishment, and giving vent to a startled exclamation at the same time.</p> + +<p>"Well, it is not Captain Kidd, Dick," he cried, "but it is money, just the +same, bags of it, and gold," untying the cord around one of the bags, and +showing it to be full of gold pieces.</p> + +<p>"Not pieces of eight, Jack?" asked Percival with a broad grin.</p> + +<p>"No, American twenties and tens, and a few English sovereigns," said Jack, +taking out a handful of the coins. "Why, there's more than a hundred +dollars right in my fist."</p> + +<p>"And a lot of bags, too, Jack," and Percival bent over and looked into the +chest. "There must be thousands of dollars there, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, if they all contain gold. Take care of this one, Dick, while——"</p> + +<p>At that moment there was a sudden heavy sound outside, and both boys +started up in surprise.</p> + +<p>"What's that, Dick?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, but I don't like it."</p> + +<p>"There is no water coming in?"</p> + +<p>"Not that I can see."</p> + +<p>The sound was repeated, louder than before, and Percival said nervously, +while his cheek was noticed to have perceptibly paled:</p> + +<p>"Let us get out of here, Jack. I am frightened, I admit. If anything +should happen to you I would never forgive myself."</p> + +<p>He closed the lid of the chest with his foot, caught Jack by the arm, and +said as he hurried away:</p> + +<p>"I don't know what it is, but I am not taking any risks."</p> + +<p>They hurried along the passage by which they had entered the cabin, +reached the hole in the bow by which they had entered and then, as +Percival turned on his flashlight, which he had extinguished after +entering the cabin aft, they hurried forward toward the hole in the rocks.</p> + +<p>"There is no water here, Dick, at any rate," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"No, there is not, but I can't think what made—hello!"</p> + +<p>"What's the matter, Dick?"</p> + +<p>"Where is the way up? I can't find it. The passage was not a wide one, was +it? We cannot have gone astray?"</p> + +<p>"No, I don't see how we could," muttered Jack, as he looked around him, +the place being well lighted by Dick's flash. "Hello! I see what the +trouble is, and now I know what the noise was."</p> + +<p>"Well?" asked Percival.</p> + +<p>"Some of the rocks have fallen in, Dick. That was what made the noise. +Here is our rope. We are in the right place, therefore. The way up is +closed, however. Or, at any rate, it is closed here, but I don't +believe——"</p> + +<p>"The rocks were not loose, were they, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"I did not notice that they were, and there has been no rain to send them +down. They must have been loose, however. How else could they have tumbled +in?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, unless some one took a bar or a pole, and sent them down +that way."</p> + +<p>"Nonsense, Dick! Who would do that?"</p> + +<p>"I know plenty who would do it. Who pushed you into the ravine, back at +Hilltop at the risk of your life?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, but there is no one around, and no one knew where we were going. You +don't suspect little Jesse W., do you?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed," said Percival, with a hearty laugh, "but some one has seen +us go down here, and they have thrown down the rocks to make it harder for +us to get out."</p> + +<p>"It does not seem likely, Dick," said Jack in a doubting tone. "There was +no one about, and we are the only ones who know the place. We said nothing +about it, and young Smith will keep quiet. Come, that is hardly worth +thinking of. Let us see how we can get out. There must be some way."</p> + +<p>Dick turned his light this way and that, and Jack lighted a match, saying +with a significant chuckle:</p> + +<p>"That is all very well, but this is better for our purpose. Watch!"</p> + +<p>The flame presently began to flicker, and indicated the presence of a +draught of air, Jack noticing the direction whence it came, said:</p> + +<p>"Try this way, Dick. There is a draught which makes the flame flicker. Try +the axe on the rocks and see if you can loosen them, or, better yet, see +if there isn't a fissure somewhere."</p> + +<p>"Yes, there is," said Percival, climbing a mass of rock somewhat to one +side of where the others had fallen. "Yes, I see it, Jack."</p> + +<p>Between them, working with the axe and their hands, the boys opened up a +passage between the rocks wide enough for them to crawl through, and in a +few minutes were on the top of the wooded point only a few yards from +where they had entered the strange place.</p> + +<p>"The boat's gone, Jack!" exclaimed Percival.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII" />CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>DISCUSSING THE FIND</h3> + + +<p>The boys could see the water and the bank from where they stood, and Dick +had been the first to notice that the boat was not where they had left it +before going down into the buried wreck.</p> + +<p>"I suppose it might have drifted away," said Jack. "The warp could have +become loosened."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it could have done so," sputtered Percival, "but it did not do so +without help. The same fellows who tumbled the rocks into the hole took +away the boat. I have an idea who they were. I spoke pretty sharp to +Herring the other day, and he has probably been nursing his wrath ever +since."</p> + +<p>"You are too suspicious, Dick, and—hello! did you bring that bag with +you?" for the first time noticing that Percival had the bag of coin which +he himself had handed to his friend.</p> + +<p>"Yes, you told me to take care of it, and I did," and Percival put the bag +in the outside pocket of his jacket. "Well have to hail the yacht, old +chap. We can make our way in that direction along the top of the bank. It +is not such bad going, and then we have the axe if it is necessary to cut +our way through the undergrowth."</p> + +<p>They set out along the top of the bank, keeping a lookout for the vessel, +now and then having to cut their way on account of the thickness of the +growth, which was often as high as their waists.</p> + +<p>"The rocks could not have fallen in by themselves, and the boat gotten +adrift at the same time," muttered Percival as they went on. "Both of +these things were done by some one who wished to annoy us. Watch and see +how some of the fellows look when we get back."</p> + +<p>"Very well, I will, but I don't see why any one should have done it, +perhaps both of these things were accidents."</p> + +<p>"Either one of them might have been, but is it likely that both were, and +that they happened at the same time? Of course not. You will find that +Herring or Merritt, or perhaps both, have had a hand in it. They don't +like you, and do everything to hurt you, and they don't care any more for +me than they do for you. Bother this tangle! It keeps you busy every +moment. I believe things grow up here in a night. There will be bare rocks +one day and a regular forest on them the next. It beats all how things do +grow in these tropical islands!"</p> + +<p>Keeping on, now in sight of the water, and then having to leave it on +account of the thickness of the jungle, they pushed on till they saw the +yacht lying at anchor.</p> + +<p>Descending to the shore at the risk of a bad fall, they hailed the vessel, +and presently some one put out in a boat and came toward them.</p> + +<p>Bucephalus and old Ben Bowline were in the boat, the old sailor hailing +them when he neared the shore.</p> + +<p>"Well, mateys, did you think you'd walk out to the yacht?" he asked. "The +old man was afraid you'd fallen in, and been gobbled up by sharks. Some of +the boys found the boat adrift, and brought it in. Don't you know how to +tie up a boat yet? I'll show you some knots if you don't know them."</p> + +<p>"We know all the knots you can show us, Ben, and perhaps a good many +more," grunted Percival. "The boat was tied all right, but——"</p> + +<p>"Wha' was yo' goin' to say, sah?" asked Bucephalus.</p> + +<p>"Some one untied it," said Percival. "Who brought it back, Buck?"</p> + +<p>"Ah donno, sah, Ah didn' saw dem, othahwise Ah could identify de pussons. +Have yo' any ideah as to deir pussonality you'se'f, sah?"</p> + +<p>"I have an idea, but ideas can't hang a man. Anyhow, I don't want it to +get abroad that Jack Sheldon and I do not know how to tie up a boat or tie +any ordinary kind of knot. The whole Academy would laugh at us if that +notion got around."</p> + +<p>"Ah reckon de 'cademy knows all abo't yo' an' Mistah Jack a'ready an' wha' +yo' done befo' dis," said the negro with a broad grin. "Ah reckon, too, +dat de story was a fabrication puah an' simple. Fact am, if Ah done tol' a +story lak dat folks would call it a lie witho't mincin' wo'ds."</p> + +<p>"That's about what it was," said Percival, as he and Jack got into the +boat, and Bucephalus and Ben Bowline started to row them to the yacht.</p> + +<p>"I had a comical adventure with a boat myself once, mateys, if you care to +hear it," said old Ben as he bent leisurely upon his oar, "but maybe the +young gentleman won't believe it."</p> + +<p>"Go ahead, Ben, let's have it," spoke up Jack. "Never mind whether we +believe it or not. It will amuse us at any rate."</p> + +<p>"A sailor man is a mo' pribileged pusson dan one what resides on sho', +Ah've noticed," observed Bucephalus. "Folks lak to listen to dem an' dey +don' call it lyin', whereas an' on de oder han', ef Ah indulge in any +picturesque adaptations o' de trufe dey say Ah'm lyin' right away."</p> + +<p>"Never mind that," chuckled Percival. "There is no hurry and Ben wants to +spin his yarn, so you might as well let him. Take it easy. There is no +hurry. Go ahead, Ben."</p> + +<p>The old sailor was a good deal mollified by Dick's present attitude, and +taking an easy stroke with his oar, he began his more or less veracious +narrative.</p> + +<p>"It was down on the coast o' South Ameriky that this here thing happened, +but I never had it put in the log 'cause the old man wasn't along an' +nothin' went into it that he didn't see hisself; but it's just as true, +I'm giving you my word——"</p> + +<p>"As the one about the whale!" roared Dick. "Go on, Ben."</p> + +<p>"We was sailin' along the coast o' South Ameriky," Ben went on, "when one +day as I was cleanin' out one o' the boats to have ready when we went +ashore, which we judged would be in a little while, there come up a sudden +squall an' I was chucked clean overboard, boat and all.</p> + +<p>"Davits, falls, blocks and everything went, and me too, striking the water +kerplump. Then it got so dark that I couldn't see nothin', and where I was +I had no idee, no more'n nothin', 'cause I couldn't see a thing and there +was such a noise all around that I couldn't hear a thing. Then it come on +to rain for further orders and I was just drenched to the skin and had all +I could do to keep the boat bailed out.</p> + +<p>"I couldn't see nor hear anything of the old hooker and I just drifted +without knowin' where I was goin' and not carin' much nuther, bein' wet to +the hide an' tired out with bailin' an' just ready to flop down an' quit.</p> + +<p>"Well, I drifted an' drifted without knowin' where I was driftin', till +finally I seen a shore at some distance off an' took the oars an' pulled +for it, havin' somethin' to think of now.</p> + +<p>"It was still a-rainin', but I didn't care for that now, but just pulled +for shore till it got dark again and stopped rainin', which was a comfort. +I pulled on till it was too dark to see anythin', and then I come to a +stake stickin' out of the water and hitched my boat to it and lay in the +bottom an' went right to sleep.</p> + +<p>"As long as I was tethered to the stake or bush or whatever it was I +reckoned I was all right, an' so I slep' on without feelin' a bit alarmed, +knowin' that I wouldn't drift no more an' in the mornin' I could go on an' +reach the shore.</p> + +<p>"When I woke up in the mornin' I was mightily astonished to find myself +lyin' on the ground at the foot of a big tree and to find the boat hangin' +to the topmost limb. Ye see, the rainwater had run off an' left the ground +bare again, and as the boat slipped down to the perpendickalar I was +dropped out an' went from branch to branch till——"</p> + +<p>Percival let out a hearty laugh and fairly shook himself, saying at last +when he could find breath:</p> + +<p>"Baron Munchausen with variations. I've heard that story before, Ben, but +the rain was snow and the twig was a church steeple. Still, it's a good +story and will bear a bit of a change."</p> + +<p>"H'm! I knowed you'd say I was lyin'!" grunted Ben, pulling heartily on +his oar and cutting his story short.</p> + +<p>Dick put the bag of gold and the letters Jack had picked up in his trunk +under his berth and locked it, saying nothing at that time to any one, but +resolving to go again with Jack, and bring away the chest if they could +manage it.</p> + +<p>He meant to tell the doctor about their wonderful find when they had all +of it safely in their possession, and to have the letters translated so as +to learn definitely all about the wrecked vessel and its mission, but just +now he thought it wise to say nothing and Jack agreed with him.</p> + +<p>Not all of the boys were on the yacht when the two young adventurers +returned, and nothing was said about their having to hail the yacht, but +as the others began to arrive, some time later, Percival watched them in +turn to see if he could distinguish guilty looks on the faces of any.</p> + +<p>When Herring and Merritt came on board he suddenly stepped out from behind +a funnel, which had hidden him so that the two bullies did not see him +till just as he faced them.</p> + +<p>Both of them showed surprise, and Percival said to himself:</p> + +<p>"They are the ones, just as I supposed. When anything happens to me or +Jack and especially to Jack, look out for Pete Herring."</p> + +<p>The two bullies passed him as quickly as they could, and had nothing to +say, being evidently much astonished at seeing him on the yacht, but +fearing to say anything lest they should betray themselves.</p> + +<p>Passing Percival they came suddenly upon Jack, not having time to prepare +for a meeting with him, and both of them flushed crimson.</p> + +<p>"Oh, then it was you who found the boat afloat and brought it back?" Jack +said carelessly. "Very kind of you, I am sure."</p> + +<p>"What boat, what are you talking about?" growled Herring, turning redder +than ever. "I don't know nothing about no boats."</p> + +<p>"No, I suppose not," laughed Jack carelessly, and then going on to join +Percival, who said:</p> + +<p>"Herring and Merritt are the fellows."</p> + +<p>"Yes, so I supposed. They don't know anything about it. They never know +anything about things that happen to me, and generally you cannot prove it +on them."</p> + +<p>"We can't now, but I am satisfied that they were in it just the same."</p> + +<p>"Well, we got out of it all right, so there is no need of accusing them. +The next time we go there we will be on the watch."</p> + +<p>"I suppose they saw the boat, and then came up to see what we were doing, +saw the rope and knew we were down in the hole, and closed it upon us."</p> + +<p>"They might have drawn up the rope, but they don't think of everything, +fellows like that."</p> + +<p>"No, they do not, and that's how you can catch them."</p> + +<p>Later Dick and Jack saw the captain and Dr. Wise in the cabin, and told +about the wrecked schooner, as she probably was, and of the visit to the +cabin under water, and the finding of the gold.</p> + +<p>Dick exhibited the bag Jack had given him, and showed the letters found on +the floor, the captain being able to read them.</p> + +<p>"There were money and supplies shipped to the Mexican rebel leader," he +said, "and probably the vessel may have been chased, and put in among the +islands of the Caribbean to get away, and was wrecked here. There is quite +a lot of money in this bag, about a thousand dollars, and if there are +many of the bags and they are all as full as this, you will have a pretty +good sum to dispose of."</p> + +<p>"The money belongs to Jack," said Percival. "He discovered the wreck and +it should be his. He needs the money, and I do not."</p> + +<p>"You worked with me," put in Jack, "and if I have any of it you should +have a share. Does it belong to us, however?"</p> + +<p>"Of course it does," said Captain Storms. "You found it and that's the law +of treasure trove. It isn't likely that the Mexican rebels or their agents +will put in a claim for it, and it is yours all right."</p> + +<p>"But we have not got the rest of it," said Jack, "and the hold might be +flooded before we go there again. It is a wonder that the water has kept +out as long as it has."</p> + +<p>"The iron doors have done a lot to keep it out; they are probably +watertight. That cabin you were in was like a strong room, and maybe the +skipper had it built that way a purpose. You don't know what sort of crew +you may get when you are on a lay of this sort, and I guess he wasn't +taking chances, having a lot of money on board."</p> + +<p>"That may account for it, but it made me feel a little creepy being in +there, and knowing that the water was just above me, and perhaps on the +other side of those doors."</p> + +<p>"I don't wonder. They say divers get afraid when they see all sorts of +fishes swimming around them under water. I'd like to go to the place with +you. I've had some queer adventures, but nothing so queer as that."</p> + +<p>"I should be very glad to have you, sir, and if you want a share of the +money in the chest——"</p> + +<p>"No, that's all right. It belongs to you and your friend and the little +fellow, too, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"Why, of course, they must have their share of it."</p> + +<p>"I don't think Jesse W. will take it, and, anyhow, he was not with us when +we went into the cabin, and I certainly don't want it," said Percival. "It +all belongs to you, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Not if I don't want to take it," Jack replied with a laugh. "How are you +going to make me take it, Dick?"</p> + +<p>"I'm sure I don't know, but it ought to be yours, just the same. I'd like +to get the rest of it, and suppose we go after it to-morrow?"</p> + +<p>"That will be all right."</p> + +<p>"And I'll go along to help you," said the captain. "There's no getting out +of here right away, and we may as well do something. I can't get any +answer to my wireless messages yet, and maybe folks think they're only a +joke, and don't pay any attention."</p> + +<p>"You have tried to get New York?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and Havana and any place I can, but I can't do anything. I don't +know if I am tuned up with those fellows or whether they think it is only +a joke or what. I've tried American and International, wired S.O.S. and +all the different distress signals, but could not seem to make +connection."</p> + +<p>"Why don't you try Mr. Smith in New York? He would be interested on +account of his boy. Try a plain commercial message. That ought to go. You +can at least try it."</p> + +<p>"That is very sensible advice," said the doctor. "I suppose you have been +sending out distress signals, and the wireless people, if they have caught +you up simply regard it as a hoax."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll try again, and do as the young man suggests. In the meantime +I'd like to visit this wreck. I never was in a ship's cabin under water +when it was safe, and I'd like to try it."</p> + +<p>"We will go to-morrow," said Jack.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX" />CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>THE LAST VISIT TO THE WRECK</h3> + + +<p>The next day, as agreed upon, they went to the old wreck on the rocks to +get more of the treasure in the hold, and to satisfy the captain's +curiosity about the place.</p> + +<p>It had gotten around among the boys that Jack and Dick had found a sunken +treasure, and there were stories of fabulous wealth afloat in a short +time, all the boys, with a few exceptions, wishing to visit the place and +gaze upon the buried gold with their own eyes.</p> + +<p>"We cannot have all those boys visiting the place and getting in our way," +sputtered Percival when it was suggested by Harry that he and one or two +others go with the party.</p> + +<p>"But we would not be in the way," said young Dickson, "and we might be of +assistance."</p> + +<p>"How did you find it out anyhow?" asked Percival. "We did not say anything +about it."</p> + +<p>"I don't know, but, at any rate, it is all around, and everybody knows +about it. I heard Herring talking about it. He seems to think it is a big +hoax, and that you did not find anything."</p> + +<p>"Well, we did, all the same, but we don't want a lot of fellows with us, +and, besides, it is dangerous. Never mind, Hal. You are in with us on the +most of our adventures, but I don't think you had better go this time. We +have promised to take young Jesse W. with us, as he was there the first +time, but not the second, and he has never seen the cabin with its strange +lights, the swash of water outside, the chest of gold and all that."</p> + +<p>"H'm! you make me want to go with you all the more," said Harry, half +laughing, half impatient. "You should not appeal to a boy's imagination +like that, Dick. I want to go with you now the worst way."</p> + +<p>"Well, I suppose you do, but you'll have to be satisfied with what I tell +you about it. I'll write a composition about it, and you will think you +are reading Jules Verne and the Arabian Nights all over again."</p> + +<p>"You be smothered!" sputtered Harry, half cross and half good natured. "As +if that would satisfy me."</p> + +<p>"It will have to, Hal," laughed Percival. "Never mind, I'll give you a +ten-dollar gold piece to hang on your watch chain as a charm. You can say +it was one that Captain Kidd had."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and they were not made at that time, two hundred years ago," said +Harry in disgust. "Well, never mind. Billy Manners and I will find a +buried treasure, and never let you have a smell of it"</p> + +<p>"All right, Harry," and Dick went away to get Jack, young Smith and the +captain, and start on their visit to the point.</p> + +<p>The captain had a rope and an axe, and Jack took his pocket flash along +with him, having found it very useful on the second visit to the submerged +vessel.</p> + +<p>They climbed up the rocks, and found the place where they had gone down, +but now the opening was so small, more rocks having fallen in, apparently, +since their last visit, that they doubted if they could get down.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid we shall have to give it up," said Jack in some +disappointment. "The last time Dick and I were here we had to squeeze +through to get out, but now it seems worse than before."</p> + +<p>"Let me try, Jack," said young Smith eagerly. "I am only a little fellow, +and can get through where big fellows like you and Dick could not. Don't +you remember how you put me through the little window at the Academy, that +time of the rebellion in the school? Well, you can use me now in the same +way. I want to see that place down there. You know I did not see it the +last time, and I want to see it very much. Try, Jack. I am not so big, and +can squeeze through almost anywhere."</p> + +<p>Jack found a place where it would be quite possible for Jesse W. to get +down, but not for himself or Percival, and, of course, out of the question +for the captain, who was nearly as big as both of the latter combined, and +he said:</p> + +<p>"Here is a place, J.W., which, I think, will fit. It does seem too bad +that you should not see the place, having been with us on our first trip, +and we will give you a chance."</p> + +<p>"I can bring away a bagful of the gold, anyhow, Jack, and perhaps go for +another one after that. I should like to see the place, anyhow."</p> + +<p>"All right, you shall do so, old man, but don't load yourself down with +gold. That has drowned many a man before now. Get the rope, Dick. We will +lower him into the place. Take a light, Jesse W., for you will need it. +You know just how to find everything?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I go into the hole in the bow of the vessel which we saw, follow +along till I come to a door, and then go along a passage till I come to +another door and there I am, right in the cabin with a light overhead, +shining through the water."</p> + +<p>"That's it. Don't stay too long, and don't load yourself down with bags of +gold. I'd rather not have it than have you take any risks."</p> + +<p>"But you don't think there is any danger, Jack?" asked the younger boy, as +they prepared to lower him.</p> + +<p>"No, if I did I would not let you go."</p> + +<p>The boy got down safely enough, and called to Jack and Dick when he had +reached the bottom that he was all right, and then threw off the rope, +which had been put around him under his arms.</p> + +<p>He called to them from time to time, his voice growing fainter every time +he called, and at last they could not hear him at all.</p> + +<p>"I hope it is all right," murmured Jack when the boy had been gone a few +minutes. "I thought it would be when I let him go, but now——"</p> + +<p>"It is all right," said the captain. "He is a plucky little fellow, and +there isn't anything that can happen to him. The rocks hold the vessel as +tight as a vise and there is no chance of her slipping back into the water +or anything of that sort."</p> + +<p>"Well, I hope so, but somehow I begin to feel nervous, and wish that I had +not let him go down."</p> + +<p>"Young Smith is all right, Jack," said Percival reassuringly. "He is not +afraid of anything, and really I don't believe there is anything to be +afraid of. There was not when we went down."</p> + +<p>"No, but we are a couple of big boys, and he is only a midget. If anything +happened to him I should never forgive—listen, and see if you can hear +him coming."</p> + +<p>"No, I cannot, but he has had hardly time to get there yet. Give him a +chance. He will want to see all there is, boy-like. Let him have a good +long look at the wonders of the place. He has never seen anything like it +before, and never will again."</p> + +<p>Jack was very anxious in spite of Dick's cheering words, and the minutes +seemed like hours till at last, holding the rope in his hand he felt a tug +at, and then heard:</p> + +<p>"Hello! Are you up there?"</p> + +<p>"Yes!" shouted Jack. "Are you all right?"</p> + +<p>"Sure I am. Wait till I get the rope under my arms. I've got a bag of the +stuff, as I said I would, but I don't think——"</p> + +<p>"You don't think what?" asked Jack, thinking that he detected something in +the tone of the boy's voice that indicated danger of some sort.</p> + +<p>"Nothing, wait till I get the rope fast."</p> + +<p>"Very good. Take your time."</p> + +<p>"All right," the boy called in a few moments. "I have got it. Haul away!"</p> + +<p>They saw the light of the electric torch flashing upon them, as the boy +came nearer and nearer to them, and at last drew him out of the hole, Jack +noticing that he seemed quite pale, and then suddenly noticing that he was +wet up to his knees.</p> + +<p>"Hello! what is this, Jesse W., how do you happen to be so wet?" he asked. +"There was no water in——"</p> + +<p>"Yes, some," answered the boy quietly. "It had worked in under the door or +at the side somewhere. Maybe they had settled. Anyhow, I got the bag and +here it——" and then the boy sank limp and helpless into Jack's arms and +fainted away.</p> + +<p>"By George! he was a plucky little fellow and no mistake!" exclaimed Jack. +"He said that he would get the bag and he did, and standing in water up to +his knees, and not knowing at what time he might have the whole Caribbean +sea tumbling in upon him. Get some water, Dick!"</p> + +<p>The boy presently came around, however, and said faintly, but with a half +laugh:</p> + +<p>"I told you I'd bring it, didn't I, Jack? Well, I did, and I hope it will +be enough to keep you at the Academy for the rest of the course. If it +isn't, my father——"</p> + +<p>"You are a brave young fellow, Jesse W., but you don't go back for +another, I tell you that!"</p> + +<p>"You bet he does not!" echoed Percival. "So the water had made its way in, +had it? That's the last we will see of the place, then."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it had come in somewhere, at the bottom, I guess. Still, it was not +coming in all the time nor fast, and I wanted to see the place, and I had +promised to fetch a bag of gold to Jack and——"</p> + +<p>"And you wanted to keep your word even if you were drowned," sputtered +Percival. "Much you could have kept it in that case. You are a young +brick, J.W., but don't you do anything like that again."</p> + +<p>"Well, I won't, if you say so, Dick," answered the little fellow.</p> + +<p>"That's a brave little chap," said the captain. "He said he'd do a thing, +and he did it. There's lots who wouldn't."</p> + +<p>They returned to the boat, and the captain told Percival to row toward the +reefs and as close to the stump of a mast as it was safe to go, as he +wanted to observe the wreck again.</p> + +<p>Nearing the wreck they noticed that the water was swirling and eddying +very violently at a point where they judged the cabin to be, and the +captain said, after looking at the boiling waters for a short time:</p> + +<p>"The water is making its way in and will run forward as far as its level. +She'll break up with all that water in her, and I wouldn't be surprised to +see her go any time."</p> + +<p>In fact as they lay there watching the boiling waters over the sunken +vessel, they saw them become more greatly agitated and Percival pulled +away to a safer distance as the agitation increased.</p> + +<p>Then of a sudden the stump of a mast sank into the water, there was a +still greater agitation and a mass of broken timbers shot up into the air +and then fell back, and went floating away on the tide.</p> + +<p>"That's about the last of her," said Captain Storms, "or, at any rate, you +won't go into the cabin again. You've made your last visit to the wreck, +and if any one ever gets that money he'll have to dive for it. You can be +thankful that you went there when you did."</p> + +<p>"So I am," said Jack. "Come on, Dick, pull away from here."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X" />CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>A THRILLING ENCOUNTER</h3> + + +<p>Returning to the yacht first for the captain to get aboard, Jack and +Percival then took the boat and went to the outer bay on a little +exploring trip of their own, the rest not caring to make any more +explorations at that time.</p> + +<p>The boys guided the boat along shore not too near the rocks, both keeping +watch for any nook which might prove of interest or afford an opportunity +for an adventure of any sort.</p> + +<p>There was a short, keen-bladed hatchet to cut their way through the +thicket if necessary when they went ashore, and Percival had a rifle with +which to shoot any game they might come across, both being placed on one +of the forward thwarts.</p> + +<p>Jack was provided with his pocket flashlight in case they went into dark +places, and Dick had a revolver in his pocket, declaring that this might +be of as much use as the torch in case they came to close quarters with an +enemy, no matter of what sort.</p> + +<p>As they were rowing at a lazy rate, keeping up a slow, even stroke, Jack, +who was keeping a lookout on the shore and steering at the same time, +suddenly said, looking toward a mass of rocks which they had just come +abreast:</p> + +<p>"There looks to be a sort of cave in there, Dick. At any rate, there is a +hole which seems to run in to some little distance. Suppose we explore it +and see how far we can go."</p> + +<p>"I'm in for anything that you are, Jack," replied Dick.</p> + +<p>"All right, pull ahead, not too fast, and we'll have a look at the place."</p> + +<p>"Pull ahead it is, Jack."</p> + +<p>Jack was in the bow and he now steered the boat toward the opening in the +rocks, which was quite big enough for them to enter, and they went on at a +slow, steady gait, presently gliding into the water cave, for such it +seemed, with plenty of room above and on both sides.</p> + +<p>Jack turned his head now and then to see how they were progressing and if +there were any obstructions in the way, and presently said:</p> + +<p>"A little slower, Dick. It is getting darker in here now and I do not want +to run into anything."</p> + +<p>"Slower it is, Jack. It would not be any fun to stave a hole in the bottom +of the boat. It doesn't belong to us."</p> + +<p>"That would be reason enough for not daring, with some persons," said Jack +with a low laugh. "They will take care of their own things, but are +careless with those belonging to others."</p> + +<p>"The woods are full of such, Jack."</p> + +<p>Jack rowed with one hand, drawing in his other oar so that it might not +strike the rocks in case the passage narrowed, and then got out his pocket +flash and shot a strong ray ahead of him.</p> + +<p>"Good gracious! what's that?" suddenly exclaimed Percival in accents of +terror. "Back water, Jack, for heaven's sake!"</p> + +<p>"What is it, Dick?" asked Jack, turning his head and sending the light +directly in front of him. "I don't see anything."</p> + +<p>"It's gone, Jack, or the light does not strike it now, but it was +something awful. It fairly gave me the creeps to look at it."</p> + +<p>"But what was it, Dick?" and Jack slowly turned the light this way and +that so as to get a sight at the object which had so terrified Percival.</p> + +<p>"I don't know. It had two awful eyes and a beak and a lot of legs, or +arms, or whatever they were, and a fat body which—there it is, Jack!"</p> + +<p>Jack saw it and shuddered.</p> + +<p>"It's a devil fish, an octopus, Dick," he muttered, turning the light now +full upon the grisly object squatting on a rock at the farther end of the +water cave and glaring balefully at the boys through his blood-red eyes, +like some demon of the deep, the very mention of which might send terror +to the bravest hearts.</p> + +<p>"We'd better get out quick, Jack!" gasped Percival. "If that fellow——"</p> + +<p>What he might have said was cut short by a sudden splash in the water +which caused the boat to rock violently and dashed the spray in their +faces.</p> + +<p>Then there was a whip-like sound and Jack felt himself struck by something +which quickly wound itself about one arm and a part of his body and +swiftly pulled him out of the boat.</p> + +<p>He dropped his flashlight, but as he left the boat his free arm swung out +and his hand touched something which he seized in an instant.</p> + +<p>It was the short hatchet on the thwart and he had seized it by the helve, +well up toward the top.</p> + +<p>With the swiftness of thought itself he realized what had happened.</p> + +<p>The octopus had wound one of its tentacles about his arm and body and, +clinging to them with a tenacity which he could not overcome, had pulled +him out of the boat.</p> + +<p>Percival gave a scream of fright as Jack went overboard, although he was +usually a very self-contained young fellow and not apt to give way to +hysterical outbreaks.</p> + +<p>It was dark in the cave, but he quickly groped for the torch which Jack +had dropped, and cried out:</p> + +<p>"Where are you, Jack? What has happened?"</p> + +<p>Jack went under water and felt himself being drawn toward the end of the +water cave where he had seen the octopus squatting on the rock.</p> + +<p>His thoughts flew like lightning and, being a resourceful boy, he +instantly decided what to do.</p> + +<p>He had kept his breath from a natural instinct and now with his free arm +he dealt a swinging blow with the little axe in a direction which would +not cause him to injure himself but might strike the clinging tentacle.</p> + +<p>His one hope was that another of the flying arms might not reach him and +secure his other arm, which fortunately was his right.</p> + +<p>He suddenly felt a resistance and realized that he had struck something +and hoped that it might be the tentacle of the octopus.</p> + +<p>In another moment he felt the pressure on his arm and body relax and then +realized that something had fallen from them.</p> + +<p>He struck out vigorously with both arms, the pressure upon his lungs from +having held his breath so long beginning to be unbearable.</p> + +<p>Then he felt his right arm seized, the suckers on the tentacle pressing +strong upon his muscles and seeming to draw the blood even under his +clothing, and he knew that the baleful creature had again gotten a hold +upon him.</p> + +<p>He was able to clutch the hatchet in his left hand as the power gave out +in his right, and at that moment he arose to the surface and drew a +succession of deep breaths before another of those terrible arms seized +him by the leg and drew him again under water.</p> + +<p>In another instant, as he struck wildly at the eldritch creature that held +him and felt the tension on his arm relax, everything became suddenly +black.</p> + +<p>The octopus had resorted to one of its natural tricks and had ejected a +dense black fluid into the water which made it impossible for him to see +anything.</p> + +<p>The creature was drawing him toward some hole in the cave, probably under +water, and he realized most poignantly that something must be done shortly +or he would be sacrificed to the pitiless water devil.</p> + +<p>He felt himself rising and in a moment, when he most needed it, was able +to get his breath.</p> + +<p>The devil fish, even with the loss of two of its arms, was still powerful +enough to make all his efforts futile, and he felt himself being drawn +into some recess beyond where he had first seen the octopus squatting on +the rock and glaring at them with its horrible eyes.</p> + +<p>Percival, having found Jack's electric torch and searching the cave below +and above water for a sign of his friend, suddenly saw the devil fish rise +to the ledge where he had first seen it.</p> + +<p>Jack was now caught in two of its remaining arms and was being drawn +toward some deep recess whence there would be no rescuing him.</p> + +<p>Transferring the light to his left hand, Percival whipped out the revolver +from his hip pocket with his right and took rapid aim.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid it will be like trying to pierce an elephant's hide," he +muttered, "but I'm going to try it for all that."</p> + +<p>Luckily he caught sight of the creature's eyes at the moment and took aim +straight for one of them.</p> + +<p>Jack was being drawn toward the horrible beak and the sight nearly +unnerved Dick.</p> + +<p>Fortunately he had aimed and pressed the trigger before he saw this +ghastly sight.</p> + +<p>He fired three or four shots in quick succession and then heard the sound +of a plunge in the water.</p> + +<p>Jamming his torch into the clutch of one of the tholepins, he seized the +rifle and shot a quick glance ahead of him.</p> + +<p>Jack was not to be seen, but he did see the octopus writhing and waving +its frightful arms on the ledge.</p> + +<p>"Where are you, Jack?" he shouted.</p> + +<p>"All right!" cried Jack himself, rising just alongside the boat and +holding on to the gunwale with one hand.</p> + +<p>"I'll finish that demon before he can do any more mischief!" hissed Dick.</p> + +<p>It was Jack falling into the water that had caused the plunge he had heard +and not the return of the octopus to its element.</p> + +<p>Now, taking quick but careful aim, Percival fired half a dozen shots from +the repeating rifle he had seized and with deadly effect.</p> + +<p>The revolver shots had wounded the octopus, but not fatally, and he might +at any moment plunge into the water and seize Jack.</p> + +<p>The heavier caliber weapon did the work.</p> + +<p>As Jack climbed into the boat there was a great plunge into the water +which caused the light craft to rock again and the spray to fly.</p> + +<p>"That settles him!" gasped Percival, and then he dropped his weapon and +drew Jack into the boat, where he promptly sank limp and helpless under +the thwarts, all his strength having seemingly left him.</p> + +<p>"All right, Jack?" asked Percival.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but get away," answered Jack feebly.</p> + +<p>Percival was not slow to obey the injunction.</p> + +<p>Seizing the oars, he quickly backed water and then turned the head of the +boat toward the entrance of the cave, whence he shortly saw the light +streaming in as he pulled a quick, powerful stroke.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad that's over!" he said with a sigh of deep relief as he neared +the opening. "No more exploring queer places like this again!"</p> + +<p>When he was outside the cave he rested on his oars and said:</p> + +<p>"You are all right again, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Jack, getting up and seating himself on a thwart, "but I don't +want another such an experience. I feel as if all the blood had been drawn +out of me by that horrible thing in there."</p> + +<p>Out in the bright sunlight, away from the gruesome cave and its dreadful +tenant, Jack seemed to recover his spirits quickly, however, and he +presently took one of the oars and then another, and said:</p> + +<p>"It's all right, Dick. We are away from the horrible thing and I thank +heaven I am still alive to tell of it. Let us go somewhere else."</p> + +<p>"Right you are, I will," echoed Percival heartily. "If I had had any idea +that there was such a thing in that place you could not have hired me to +go into it or to have let you ventured there. I am glad enough that I was +around to be of assistance."</p> + +<p>"So am I, Dick, but suppose we say no more about it. I hate to even think +of the horrible object and I only hope that I will not dream of it these +nights."</p> + +<p>Then the boys rowed swiftly away from the place where they had had such a +thrilling encounter and never once looked back at it.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI" />CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>THE VOICES IN THE WOODS</h3> + + +<p>After the boys had gone some little distance from the water cave they +pulled at a more easy stroke and began to talk again, their thrilling +experience with the devil fish having made them silent for a time.</p> + +<p>They did not allude to it again, but talked of other matters, Percival +saying as they neared a green, shady wood where the trees grew thick and +cast a deep shade on the white sands and showed a more than twilight +darkness in their farther recesses, everything being quiet and peaceful +within those heavy shadows:</p> + +<p>"That's a place where everything seems to be asleep even at midday, Jack. +It looks like the cave of the seven sleepers that we used to read about in +mythology."</p> + +<p>"It seems quiet enough for a fact," said Jack with a smile, "but it is hot +outside and the birds are probably all taking a rest. Probably just before +dawn or at sunset you would hear them making noise enough."</p> + +<p>"It is a thick wood all right, just the place to get lost in. If the +African jungle is any worse than this I don't care to enter it."</p> + +<p>"The trouble is you can't see far ahead and then there are briars and +brambles and a lot of spiky plants, prickly pears and Spanish bayonets and +cactus to run against and get scratched and cut with. Our own woods are +good enough for me, or bad enough, I might say."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if we could find anything if we did go in there?" said Percival +musingly as they rowed along shore, fascinated by the bright glare of the +sands, the dense green of the woods and the dear blue of the skies. "We +might have a try at it, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose we might if we did not go too——" And then Jack suddenly +paused and a look of alarm came across his face.</p> + +<p>A harsh voice from the wood suddenly interrupted him and he glanced here +and there to see whence it came.</p> + +<p>The words he heard were in Spanish, as far as he could judge, but he could +see no one.</p> + +<p>Other voices quickly joined the first and the boys rowed out somewhat from +shore and looked closely at the woods, expecting to see some one.</p> + +<p>"There are people on the island after all, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, Spaniards, I think. Sailors, I guess. At any rate they are not using +the choicest language from what little I know of the language; Jack. I do +not see any one. Do you?"</p> + +<p>There were loud and angry voices in the woods, but the boys could see no +one and went on slowly, farther out from shore so as to be out of danger +in case any one appeared.</p> + +<p>"A lot of drunken sailors would not be good company," declared Jack. "I +would rather be alone."</p> + +<p>"It can't be any one from the yacht, can it?"</p> + +<p>"No, I don't think so. We have no Spaniards and Captain Storms brings his +men up better than that. Besides, if it were some of our men we would see +a boat, and there is nothing."</p> + +<p>They still heard the voices at intervals as they rowed on and had no +desire to enter the woods as long as the men were there.</p> + +<p>"That's a nuisance," said Percival with a half-growl as they rowed on. "I +would have liked to go ashore there, but of course if there are a lot of +swearing Spaniards hanging about it wouldn't do."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to know what brought them here," remarked Jack. "We got in by +the sheerest good luck and it does not seem possible that another vessel +could have done the same. Those things don't happen twice."</p> + +<p>"Well, they are here, at all events, and it stops our going ashore. I'd +like to know if they saw us in the boat?"</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose so. They did not show themselves and they would not have +made so much noise if they had——"</p> + +<p>Just then the voices were heard again and the boys stopped rowing.</p> + +<p>"There they are again!" muttered Percival. "We may have trouble, Jack."</p> + +<p>The voices were very loud and the language used was not of the choicest, +although, being in Spanish, it was not as offensive as it would have been +in English, the boys not understanding much of what was said.</p> + +<p>"Are they quarreling, do you suppose?" asked Percival.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't think so," and Jack suddenly laughed.</p> + +<p>"What are you laughing at?" asked Percival, somewhat impatiently.</p> + +<p>"Listen a minute, Dick," said Jack.</p> + +<p>The voices had ceased, but presently they were heard again, closer than +before, and then a big, gorgeously feathered parrot flew out of a clump of +trees not ten feet from shore.</p> + +<p>"There are your quarrelsome Spaniards, Dick," laughed Jack, as another +parrot joined the first.</p> + +<p>"Well, I declare!" laughed Dick. "Are you sure, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"Yes. The first time I heard them I was deceived, but just now I fancied +there was something queer about those voices and I decided that there were +parrots in the woods."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but Jack, Spanish is not the natural language of parrots and they +must have heard it from men. That proves that there are men on the +island."</p> + +<p>"Or that there have been, at any rate, but we don't know that there are +any here at present."</p> + +<p>"Well, as long as we know that there is nothing more dangerous than a lot +of parrots, suppose we go ashore and look about a bit."</p> + +<p>They found a good landing place where there was a shelving beach extending +for some distance in either direction, and a clump of trees close to the +water, where they tied the warp of the boat to keep it from floating away.</p> + +<p>They saw more of the parrots, but not all of them imitated the human talk, +chattering and making harsh sounds after their own fashion and making the +glades bright with their gorgeous plumage.</p> + +<p>Both boys laughed at the recollection of their first fright when they +heard the birds and thought that there were men on the island, and then, +taking their bearings, set out to explore the island for a short distance.</p> + +<p>As Jack had a good idea of direction, they were not likely to get lost, +although in the jungle they were often in a twilight shade and could not +see the sun, which might have told them which way they were going.</p> + +<p>"It gave me something of a start when I thought there were other people on +the island besides ourselves," remarked Percival as they went on through a +semi-darkness, the vegetation being thick above and around them so that +they could see nothing of the sky. "It's pretty dark here."</p> + +<p>"Yes," agreed Jack, turning on his pocket flash. "Hello!"</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" asked Percival, Jack's tone being one of alarm.</p> + +<p>A shot rang out, and then Jack jumped back, exclaiming:</p> + +<p>"I guess I've settled him, Dick!"</p> + +<p>"What have you settled, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"That fellow there," and Jack turned the light upon something at his feet +and then pushed it aside.</p> + +<p>"A snake!" exclaimed Percival. "You blew his head off. Is he very +dangerous, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"Well, not now," said the other with a dry laugh.</p> + +<p>"No, I should say not. Would he have been?"</p> + +<p>"He belongs to the family of dangerous snakes, one of the most dangerous, +in fact. He is either a fer de lance or a first cousin to it, and either +is a sort of creature to keep away from. The bite is nearly always fatal, +as the virus acts so rapidly upon the system. It was lucky I turned on the +light when I did. These creatures inhabit the dark places and are always +ready for an unwary traveler."</p> + +<p>"H'm! I think we had better keep in the light, Jack. We go into a dark +water cave and run across a devil fish. Then we go into the dark woods and +meet with this poison gentleman. Let's go back to the light!"</p> + +<p>"I think we had better," returned Jack. "We are strangers here and the +residents seem to resent our coming. I am sure I'll be glad enough to +leave the place for good."</p> + +<p>It did not seem to be such an easy matter, however, for difficulties beset +them on every side as soon as they started to leave the jungle, as though +there were some malign influence in those gloomy shades which was +endeavoring to hold them captive.</p> + +<p>There were morasses which they had to avoid, there were bramble thickets +which barred their way, and Percival questioned whether Jack was going in +the right direction and asked him to try another.</p> + +<p>"We are going toward the shore, Dick," said Jack, "and if we keep on you +will see that I am right."</p> + +<p>"I don't doubt that we were going that way in the beginning, Jack, but we +were thrown out of our path by the brambles and again by the swamp, not to +mention the snake, and I don't believe we are going that way now. Don't +the trees give you any idea?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I am sure we are going toward the water. If we had a bit of +daylight I could convince you, but it is as dark as a pocket here. I never +saw trees grow so thick."</p> + +<p>Jack had his way, for Percival had confidence in him and at length the boy +paused and said:</p> + +<p>"Listen, Dick! There are the parrots again. They won't talk if it is dark +and all we have to do is to follow the sound and we will shortly come out +into the light."</p> + +<p>"I guess you're right," laughed the other. "I know we always used to cover +our bird with a dark cloth when it got to chattering too much, and it +stopped in an instant. But I don't hear them."</p> + +<p>"Listen!" said Jack, pressing forward by the light of his pocket torch.</p> + +<p>"I hear them now," said Percival. "They are using as bad language as ever. +Those are educated parrots, although their education has not been of the +best."</p> + +<p>In a short time they heard the parrots much plainer than before and then +it grew lighter and still lighter till at length they were able to see the +sky overhead through the branches and finally the sun itself, by which +time they were right among the parrots, who were making a tremendous +chattering.</p> + +<p>"Well, we are obliged to you at any rate, even if you are a noisy lot," +laughed Percival. "You frightened us first and then you showed us the way +to the light. Still, are we in the right direction, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly," and pushing on, Jack led the way into more open ground and in +a short time they came in sight of the inner bay where the vessel lay at +anchor.</p> + +<p>"We are not so far out of our way, Dick," said Jack. "The boat lies just +on the other side of that clump of trees and we can reach it in a few +minutes."</p> + +<p>He proved to be correct and, getting in, the boys rowed back to the yacht, +where they amused and interested a party of their companions by telling of +their adventures.</p> + +<p>"Well, it is certainly not safe to go far away from the vessel," declared +Billy Manners, "and I think if I do I will be sure to take Jack along as a +guide."</p> + +<p>"Not very complimentary to me," said Percival dryly.</p> + +<p>"Oh, you want your own way too much."</p> + +<p>"H'm! if I had had it we would have been lost yet, so I guess you are out +there, William."</p> + +<p>"Well, that only proves what I said in the first place," said Billy with a +chuckle.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII" />CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>ADVENTURES IN THE WOODS</h3> + + +<p>One day not so long afterwards the boys returned to shore, but at a +different place than they had been before, and set out on a walk through +the woods toward the hill, which they had never managed to get to before, +although they had tried it more than once.</p> + +<p>They took the axe along, not knowing but they might want it, and set out +in high spirits.</p> + +<p>Hearing voices ahead of them they pushed on, and soon came across the old +sailor, Ben Bowline, and the acting head cook, Bucephalus, discussing some +knotty point.</p> + +<p>"Ah tell yo' dis am not de way," said the negro in a very positive tone, +"an' any one what has any perspicuity in his haid will tell yo' so."</p> + +<p>"I don't know what that 'ere is, and I don't believe I ever had any, but +it ain't the right road 'cordin' to the course," returned the sailor. "We +sot out nothe-nothe-east, and this here course is due nothe, which ain't +at all proper."</p> + +<p>"Which way yo' wan' to go, Sailorman?" asked Buck.</p> + +<p>"This here way, of course," said Ben, pointing.</p> + +<p>"Huh! an' there ain't no path there, nothin' but briahs an' big rocks an' +swamp. How yo' goin' to get through there? This here way is the right way, +because it am plain to be seen that it am a thoroughfare, and has been +promenaded by pedestrians before now."</p> + +<p>"I don't care what has happened to it, and it may be a good road all the +same, but it ain't the course we sot out on, and so it's the wrong one to +take, and I ain't going to take it."</p> + +<p>At this point Jack, Dick and Jesse W. came along, being much amused at the +arguments offered by the disputants.</p> + +<p>"How are you heading, Ben?" asked Jack in the soberest fashion.</p> + +<p>"Nothe-nothe-east, sir," said the old seaman, saluting.</p> + +<p>"Change your course to north."</p> + +<p>"Aye-aye, sir, north it is," said Ben.</p> + +<p>"And follow in our wake in case you are needed."</p> + +<p>"Aye-aye, sir, follow in your wake it is, yes, sir."</p> + +<p>"You could not have persuaded that grizzled old tar that there was any +course but the one he started on, no matter what the difficulties of his +course were, but give him a new one, and he will take it without the least +question. That's the sailor of it."</p> + +<p>"And they would have stood there arguing till the cows came home," said +Dick. "You settled it in a moment."</p> + +<p>"And if we need them they are there."</p> + +<p>They kept on, now in the open and now in deep shade, having occasionally +to cut their way, pushing on toward the hill, which Jack had determined to +get to the top of, and now and then seeing it when they reached higher and +more open ground.</p> + +<p>They reached the top at length, and had a fine view of the island and of +the sea, but could not see any other islands in the distance.</p> + +<p>"We are on a lost island and no mistake," said Percival. "There is not +another one in sight. I wish I could make out a passage through the reefs, +but there does not seem to be any."</p> + +<p>"We may find one unexpectedly," said Jack. "That often happens. You hunt +and hunt for a thing and don't find it, and then you give up hunting and +the first thing you know you find what you have been looking for without +looking for it."</p> + +<p>"That sounds like a contradiction," laughed Percival, "but I know what you +mean."</p> + +<p>Leaving the hill after getting a good view of the surrounding sea and the +island, the boys took a course which would lead them to the part of the +reefs, which they had not before visited.</p> + +<p>They were pushing on leisurely when they suddenly stopped and listened, +having heard what seemed to be a cry for help.</p> + +<p>"Somebody is in trouble," said Jack. "Where is it, straight ahead?"</p> + +<p>"It sounds like it, and that sounds like the voice of Billy Manners."</p> + +<p>"Maybe he is joking," said young Smith. "He always is."</p> + +<p>Just now came a lusty cry for help in so serious and agonized a tone that +Jack said with a smile:</p> + +<p>"Billy is not joking now, that is certain. He is in real trouble. Come on +and let us see what it is."</p> + +<p>They pushed on rapidly, the call being presently repeated, and at the same +time they heard a bellowing sound, which they could not make out.</p> + +<p>"Come on!" cried Percival. "Billy is in trouble, and that sounds like the +bellow of a wild beast."</p> + +<p>"I should say it was a calf," remarked Jesse W., "if you were to ask me +about it, but what a calf is doing here——"</p> + +<p>He hurried on to keep up with Jack and Dick, Buck and Ben following +quickly, having evidently heard the noises.</p> + +<p>Coming in a short time into an open space the boys paused and then began +to laugh heartily, something they would certainly not have done if Billy +had been in danger.</p> + +<p>There, in the crotch of a little tree about six feet from the ground, was +Billy Manners, while at the foot of the tree was a calf a few months' old +bellowing lustily and evidently calling for food.</p> + +<p>"I told you it was a calf!" laughed young Smith.</p> + +<p>"Help!" roared Billy, seeing the boys. "Here is a wild bull, and I am +treed. Shoot him, boys, drive him away, anything!"</p> + +<p>Instead of doing anything the boys only stood there and laughed, and when +Bucephalus and Ben Bowline came up in great haste they did the same, all +joining in a full-voiced laughing chorus.</p> + +<p>"Why don't you help a fellow?" wailed Billy. "There you all are, laughing +to beat the band, and I can't get down on account of this wild bull at the +foot of the tree."</p> + +<p>"Wild bull nothing!" exclaimed Percival. "It is a three months' old calf, +and you're another, only you are a bit older than that. Can't you tell a +calf when you see one, or have you been brought up in the city where they +don't have them except in the way of veal cutlets?"</p> + +<p>"That a calf?" asked Billy in disgust. "I thought it was a wild bull. He +makes noise enough."</p> + +<p>"Probably calling for its mother," laughed young Smith. "I said it was a +calf right along."</p> + +<p>"Shoo!" said Buck, advancing on the terrible wild bull, which had so +frightened Billy. "Get o't o' dat or Ah cut yo' up fo' de young ge'men's +dinnah. Shoo!"</p> + +<p>The calf let out a tremendous bellow, and scampered off into the woods, +whereat the boys laughed harder than ever till the tears fairly ran down +their cheeks.</p> + +<p>"That's a good one on Billy who is all the time getting off jokes on other +folks," said Percival. "That is too good to keep."</p> + +<p>"Dick Percival," said Billy, laughing in spite of himself, "if you say a +word about it I'll cut you dead."</p> + +<p>"I can't help it," chuckled Dick; "it's too good to keep, and I won't keep +it, no matter what are the consequences. Think of a boy who has spent the +biggest part of his life in the country not knowing the difference between +a little three months' old heifer calf and a wild bull. Billy, my boy, you +have neglected your opportunities."</p> + +<p>Billy got down from the tree, and all hands laughed again, but Jack said +thoughtfully:</p> + +<p>"That was not a wild calf, and the question naturally arises, what is a +domesticated calf doing on a supposedly uninhabited island? If there is a +calf there must be a cow and if a cow, then people who own and take care +of her. There must be people on the island after all, although we have +never seen them."</p> + +<p>"We have not been all over the island," said Percival, "and it is likely +that in the very parts where we have not been we shall find the people who +own the calf."</p> + +<p>"They are probably negroes or halfbreeds," added Jack, "and seldom visit +the shore. Suppose we keep on. We may find a village, or, at any rate, one +or two houses occupied by them. Come on, Billy, you are safer with us in +case we come across another wild bull."</p> + +<p>"Get out!" said Billy, half laughing, half in disgust. "How much will you +take to keep quiet on that subject?"</p> + +<p>"I could not think of making a bargain, Billy," chuckled Jack, "and then I +am afraid it would cost you too much. Remember, there are myself and Dick, +Jesse W. Smith, Bucephalus Johnson and Ben Bowline to be bought off, and +the prices might go up."</p> + +<p>"All right," muttered Billy with a wry face, "but don't rub it in too +much, that's all."</p> + +<p>"All right, I won't, but remember when you feel like playing jokes on the +boys that I may say something about it."</p> + +<p>"All right, but I say, what about it, that calf is not wild?"</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it, she is just as tame as any barn-yard calf along the +Hudson valley. Calves are the same the world over."</p> + +<p>"And Billy was one not to know it," said Percival with a grin. "Remember, +William, you have not bought me off yet. I have made no promises, and +neither has Jesse W. Smith."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I don't care anything about it," said the smaller boy. "I won't say +anything about it no matter how much Billy jokes, I am interested in the +other matter. If there are tame calves here there must be more or less +civilized people living on the island."</p> + +<p>"Well, we have made two or three very good discoveries on our island," +observed Percival. "We have found treasure, and we have found calves, and +probably inhabitants."</p> + +<p>"And the next thing is to find a way through the reefs," said Jack.</p> + +<p>"If we found the others why should we not find that?" asked Percival. "We +did not expect to find anything, and we have found a lot."</p> + +<p>"But we won't find our way home," said Billy, "if we don't start pretty +soon, for it will be dark in a little while."</p> + +<p>"The funny fellow grows serious once in a while," chuckled Dick, "but I +think he is right for all that."</p> + +<p>"I think we had better be going myself," said Jack. "Ben Bowline?"</p> + +<p>"Sir to you, sir," said the seaman.</p> + +<p>"Steer south, and go on a free wind at four miles."</p> + +<p>"Aye-aye, sir!" said Ben, and they all set out for home, as they called +the yacht.</p> + +<p>"Talkin' about calves," said Ben Bowline as they were walking on in a body +through the woods, "there was another adventure of mine which——"</p> + +<p>"You're a liar!" suddenly interrupted a strident voice speaking in Spanish +and then some bad language in the same tongue followed.</p> + +<p>"Mah goodness, dat am fightin' talk!" exclaimed Bucephalus. "Ah wouldn' +stan' dat, Sailorman."</p> + +<p>"Jus' wait till I get my mudhooks onto him," growled Ben, "an' I'll let +Trim know whether I'll stan' it or not."</p> + +<p>"There are people on the island besides ourselves," muttered young Smith, +getting close to Jack and Dick. "Maybe they own the calf."</p> + +<p>"If you tell them anything about me," sputtered Billy, "I won't speak to +you again in a week."</p> + +<p>Then there was more talk in Spanish and Bucephalus put his hands over his +ears and whistled.</p> + +<p>"Mah wo'd! Ah done hear disreputable language in mah days, but nothin' to +compaiah with that!" he declared emphatically. "It ain't respectable. Ef +Ah meet de fellah wha' talk lak dat Ah's gwan to tell him wha' Ah done +thought ob him."</p> + +<p>There was still more of the talk, and Ben Bowline doubled his fists and +said angrily:</p> + +<p>"It's as bad to be told you're a liar in Spanish as it is in English or +French or Dutch or any other lingo, an' I'm not goin' to take it from +nobody. Just wait till I get hold——"</p> + +<p>Dick and Jack were both laughing heartily now, much to young Smith's +amazement, Billy's surprise and the disgust of Ben Bowline, Bucephalus +looking on and wondering what had come over his "young gentlemen" as he +was accustomed to call them.</p> + +<p>"What are you two fellows laughing at?" asked Billy.</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything funny in it!" sputtered Ben.</p> + +<p>"I think it's awful!" murmured Jesse W.</p> + +<p>"Why, those are not men talking," laughed Dick.</p> + +<p>"They aren't!" exclaimed Billy.</p> + +<p>"Mebby dat am all imagination, sah!" added Bucephalus.</p> + +<p>"What is it if it isn't men!" asked Ben.</p> + +<p>"Parrots!" laughed Jack. "Don't you remember, you fellows, what we told +you happened to us the other day when we were ashore together, Dick and +I?"</p> + +<p>"H'm! and I forgot all about it," chuckled Billy.</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's different!" said J.W., greatly relieved.</p> + +<p>"Parrots?" asked Ben. "Poll parrots? Well, I'll be keelhauled!"</p> + +<p>"Mah we 'd! Ah knowed parrots could talk an' use de mos' obstreperous +vocabulary at dat," declared the negro cook, "but Ah done suspected dat +dey was men, fo' shuah Ah did."</p> + +<p>The parrots, for such indeed they were, as all the party now realized, +continued to talk and scream and chatter, and in a short time the boys and +their companions caught sight of a number of them as they came out into a +more open bit of woods.</p> + +<p>"We were a bit alarmed ourselves, as you may remember," said Jack, "when +we first heard them, and it was some little time before we realized that +they were not men."</p> + +<p>"They have caught the talk of men who have been to the island," added +Percival, "and probably that of men who are here now. That calf is a tame +creature and is probably owned by some one now on the island. The parrots +may have heard them."</p> + +<p>"If that is the sort of talk they heard, the birds were not in very good +company," remarked Billy, "and it is just as well that we did not meet +them this time. In fact, I hope we won't."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'm glad it was only Poll parrots!" grunted Ben, "for I was ready +for a fight."</p> + +<p>"I'm glad myself," echoed Jesse W., greatly relieved, "for I don't want to +get into a fight at all."</p> + +<p>"That accounts for the milk in the cocoanut," laughed Billy. "I wondered +what you two fellows were laughing at. If it had been Dick alone I would +not have thought so much of it, but Jack has more sense."</p> + +<p>"Thank you," said Dick dryly. "I know a tame calf from a wild bull, +however, if I haven't much sense."</p> + +<p>"Come ahead, boys," said Jack. "We must get back to the yacht. If there +are other men on the island besides ourselves we do not want to meet them +just now. They are not a desirable lot, most likely."</p> + +<p>The entire party then pushed on, and in a short time reached the shore, +got their boat and returned to the yacht.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII" />CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>A STRANGE LIGHT AT SEA</h3> + + +<p>The captain and Dr. Wise were very much interested in the report that the +boys brought back from their walk through the woods, and to the top of the +hill in the interior of the island.</p> + +<p>"If there are people here they know how to get out through the reefs," +observed the principal, "for they must have come here once, and no doubt +are in communication with the people outside."</p> + +<p>"They may have lived here all their lives," returned the captain. "I never +saw any one on these islands, natives, I mean, that knew very much. We +can't tell how long they have lived here, they and their ancestors, of +course, and these fellows probably don't know when they came, and don't +suppose there is any other place in the world."</p> + +<p>"H'm! that does not speak for a very high state of intelligence," remarked +the doctor with a grunt.</p> + +<p>"You won't find it in these natives nor even in the half breeds, sir," the +captain returned. "The rating is pretty low. It'll be interesting to see +these people, but I don't think that you will find them very intelligent. +You'd better not expect too much."</p> + +<p>The next day there was nothing to be seen of the wreck, and when Jack and +Percival went to the wooded point to look for the place where they had +descended when they first found it, there was nothing but a great hole +into which the sea poured, and made a great disturbance at every tide.</p> + +<p>"That's the last of that," said Jack. "No one would believe us if we told +them we had gone down there and found a vessel fast in the rocks."</p> + +<p>"But we know we did, for we have the evidences of it, and you are at least +a couple of thousand dollars richer by it. That will help you a lot in +getting your education, my boy, and give your mother something as well."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and she is the first one to be considered," said Jack.</p> + +<p>There had been no answers as yet to the captain's wireless messages, and +that day he sent out another one, this time to the owners of the vessel in +New York, addressing Mr. Smith in particular, thereby hoping to receive +attention.</p> + +<p>Meantime, the boys went on with recitations, wrote descriptions of the +different parts of the island they had seen, took excursions on the bay +and through the woods, and got up little entertainments to pass away the +evenings so that altogether they were kept quite busy, and, as a +consequence, were very well content with their situation, although it was +not just what they had expected when they left home.</p> + +<p>The day after sending out the personal message to Mr. Smith the captain of +the yacht picked up a message which, although not addressed to him, was +the first he had been able to pick up, and was of some interest on that +account if on no other.</p> + +<p>The message was to some government official in Florida, and related to a +certain smuggler who had been defrauding the government by sending +shipments of tobacco without paying the duty thereon.</p> + +<p>"Are on track of Rollins and smuggler crew. Sighted them near Isle of +Pines. Will keep on watch there and in Caribbean."</p> + +<p>Such was the message and the captain, although not especially interested +in Rollins, whoever he might be, was glad to get any information from the +outside world which seemed so far away, although almost at their very +doors.</p> + +<p>He sent a wireless to the sender of the message, and asked if information +of their situation could be sent to the government, and help despatched to +them, hoping by this means to receive some recognition at last.</p> + +<p>"If I get other folks' messages some one will probably get mine," said the +captain, "and by communicating with these people I may finally get +attention. Rollins? Don't remember to have heard of him. There's probably +a gang of them working between our border, Cuba and the South American +ports. Whistling cyclones! they might be working among some of these +little islands. A man who would defraud his government is no better than a +pirate and pirates used to hang around these waters a lot. It isn't such +an unlikely thing that these new pirates should do it now."</p> + +<p>The next day quite unexpectedly the captain got a call and at once sent +for the doctor and said:</p> + +<p>"I've had word at last. From our owners. From Mr. Smith himself. He has +just heard from us, and is going to send out a vessel to get us away from +here. It seems that one of our smaller vessels, a steamer, has been +captured by some smugglers working around Cuba, Porto Rico and the +neighborhood, who are using it in their trade. Some of the men got away, +and took the news to Havana. The name of the vessel is a good deal like +our own, and Smith thought that we had been taken at first, and began a +lot of investigating. Then he got our messages, which had been held up by +some one else, thinking they were fakes, or some boys' play. These young +wireless operators make a lot of trouble now and then."</p> + +<p>"Well, as long as we know that help is being sent to us we can feel +relieved," said the doctor. "That is something, at any rate, but——"</p> + +<p>"But you don't think that it will do any good, Doctor?"</p> + +<p>"Well, if you cannot get out how is any one else going to get in?" the +doctor asked, as if merely seeking for information, and not being +especially interested in the matter.</p> + +<p>"There's something in that, sir," replied Captain Storms musingly, "but +we'll see how it turns out when they get here. At any rate we are not +forgotten altogether, and that is something."</p> + +<p>The boys were told about the message, and were greatly interested, Jesse +W. saying to Jack:</p> + +<p>"Now I'll have a chance to speak to father about you, Jack, and to tell +him what you have done for me. He has always been interested in you, and +now he will be all the more so."</p> + +<p>"Never mind doing too much for me, J.W., or you will spoil me altogether," +laughed Jack, who, nevertheless, felt grateful to the younger boy for his +interest. "We Hilltop boys should help each other, and so I don't deserve +any extra credit for simply doing what is expected of me. It is only the +big brother idea which is gaining ground every day, and is a good thing +both for the little brothers and the big ones."</p> + +<p>That night as Jack Sheldon lay asleep in his berth in the cabin set off +for the Hilltop boys, he was suddenly awakened by a bright light flashing +in his face, there being a porthole opposite.</p> + +<p>"That's odd!" he murmured, as he sat up and looked around. "Where does +that light come from? Or did I only imagine it?"</p> + +<p>At that moment the light flashed in his face again, and he got out of his +berth and went over to the porthole, looking out to see where the light +could have come from, there being only water on that side.</p> + +<p>The yacht had changed her position, and was now in sight of the outer bay, +and having changed the direction of her head on account of the tide, the +boy could now look out upon the bay, which he had not been able to do at +the time he went to bed.</p> + +<p>He saw the flash again, and in a moment realized that some one out there, +probably beyond the reefs, was using a regular code of signals, a thing he +had himself done with his pocket electric light.</p> + +<p>Having had this experience he was familiar with the code, and at once +began to read the message sent by those outside, whoever they might be.</p> + +<p>"That cannot be the steamer Mr. Smith has sent," he mused. "No, of course +not. 'Where are you? Am dodging government vessel.' Why, that must be one +of the smugglers that the captain told us about. But where is the man he +is signaling? I wish I could tell that."</p> + +<p>The signals ceased, but presently the lights flashed again, and Jack read +the message:</p> + +<p>"Why don't you answer? Am waiting."</p> + +<p>"My word! I believe the fellow takes our lights for the smuggler's, and +thinks that he is in here. It would be just the place for him. By Jove! I +have a mind to answer him myself, and get him in here. Then we could get +out. Even if a smuggler takes us out that is better than waiting."</p> + +<p>His pocket flash was in a convenient place, and he quickly got it out and +flashed out through the port:</p> + +<p>"In the bay. Come inside."</p> + +<p>After sending this message he waited a few minutes, and then saw the reply +being flashed to him:</p> + +<p>"Cannot. Don't know the passage. Come out"</p> + +<p>"H'm! that's too bad," muttered Jack. "I was in hope I could get him in +here. I'd like to know—I guess I'd better see the captain."</p> + +<p>Partly dressing himself he hurried on deck, and looked for the light, but +could see nothing.</p> + +<p>An anchor watch was kept, or supposed to be at least, but Jack saw the man +on deck fast asleep on a bench against the house on deck instead of +keeping a lookout as he was supposed to do.</p> + +<p>He could not see any vessel's light out at sea, and saw no more flashes, +although he looked for them for several minutes.</p> + +<p>"Well, I can't go to waking the captain in the middle of the night," he +said, "and it is likely this fellow has gone. It is simply another +disappointment. I think I'll go to bed."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV" />CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>THE MAN WITH THE WHITE MUSTACHE</h3> + + +<p>In the morning Jack told the captain, Dr. Wise, and a few of his most +intimate friends among the boys under the promise of keeping it quiet, the +strange event of the previous night, asking the doctor if he had done +right in not calling the captain.</p> + +<p>"If you had aroused me I would probably have been mad," chuckled the +captain, "and could not have done anything anyhow. It is clear that there +is a way in here, although we don't know it, and that this fellow you saw +signaling mistook our lights for those of one of his evil associates. I'd +like to watch him, but there is no use in crying over spilled milk, and +you did all right in not calling me."</p> + +<p>"It is all very singular," said the doctor, knitting his brows. "Of course +we would like to get out of here, but as to seeking the assistance of a +smuggler——"</p> + +<p>"I'd as soon go out under his escort as that of any one else," laughed +Storms, "although we might get in trouble afterward if a government vessel +happened to see us in company with smugglers. Well, I guess it won't be +long now before the relief steamer comes, but——"</p> + +<p>"But they may not know the way in, and we are as badly off as before," +finished the doctor. "I don't see that we have advanced any, except, +perhaps, to let people know where we are."</p> + +<p>"And you think there is little satisfaction in that?" with a grin. "We +might be worse off, however, so I guess we had better wait and trust to +good luck. Clever game, that of Jack's, wasn't it, stealing the fellow's +despatches?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, clever in a way," admitted the doctor, glaring at the captain +through his big black-rimmed glasses, "but does it not savor somewhat +of—h'm—of deception? Pretending to be one person when he was another, +and quite a different one, by the way?"</p> + +<p>"But he did not pretend to be anybody. He simply flashed a message, and if +that fellow outside took him for another person it was not Mr. Sheldon's +fault. All is fair in love and war, you know."</p> + +<p>"H'm! so I have heard, but as I have been in neither I cannot say whether +it is so or not. However, I am not accusing you, Sheldon, you understand? +I suppose, under the circumstances, that what you did was perfectly +justifiable. At any rate, we shall not have to wait for this person to +come and take us out. But where was the person to whom he was sending +signals? You did not see him, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed, and I wonder that my man on deck did not see them. Asleep, +I'll warrant. That means loss of shore liberty to him for some time. The +other fellow was not here, of course. How could he get in?"</p> + +<p>"I believe there is a way, sir," spoke up Jack, "and that this place is +used as a retreat for smugglers. If not just here, then some part of the +island. How about the calf we saw? I thought at the time that there were +people here, but did not think of smugglers."</p> + +<p>"Why, I guess you've been reading about Captain Kidd and Blackbeard and +those old pirates, and have got your head full of secret lairs and all +that sort of stuff."</p> + +<p>"Oh, no," smiled Jack in reply, "but evil men hide in woods and mountains +and all sorts of odd places as much now as they did in the old days. There +is just as much of this in modern times as there was in the old, but it is +accompanied with greater danger."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I reckon it is. At any rate, I'd like to get hold of these rascals. +There'll be a pretty big reward for them, I fancy."</p> + +<p>The boys left the cabin and during the afternoon Jack, Dick and young +Smith set out for a stroll over the island, taking one of the paths +already made, so as not to subject the younger boy to too much trouble.</p> + +<p>"I hardly think these smugglers are on the island," said Jack, as they +walked on, "or, at least, I don't think that they got in through the +reefs. They could have landed on the other side, although there are many +difficulties connected with it, not to say dangers. You remember the +rocks, Dick? And there is a good deal of surf there also. One would need +to be careful in making it. A vessel could lie to, of course, while boats +landed the men, and that has probably been done."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose so," said Percival carelessly, thinking of other things at +the moment, and not paying much attention.</p> + +<p>The boys walked on without paying much attention to where they were going, +young Smith being greatly pleased at being with the older boys, but at +length Jack stopped, looked around him, and said with the least bit of +alarm in his tone:</p> + +<p>"H'm! I believe we are where Billy was treed by the calf the other day or +pretty near it, at any rate. We thought there might be people in the +neighborhood, but we did not see them."</p> + +<p>"I suppose it might be as well to go back," said Percival. "It would not +be pleasant to run across a lot of half-civilized natives to say nothing +of smugglers."</p> + +<p>"No, it would not," and at that instant there was a rustling in the bushes +not far away, and two men stepped out, the singular appearance of one of +them causing Jack to turn suddenly pale.</p> + +<p>This man was of good height and build and evidently quite strong, and was, +besides, a person of superior intellect if not of the best tendencies, as +his face indicated, but what attracted most attention was the fact that +while his mustache was snowy white his hair and eyebrows were quite dark, +this making him noticeable in a moment.</p> + +<p>"You here, George——"</p> + +<p>"Rollins," said the other, evidently thinking that Jack was about to +pronounce another name, which was the fact. "Yes, I am here. It is safer +than back in New York state or any of the states, in fact. May I ask what +you are doing in this part of the world! I am as much surprised to see you +here as you are to see me," and the man made a sudden quick signal with +his left hand.</p> + +<p>Jack heard a rustle behind him, and turned quickly, but not soon enough to +escape the quick rush of three big, strong, bearded men who sprang upon +him and his companions and held them fast.</p> + +<p>"What does this mean, George—Rollins?" asked Jack, hesitating at +pronouncing the name, "Who are these men!"</p> + +<p>"Friends of mine," laughed the man with the white mustache. "Business +partners I might say."</p> + +<p>"The majority of your business partners get in jail or are shot by the +police, Mr. Rollins," said Jack. "Are these the same sort? What business +are you in now?" and then a look of intelligence shot across the boy's +face, as he remembered that Rollins was the name of the smuggler he had +but recently heard mentioned.</p> + +<p>The other saw this look, and said with an evil glance:</p> + +<p>"I think you have heard the name before. What are you doing here? You are +in the government service, you and your boy friends? What is this uniform +you wear?"</p> + +<p>"That of the students of the Hilltop Academy. You knew that I was one of +them, for on the occasion of our last meeting——"</p> + +<p>"I say, Jack," said Percival suddenly, "this is the man who was concerned +in the robbery of the Riverton Bank, your——" and the boy suddenly +paused, a deep flush on his face.</p> + +<p>"His father, you were going to say," laughed the other, an evil look +crossing his countenance. "Yes, you are quite right, I am——"</p> + +<p>"You are not!" cried Jack hotly. "You married my mother a year or so after +my own father's death, and made her life miserable, but that does not make +you my father, and you well know that I have never admitted your claim. No +court would admit it. Courts? You take good care to keep away from all of +them, Mr. Rollins, as you choose to call yourself."</p> + +<p>"Take them away," said the man with the white mustache. "Let no harm come +to them. I don't understand why they are on the island, but it would be +awkward if any of their friends should know of our presence here. Don't +let them get away, but don't hurt them."</p> + +<p>The men were much stronger than the boys, and Jack saw the futility of a +struggle during which the younger boy might be hurt, and he, therefore, +submitted to being led away, hoping to escape at some later time.</p> + +<p>The boys were led some little distance to a little opening where they saw +a number of small crudely built houses, several dark-skinned men, who were +neither Indians nor negroes, but perhaps a combination of both, and a +number of domesticated animals, calves, pigs, a sheep and several fowls.</p> + +<p>There were people on the island, therefore, as they had supposed, and +these men visited the place on occasion as in the present instance.</p> + +<p>There was a strongly built house somewhat larger than the rest on one side +of the little village, and here the three boys were taken and locked in a +small square room with one window, this being small and protected with an +iron bar, evidently to make it safer, Jack noticing several cases in one +corner opposite the window.</p> + +<p>"Make yourselves comfortable, young gentlemen," laughed Rollins, as he +called himself. "You will be set free, but not at present," and with that +he went away, and the door was stoutly locked.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV" />CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>JESSE W. IS SENT FOR HELP</h3> + + +<p>All was quiet in a few minutes after the man with the white mustache had +left the boys in the room with the barred windows, and presently Percival +said, half apologetically, but with the greatest kindness:</p> + +<p>"You know I did not mean to call that man any relation of yours, Jack, but +the sudden recollection of the last time you met him when I did not see +him at all made me blurt out suddenly. I did stop, though."</p> + +<p>Jack had come unexpectedly upon his stepfather during his first term at +the Academy, several months previous, the man at that time being concerned +in the robbery of a bank near the Academy, but escaping capture and +suddenly disappearing, Jack had hoped, forever.</p> + +<p>He felt nervous and discouraged now that the man had again come into his +life, and he sat in a corner of the room on a chest and thought deeply, +Percival presently saying to him in cheery tones:</p> + +<p>"Brace up, Jack. It is not like you to give way to despondency. What are +we going to do? We can't stay here even if that fellow with the white +mustache has given orders that we are not to be harmed."</p> + +<p>"I tell you what," whispered young Smith. "That window is small, but not +too small to put me through. You have done that before, you know. If you +can get that bar loose it will be easy enough to put me out, and then I +will go straight to the vessel and get the captain, old Ben Bowline, and a +lot of sailors to come and get you out."</p> + +<p>"You know the way, do you, Jesse W., you won't get lost!" asked Percival, +catching at the idea. "You are a plucky little fellow, but I don't want +you to take any risks."</p> + +<p>"They are nothing but what I can take easy enough," answered the other +quickly. "Don't you suppose I would do anything for Jack? And for you, +too. You have both done a lot for me, and this isn't much. You get me +through the window, and I'll do the rest."</p> + +<p>Jack arose quietly, crossed the room, took hold of the iron bar put across +the window and tested it.</p> + +<p>"I believe we could pull it loose, Dick," he said in a low tone, not +knowing if there were any one outside who might hear him. "It is only +driven into the frame, and I believe we could pull out frame and all."</p> + +<p>"Let me look at it," said Percival, and, taking hold of the bar, he +suddenly swelled up his muscles, gave it a quick, sharp wrench, and had it +out with a part of the frame as well.</p> + +<p>"H'h! great protection that was!" he laughed. "I suppose they thought the +window was too small for any one to get through, and it is for most folks, +but Jesse W. is only half size and we can put him through all right."</p> + +<p>"And I'll put through the other part," said the younger boy. "I am glad I +can do something for you two, for you have both of you done a lot for me +at one time or another."</p> + +<p>"But see here, J.W., do you understand that there is considerable danger +in getting away?" asked Jack in a serious tone. "These fellows may be +watching, and they would handle you roughly if they caught you. And then +it is dark going through the woods, for the moon does not rise till pretty +late, and you might fall down some——"</p> + +<p>"And I might not!" interrupted the other in a decided tone. "I have a +pocket light with me. I always carry one now, whether I think I am going +to need it or not, and I can find my way easy enough. Besides, I have a +pocket compass as well, and I know which way the vessel lies, and I am +going to get you boys out of here and that's all there is to it!"</p> + +<p>"All right!" and Jack smiled at the smaller boy's determination. "But I +wouldn't let you go if I didn't think you had the pluck to carry it out, +and that the only difficulties are at the outset. Listen at the door, +Dick, and I'll see how the land lies in this direction," and Jack pulled +the chest to the window and looked out.</p> + +<p>He could not see very far, but he saw that there were no huts on that +side, and that it was not far to the woods, and calculated that the boy +could get to them without being observed.</p> + +<p>"All right, J.W., the coast is clear," he said. "You are sure you know the +way and the general direction? What is it, in fact?"</p> + +<p>"About south, and I will get in sight of the water as soon as I can. It +will not be dark for some little time yet, and I ought to get to the yacht +before sunset or a little after at any rate."</p> + +<p>"Very good. Keep in the open as much as you can after you get away from +here, and don't run too fast."</p> + +<p>"All right. Are you ready?" and the boy stood on the chest beside Jack, +looking up into the latter's face with such an air of determination that +he laughed and said:</p> + +<p>"Yes, I'm ready, up with you!" and Jack lifted the little fellow to the +window level, and put him through, Percival saying in a low tone:</p> + +<p>"It's all right. I don't hear a sound. I imagine they are all away +somewhere, for I can neither see nor hear anything."</p> + +<p>"Out you go!" said Jack, dropping the boy to the ground, and looking out +to see that he was all right. "Now then, cut!"</p> + +<p>He watched the boy till he disappeared in the woods, and then as he +neither saw any one nor heard anything of an alarming nature, he said in a +tone of great relief:</p> + +<p>"He is all right, and I believe he will get there without trouble. I had +an idea he would, or I would not have let him go."</p> + +<p>"There he is, only half a boy, you might say," said Percival, "but ready +to undertake anything for us, no matter how dangerous and there are those +big overgrown bullies, Herring and Merritt, who would go all to bits if +they had the half of this to do. I tell you, Jesse W. Smith is worth both +of them in a lump, and with considerable on his side of the ledger after +that, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, so he is," agreed Jack.</p> + +<p>"And now we will simply have to wait, I suppose?"</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything else. The window is too small for us and the door +seems to be very strong and heavy, and securely locked. No, I considered +these points before I let the boy go."</p> + +<p>"But suppose our man with the white mustache should return and miss him?" +asked Percival.</p> + +<p>"Well, we will put the bar back in its place, put the chest in the corner, +and place our coats in a neat pile over there where it is darkest. There +are things that we can put under them, and there is the boy fast asleep +after his tramp through the woods."</p> + +<p>"A good idea, Jack! You are full of resources. Now I would never have +thought of a way out of the trouble, but only of the trouble itself."</p> + +<p>They replaced the bar so that no one would know by a casual glance that it +had been tampered with, put the chest back where they had taken it from, +and, gathering up a few loose articles from the floor, made a bundle of +them and spread their coats over it.</p> + +<p>"A mere reference to the boy being asleep will be enough," said Jack. "The +look of the thing is enough to carry out the idea, and they will accept it +without question."</p> + +<p>"To be sure, and in the meantime the plucky young fellow is hustling to +get back to the vessel and bring us help."</p> + +<p>Having settled all this the boys sat down and waited, now and then +conversing, and occasionally listening for any sound that would denote the +return of the so-called Rollins and the men with him.</p> + +<p>It was getting on toward sunset when Jack heard Rollins and another man +talking outside, although he could not see them when he went to the little +window and looked out.</p> + +<p>"You say there is a vessel in the bay?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, inside the reefs."</p> + +<p>"Government vessel?"</p> + +<p>"No, private yacht, the one these boys belong on. It's a school on a +vacation or tour or something."</p> + +<p>"Do they know the way through the reefs!"</p> + +<p>"I guess not. They were washed in the other night when there was a cyclone +or tidal wave."</p> + +<p>"They did not come here after us?"</p> + +<p>"No, they didn't know anything about us. They have been here for some +time, a week I guess, and can't get out."</p> + +<p>"H'm! let them stay here then!" growled the man with the white mustache. +"They can't bother us any. If they don't know the way out, which very few +do, they'll have to stay here for all I can see."</p> + +<p>"But suppose we want to get in on that side ourselves?"</p> + +<p>"They could not make us any trouble. We don't want to get in there at this +time, although it is a better hiding place than this."</p> + +<p>"Then you're going to let them stay there?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly. They can't do us any harm. After we get away with our cargo we +don't care what happens to them."</p> + +<p>The men went away or stopped talking, at any rate, and Jack did not hear +any further conversation between them.</p> + +<p>"They will probably let us out as soon as they are ready to go," he said +to Percival, "but we don't want to stay here till they get ready to let us +out, and then there is just a chance that they may forget us altogether. +It was just as well that we sent Jesse W. off on his errand."</p> + +<p>"I think so myself, and I don't doubt that he will carry it out."</p> + +<p>"If Rollins knows the way out through the reefs," said Jack presently, "we +might either force or persuade him to pilot us out. If we should capture +him we might force him to do it. Otherwise, I might persuade him to do it +on consideration of allowing him to escape after we were perfectly safe +outside. Very few know of the way out, and it is not likely that the +vessel which they are sending to our relief will have any good pilot for +these waters on board."</p> + +<p>"You don't know positively that this man knows the passage!"</p> + +<p>"No, I do not, but he does know some one who does, to judge by his talk, +and if he cannot be bargained with perhaps the other man can. I am averse +to having anything to do with the man, as you can readily understand, but +I do not want to see the whole Hilltop Academy kept prisoners here for an +indefinite time."</p> + +<p>When it began to grow dark one of the men who had brought them to the +place came in with some food and a bottle of wine, and said, as he put it +on a chest:</p> + +<p>"There's something for you to eat. Other boy asleep, h'm? Well, there is +all the more for you then."</p> + +<p>Then the man went away, never noticing the little bit of deception which +the boys had practised, locking the door after him.</p> + +<p>"The things to eat are all right," said Jack, after the man had gone, "but +we would better not touch the wine. I never do, anyhow. This is likely to +be drugged to make us sleep, so that we will give no trouble."</p> + +<p>"I don't want it anyhow," said Dick.</p> + +<p>The boys ate a supper, and then, as it grew dark, sat and waited for some +sign of their friends, and at last when it was quite dark hearing a +peculiar whistle somewhere outside.</p> + +<p>"That's the Hilltop signal!" whispered Percival "Aid is at hand!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI" />CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>BEN'S STRANGE STORY</h3> + + +<p>Jack jumped upon the chest, which he quickly dragged to the little window, +and answered the signal, one generally used by the Hilltop boys when they +wished to communicate with each other at a distance.</p> + +<p>In a moment it was answered, and then young Smith ran up under the window, +and said eagerly:</p> + +<p>"You are all right, boys, you are there still, and safe!"</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Jack. "Who is there?"</p> + +<p>"Some of the boys, Ben Bowline, the captain and Buck, all ready for a +fight if necessary."</p> + +<p>"All right. I don't think you will need to make one."</p> + +<p>Percival was at the door now, and in a moment he heard the outer one fall +in with a crash, and then came the rush of many feet.</p> + +<p>There were shouts outside, but these were drowned by the yells of the +boys, and of the old sailor.</p> + +<p>"Are yo' dere, sah?" the boys heard Bucephalus say in a few moments, just +outside the door.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but we are locked in."</p> + +<p>"Nevah min' dat, jus' lemme get mah head at it an' Ah'll break it down in +a hurry, sah."</p> + +<p>"Here, stop that!" roared Ben Bowline. "You'll crack yer skull!"</p> + +<p>"No, sah, Ah's used to dem things!" guffawed Bucephalus.</p> + +<p>"Don't you know that his name means 'ox-headed,' Ben?" cried Percival with +a laugh. "Why, he could split a two-inch plank with that head of his. Let +him do it, but first wait till I get out of the way."</p> + +<p>It was not necessary for Bucephalus to butt the door down, however, as one +of the men with Rollins had been captured, and was forced to open the door +with his key.</p> + +<p>It was the same man who had brought them food and wine, and at the sight +of the boys, for lights had been brought, he exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Guess you boys didn't drink anything?"</p> + +<p>"No, we did not," said Percival. "Won't you have it your self?"</p> + +<p>"Huh! I think not. But where's the little fellow? The one that was asleep +when I come in."</p> + +<p>"Here I am!" piped up Jesse W. himself, "and you'll find that I am pretty +wide awake."</p> + +<p>The boys picked up their coats, and put them on, and the man muttered, his +eyes opening wider every moment:</p> + +<p>"Huh! that was a neat trick! Then the boy was not there at all?"</p> + +<p>"No, he was on his way for help," said Jack. "Never judge too much by +appearances. Still, I am glad you did this time."</p> + +<p>The boys and their friends now left the house, the man being taken a short +distance to prevent his giving the alarm, although the natives had already +scattered in many directions at the coming of Ben, Buck and the boys.</p> + +<p>"Young Smith got to us all right," said Harry to Jack and Dick, "and we +set out without delay. You must have had quite an adventure."</p> + +<p>"So we did, and it might have been worse. Rollins is on this part of the +island, sir," to the captain. "He got in yesterday or to-day, I am not +sure which. I do not believe he has seen the man who was signaling to him +last night, and I do not think he knows anything about him. He does know +that government vessels are on the watch for him, however, and I think he +will shortly get away from here."</p> + +<p>"I wish we could get word to them so as to stop him," growled the captain. +"These smugglers give honest traders a bad reputation, for folks think we +are all alike."</p> + +<p>A considerable number of the Hilltop boys had come to the rescue of the +two boys, and these were now carried on the shoulders of the others, and a +triumphal march back to the vessel was begun, young Smith being taken up +as well as Jack and Dick, the boys saying that he had traveled enough for +one day and that he needed a rest.</p> + +<p>Many of the boys had pocket lights with them, and others cut pine branches +and made torches of them so that there was light enough to show them the +way, and it was not necessary to wait for the moon to rise.</p> + +<p>The boys sang and shouted, and made a lot of noise on the way back so that +if the smugglers or any of the natives had had any idea of attacking them +they would have been deterred by the very din.</p> + +<p>They reached the shore at length, and were taken on board the yacht, +Bucephalus presently announcing that supper was ready, the boys having the +best of appetites for it, and making it a feast in honor of Jack, Dick and +young Jesse W., who was considered as much a hero as his older +schoolmates, and was certainly regarded so by them.</p> + +<p>Not all the boys had gone over to the other side, some staying away on +account of the fatigue of the journey and others, noticeably Herring and +his cronies, because they were either not asked or would not have gone if +they had been.</p> + +<p>It was a feast in honor of the three boys, nevertheless, and those who +were not ready to join in praise of the heroes were wise enough to keep +quiet and not to make any dissent.</p> + +<p>After supper Jack and a few of the boys discussed the situation, and tried +to calculate how long it would take the vessel which Mr. Smith had sent +out to reach them.</p> + +<p>"If we knew that, we would know how long we would have to wait," observed +Arthur. "Some vessels are faster than others."</p> + +<p>"It would take at least three or four days," said Jack, "and if he has +sent a fast vessel and given directions to make all speed they might be +here in less time. Then they must pick up a pilot who would be likely to +know these seas, and who is used to making difficult passages. Any +ordinary pilot would not do. He should have a special one."</p> + +<p>"And he cannot tell just what is required till he gets here, and, perhaps, +would have to hunt one up, and there is more lost time," said Harry +dolefully. "It's a pity we are wasting so much time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but I don't see how we are going to help ourselves."</p> + +<p>"No, perhaps not."</p> + +<p>Late that night Jack was awakened as he lay asleep in his berth, not by a +flash, as before, but by hearing some one say, as he went by the door:</p> + +<p>"It can't be, it's too much like the flying Dutchman."</p> + +<p>"That's what I say, but all the same I was sure I saw one come in through +the reefs."</p> + +<p>"You didn't see any lights?"</p> + +<p>"No, but I could make out her masts and rigging."</p> + +<p>The two men went on, and Jack heard no more.</p> + +<p>"There has some vessel come in through the reefs," he said to himself as +he sat up in bed. "I must try to find them to-morrow. I have always said +that I thought it possible for a vessel to get through if one knew the +passage, and this shows that it has been done. No wonder these men thought +it was a phantom ship."</p> + +<p>Partially dressing himself he went on deck, and looked around him.</p> + +<p>He could see nothing, and he hardly expected to do so, but had yielded to +impulse and had come on deck.</p> + +<p>Ben Bowline presently came up, looked at him, touched his grizzled +forelock, and said:</p> + +<p>"Sir to you. Come up to get the air?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," Jack answered shortly.</p> + +<p>"Kind of a pretty night, don't you think, sir!" the old sailor said after +a pause during which he stood balancing himself first on one foot and then +on the other.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is a fine starlight night. The moon ought to be coming up soon, +and then we can see things better."</p> + +<p>"Yes, so we can. Was you looking for anything particular, sir?" in a +mysterious tone.</p> + +<p>"How about that vessel, Ben?" asked Jack in a low tone. "Are you sure you +saw her? What was she, the long, low, rakish craft we read of in old +stories or a saucy steam yacht with tremendous speed?"</p> + +<p>"Sh! the old man might hear us," cautioned Ben Bowline. "Do you know I +don't want to think it were the Flying Dutchman 'cause it's plumb bad luck +to see her, but how is a live ship going to get in here?"</p> + +<p>"Easy enough, if she knows the way, Ben. Don't say anything about it, but +are you sure you saw something?"</p> + +<p>"Well, I dunno, but I think I did. She was out yonder, just where you can +see the open water, and she was only there half a jiffy, as you might say. +Tom saw her, too, or I would have thought I was dreaming."</p> + +<p>"Steamer, Ben?" asked Jack, sure now that there was something in the old +fellow's story.</p> + +<p>"Reckon she was, though I did see something white, which gave me a creepy +feeling like as if I'd seen a apparition or something similar. Maybe she +had sail on to help her steam. Some of 'em do."</p> + +<p>"And you saw her for a short time only!"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir, not half a minute nor half that even. There wasn't time to say +'Jack Robinson' twice, sir, before she was out of sight."</p> + +<p>"Well, if she came in she can get out, and so can we, Ben. Keep this quiet +till I speak to the captain about it. It will be just as well not to have +every one know it, and have it talked about all over the vessel."</p> + +<p>"Shouldn't wonder if it would, sir," and as Jack walked away the old +sailor continued his own passage up and down the deck.</p> + +<p>"There are probably places to hide that we have not seen," thought the +boy, as he took a turn of the deck, and then started to go below, "and we +may not be able to see this vessel in the morning. I shall have a look for +her, nevertheless. If there is to be a bargain made and I don't see why +there should not be, unless we trade directly with lawbreakers and assist +them. That we could not do, of course, but if we hire a pilot we are not +supposed to know whether he is honest or not."</p> + +<p>The question was a puzzling one, and Jack had not solved it when he went +below, turned in and quickly fell asleep.</p> + +<p>In the morning, nothing having been seen of any strange vessel from the +deck of the yacht, Jack told Percival quietly what he had heard, and after +breakfast they went ashore and set out for a search for the stranger.</p> + +<p>"If she is here," Jack said, "she is one of the smugglers, and will not +want to be seen. If we can find her it may mean that we can get out of our +strange prison."</p> + +<p>"How are we going to find her, Jack? There are probably plenty of hiding +places about here that we don't dream of."</p> + +<p>"I know it, Dick, but we must find them if we want to leave here. I do not +think that Smith will be able to get us out, and if we can do it +ourselves, so much the better."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and all the more credit to us, Jack."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII" />CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>DISCOVERIES AND DISAPPOINTMENTS</h3> + + +<p>The boys landed at the point where they had first gone ashore, well up in +the bay, as that would give them less walking, and pushed toward the +north, keeping as near to the shore as they could in the hope of being +thus better able to see the hidden smuggler in case she was still at the +island.</p> + +<p>Making their way over rough ground, they at length came to an opening in +the rocks which was quite high enough for them to enter, and Jack said in +an eager tone:</p> + +<p>"It is possible we may find something here, Dick. This seems to be a cave, +and smugglers and men of that sort make such places convenient."</p> + +<p>"It looks rather dark, Jack," murmured Percival. "We had a pretty gruesome +experience in a dark cave when we first came to the island and I don't +want to repeat it."</p> + +<p>"You won't find any devil fish in there, Dick," said Jack reassuringly. +"Besides, we have our flashes with us and are armed as well, and if we do +find anything uncanny we can put up a good fight, I imagine."</p> + +<p>"That's all right, Jack, but once I have an experience of that sort I am a +little shy at venturing into a place anything like it. The mere look of +this cave made me think of the other."</p> + +<p>"But there is no water here and it may be only a hole in the rocks after +all. Then it may lead to some retreat of these smuggler folk, and if it +does, so much the better."</p> + +<p>"All right, Jack, I am with you," said Percival, and the boys entered the +hole in the rocks, as Jack called it.</p> + +<p>It was more than that, as they presently discovered, for they found that +it extended much farther than they thought, and Jack, turning on his +pocket flash when there began to be less and less light to guide them, saw +that the passage went on for some distance.</p> + +<p>It was high enough for them to walk upright and wide enough for three or +four persons to walk abreast, there being a few turns, but none sharp +enough to cut off the view ahead for some distance.</p> + +<p>"Well, we won't get under water as we did in the other place, Jack," +observed Percival as they walked on, meeting the first sharp turn and +being now unable to see behind them, "for we are going toward the interior +of the island and not toward the sea."</p> + +<p>"No, and there will be no one to tumble down rocks upon us and shut us in, +or think they did, as happened before. In fact, the place seems to be +decidedly uninteresting, Dick."</p> + +<p>"Nothing has happened so far, if that is what you mean," laughed the +other, "but you never can tell."</p> + +<p>They made one or two more sharp turns and at length came to an opening of +greater magnitude where they could see three or four passages leading in +different directions, some very narrow and one wide enough for them to +walk side by side.</p> + +<p>"Which one shall we take, Jack?" asked Percival. "The place begins to grow +interesting now that we have several routes to choose from. Does it look +as if men had been here? Do you see any smudges on the walls or any +footprints in the dust? Is this just an accident, or has it been cut out +and made of use for a hiding place?"</p> + +<p>"No, there are no smudges which might have been made by torches, Dick, and +I don't see any footprints except our own. I don't believe any one has +been in here for years."</p> + +<p>"Then you think that there may have been some one here at some time, Jack? +It has been used?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, for it has not the looks of a natural cavern which has not yet been +discovered. It has been cleaned up to a certain extent. Still, I do not +think that the particular gang of malefactors we are looking for has ever +occupied it."</p> + +<p>"Then there is not much use in our going any farther, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"No, not if we want to find Rollins and the rest."</p> + +<p>"Suppose we take the widest passage, Jack!"</p> + +<p>"Very well. Come ahead."</p> + +<p>They went on for twenty feet, when the floor of the passage began to take +a sudden decline which increased at every step.</p> + +<p>"Hold on, Dick," said Jack, holding his light low and flashing it along +the rough floor. "This thing may take a sudden drop and——"</p> + +<p>"So it does!" gasped Percival, lying at full length on the floor and +crawling carefully forward a pace or two. "It takes a drop for fair. It is +a lucky thing you noticed it."</p> + +<p>"Then we may as well go back, for I don't care to take a drop I don't know +how deep."</p> + +<p>"I'll see," muttered Percival, picking up a loose stone as big as his fist +and tossing it ahead of him.</p> + +<p>Not until several seconds had passed did the boys hear the sound of the +stone falling into water, and Percival said with a sigh of relief:</p> + +<p>"Well, we didn't go that way, at any rate. Come on, Jack, there is nothing +to be seen in that direction."</p> + +<p>The boys returned to the place where the passages diverged, and Percival +suggested that they take one of the narrower paths and follow it for a +time.</p> + +<p>"All right," laughed Jack, "but I don't believe we shall find any more +than we have already found. In fact, I don't believe the smugglers know of +this place at all and we won't find out anything."</p> + +<p>However, they proceeded down the narrow path till they suddenly found +themselves at the end, where the place widened into a chamber about ten +feet square, and here they saw a sight which made Percival tremble.</p> + +<p>It was a pile of human skeletons reaching nearly to the roof of the vault +and thrown promiscuously about like so much rubbish.</p> + +<p>"I say, I've got enough of this!" gasped the young fellow. "Let's get out +of this, Jack, before we find anything worse. First the bottomless pit and +then a charnel house. I am satisfied!"</p> + +<p>"It is not a very pleasant sight," said Jack musingly, "but they cannot do +us any harm. They have probably been here for years."</p> + +<p>The boys returned to the chamber they had left and then went back along +the way they had come without seeking to explore any other passages.</p> + +<p>Getting out into the light at last, they proceeded with their search for +the smugglers, resolving not to enter any more mysterious caves, but to +look for places where a vessel might be able to hide.</p> + +<p>"There must be a lot of coves along here," said Jack, "that we have not +been able to find on account of the difficulty of making one's way along +the rocks, but now we are looking for them we don't mind doing a lot of +scrambling."</p> + +<p>"No, we are used to that, and, besides, we are alone, and haven't young +Smith with us. I suppose he would have been delighted to come, for he +likes being with us, but it would have been too much of a task for him."</p> + +<p>"And yet he would not have complained, Dick. He is a plucky little chap. +Just think of his going into the cabin of the wreck, up to his knees in +the water, to get that bag of gold just because he said he would."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it was a nervy thing to do, and there are bigger boys in the Academy +who would not have done it. But I say, Jack, it is getting pretty rough +along here. I am afraid we may have to change our route."</p> + +<p>They had come upon a mass of high rocks over which it was well nigh +impossible to make their way, and Jack stopped, looked around him and +said:</p> + +<p>"It seems a pretty tough job, Dick. Suppose you give me a boost, however, +and let me see if I can get to the top of this one. I am lighter than you, +and perhaps I can make it."</p> + +<p>"All right, Jack, just as you say," and Dick bent his back so that his +companion could get upon his shoulders, and then straightened up slowly, +Jack holding on by some of the projections in the rock and going up with +him, being able to reach a bit higher when Percival was at his full height +and saying, with some satisfaction:</p> + +<p>"That is fine, Dick. I should reach the top now. Catch me if I come +tumbling down, however."</p> + +<p>"I don't think you will, Jack. You are a regular cat to keep your feet, +and I guess you are all right."</p> + +<p>Clinging with toes and fingers to the rock and going up inch by inch, Jack +at length reached a point whence it was easier climbing, and here he +advanced more rapidly than before, Percival watching him closely, and +standing ready to catch him in case he happened to lose his footing.</p> + +<p>Jack did not, however, and at last, as he reached the top of the rock, +threw himself forward and found himself on a flat, but somewhat rough +surface a few yards in extent with higher rocks on one side, but nothing +in front of him.</p> + +<p>Beyond, at some little distance, there were other rocks, but he judged +that if he went to the edge of the rock to which he had climbed he might +see something, and he, therefore, crept along cautiously for fear of being +seen, until he reached the edge.</p> + +<p>Here he looked over and saw that there was water below him, quite a good +sized cove, in fact, which ran up from the shore to a considerable +distance, apparently, but had a turn a few rods farther up in shore.</p> + +<p>Looking the other way Jack could see the bay in which they lay, and said +to himself:</p> + +<p>"That is the way they could come, but now let us see if they did, and if +there is room beyond for a vessel of any size to pass."</p> + +<p>The higher mass of rock on his left prevented his going much farther, +however, and he was thinking that he might be obliged to climb to the top +of this, being unable to get around it, when he heard a suspicious sound +below him, and lay flat on his face, peering cautiously over the edge.</p> + +<p>There were some bushes and coarse grass here and these hid him somewhat +from observation, while they did not prevent his seeing anything going on +below.</p> + +<p>The sound he had heard was the splash of oars and the hum of voices, and +in a few moments he saw a boat containing two men appear around a corner +of the higher rock, which descended sheer to the water's edge, and make +its way slowly toward the open bay.</p> + +<p>"I tell you there is one, Davis," Jack heard one of the men say, +recognizing the voice as that of the man with the white mustache, as he +always thought of him, and not as his stepfather.</p> + +<p>In fact, he had long since repudiated any relationship whatever with the +man, and regarded him as a stranger who had come into his life without any +wish of his own, and whom he would willingly put out of it, and be +satisfied never to see or hear of again.</p> + +<p>"But weren't you in here the other night when I signaled?" asked the other +man, who was rowing. "You answered and told me to come in."</p> + +<p>"Me?" with a laugh. "I tell you I was not. I don't know the way in any +more than you, though I know that there is one."</p> + +<p>"But I saw lights, and I got flashes from some one on deck, in the regular +code, too."</p> + +<p>"They were from the deck of this yacht I told you of, and I will show her +to you if you are patient. Go easy, though, for we may come in sight of +her at any moment."</p> + +<p>"But how about the signals I got? How could any one know I was out there, +and how would they know the code?"</p> + +<p>"They got you by accident, perhaps, and then were smart enough to take +your signals and answer them. I know a boy who is clever enough for that. +He is on the yacht, too. She has a lot of schoolboys who are on a trip to +these seas. They were carried in here by a tidal wave, and now cannot get +out, not knowing the passage."</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't know it myself, and I never would have come in only for +finding a pilot who knows the ins and outs of all the islands in the +Caribbean, but if I noticed any lights when I came in I must have thought +they were yours."</p> + +<p>The men rowed on out of sight, for Jack did not care to lean over too far, +partly from fear of falling and partly because he might be seen if any one +else should happen to pass that way.</p> + +<p>There had a vessel come into the bay, then, and she was now probably up +the cove out of sight, and the man in the boat with the other was her +captain.</p> + +<p>"That is the man whose vessel I signaled the other night," thought Jack. +"Rollins must have come over to this side and met him. They know each +other, it seems. Birds of a feather flock together."</p> + +<p>Not caring to expose himself to the risk of being seen by the men when +they returned, Jack now crept back to the other side of the rock and began +to descend carefully, Percival being at length able to help him.</p> + +<p>"Well, Jack," said the latter when his friend was safe on the ground, "did +you discover anything!"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I did," and Jack told him briefly what he had seen and heard.</p> + +<p>"H'm! then there was a vessel coming in last night, and old Ben was not +mistaken?" exclaimed Percival.</p> + +<p>"No, he was not, and she is in a cove somewhere on the other side of the +rocks. I don't know how far up it goes, but there is one there. I could +not see the vessel either."</p> + +<p>"We must try to find it, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and we must get around these rocks. There is no way of getting to +the cove this way, unless we climb another high rock, and it is dangerous +and we might be seen also."</p> + +<p>"Then let's look for another way."</p> + +<p>They went back for a distance, and then began clambering over masses of +other rocks they came to, getting higher and higher, but at last coming to +a great mass of ledge rock, which rose sheer above their heads for twenty +feet without a single projection upon which they could rest their feet and +without a crevice where they might get a finger hold.</p> + +<p>"There is no use trying to get up there, Jack," murmured Percival in +disgust. "A goat could not climb up there. Nothing without wings could +manage it, in fact."</p> + +<p>"No, there is clearly no getting around this way, Dick. We shall have to +go back and try some other place. There is a vessel on the other side of +those rocks, but how to get a sight of her is the question. I think we +would better try to find the head of the cove."</p> + +<p>They went back, therefore, to where they had tried to ascend the rocks, +and pushed on toward the interior of the island, finding the way +difficult, but at length getting clear of the rocks and after struggling +through a perfect jungle coming out upon one of the paths they had +themselves made in their explorations.</p> + +<p>"Well, we know where we are now!" exclaimed Percival with considerable +satisfaction, "but we seem to be no nearer the head of the cove than +before. What are you going to do, Jack?"</p> + +<p>"Look for the cove," said Jack tersely.</p> + +<p>"All right, my boy, I am with you," said Dick with a chuckle, as if the +idea was a most amusing one.</p> + +<p>"Seems funny, doesn't it?" said Jack, smiling. "Well, we have had a lot of +trouble, I admit, but you are not the one to give up when you undertake a +task, and you know that I do not like to."</p> + +<p>"Not only that you don't like to, Jack, but that you don't do it."</p> + +<p>They set out toward the shore again, determined to find the cove if it +were a possible thing, and looking for every possible clue to its +whereabouts, and plunging into what seemed the most impassable thickets in +their efforts, halting at nothing, in fact.</p> + +<p>"We should have brought axes, Jack," muttered Percival in disgust, as both +boys paused at length, tired and hot in a little glade where the way was +clearer than before, and yet having no assurance that they were anywhere +near the place they sought.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but that is just like a couple of boys who are bound to do a thing +and don't make all their calculations ahead. Our hind thought is better +than our forethought, Dick."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but we could not think of everything. I think we have done pretty +well, considering."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I suppose so, but it rather takes the conceit out of a fellow to +meet with so many obstacles. Why, I always thought I was good in making my +way through tangled woods, but I begin to think that I am not."</p> + +<p>"There is one thing you have forgotten, Jack. We are in the tropics, the +woods here are regular jungles and the temperature is something +considerably above what you have been used to. You must not scold yourself +too much, Jack. I think we have done very well—'sh, what's that!" in a +hoarse whisper, and looking around him with alarm.</p> + +<p>"Some one coming, Dick. Hide, quick!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII" />CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>IN THE LAIR OF THE FOX</h3> + + +<p>The boys quickly secreted themselves in the high grass, and in a few +moments several men came into the glade, evidently in great excitement.</p> + +<p>"We've got to get him quick," said one. "Is this the right way, do you +think? We can't waste no time waiting around here with that revenue cutter +hanging around."</p> + +<p>"Him and Davis went over to this side 'cause he wanted to show Davis that +there was a vessel in the bay, and now this here other one is hanging +about, and she may come to our side and find us," said another. "This here +is the way, I think, but I ain't sure."</p> + +<p>"Well, come on and find him," growled a third man. "As you say, we'd +better not waste no time with a revenue cutter hanging about and looking +for us. Come on!"</p> + +<p>The men hurried on, and when there was no longer any sign of them Jack +arose and said:</p> + +<p>"They have seen a vessel outside, probably from one of the hills, and have +taken the alarm. It is likely that this is the vessel Mr. Smith has sent +to get us out. I hardly believe she is a revenue cutter, although these +men would hardly be deceived on that point."</p> + +<p>"They might," said Percival. "They would take alarm at anything. I think +myself that it is likely to be the vessel sent to get us out. She should +be here by this time, according to our calculations. Let us get on the +hill, Jack, and have a look at her ourselves. We may be able to tell what +she is if we can get a good look at her."</p> + +<p>"Very good," and the boys at once struck out in a direction which they +judged would take them into one of the paths leading to the northern end +of the island.</p> + +<p>They reached one in five minutes, and then pushed on till they came to the +open, and in another few minutes came out upon a higher level whence a +fairly good view of the open sea could be obtained.</p> + +<p>"There she is!" cried Jack, pointing out to sea. "She is a cutter, Dick. +The men were right. She is under a good head of steam, too, as you can +tell by the smoke pouring from her funnels. She is cruising about here, +and is evidently in search of some one. Perhaps she suspects that Davis is +in here, and is trying to locate him."</p> + +<p>The boys watched the cutter for ten minutes, and then saw her alter her +course, and take one which would bring her around to the other side of the +island.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if Storms has seen her?" said Jack. "I don't believe she knows +the way in here. If she did she would have come in. She is going away. We +won't see her in a short time."</p> + +<p>"I don't wonder that the smugglers were alarmed. Well, if she goes to the +other side Rollins may leave unless he is hidden in a cove, the same as +Davis is. The latter will have a good chance to get out if the coast is +clear. She is getting farther and farther off, Jack."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and we won't see her in a little while. She is probably going to the +other side to look for these fellows. Well, we have not seen exactly what +we came out to see, but we have seen something, and I think we had better +go back. It is getting later than I thought."</p> + +<p>The boys, accordingly, set off toward the shore, and at length reached it, +finding Ben Bowline waiting for them with the boat.</p> + +<p>"Your Flying Dutchman was a real vessel, Ben," said Jack, "and she is +hiding in a cove along shore, but just where I can't tell you. I would +have to look for her. Did you see the revenue cutter outside?"</p> + +<p>"No, we did not. Revenue cutter, hey? Not the vessel that's coming to take +us out, sir?"</p> + +<p>"No, but a revenue cutter. She is looking for your Flying Dutchman, I +imagine, or for another smuggler. This place seems to be a favorite hiding +place for such craft."</p> + +<p>"Well, they're welcome to it, sir, for if we get out all right they can +have it to themselves, for all o' me."</p> + +<p>"The trouble is how to get out, Ben," said Percival. "Whichever way you +turn there seems to be some difficulty ahead of you."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and that reminds me of a time when I was sailing around the coast of +Africky lookin' for slavers. Ever heard tell about it!"</p> + +<p>"No, but you must be older than I thought, Ben, to have been alive at that +time. There have been no slavers for sixty years or more around these +parts, and you wouldn't——"</p> + +<p>"Well, there was slavers for all that," persisted Ben. "I didn't say I was +chasin' American slavers. They is others, or was. Portuguese an' other +fellows was in the business in them days. Well, anyhow, talking about +meetin' trouble wherever you turn, this here adventure o' mine was that +sort."</p> + +<p>"What was it, Ben? We have time to listen to it before having to start +back, I guess, or you can tell it to us while you are rowing us out to the +yacht."</p> + +<p>"Well, we was cruisin' around the Guinea coast, and one day I went on +shore to look about and got separated from the other fellows, and all to +once got so tangled up in the jungle that I didn't know which way to go +nor nothing."</p> + +<p>"That's interesting," said Percival.</p> + +<p>"Then all of a sudden about forty black niggers jumped out of the jungle +and gave chase, for I didn't stop to calc'late which way I orter go when I +seed them, but just laid a course what would take me away from 'em the +quickest.</p> + +<p>"I just put through the jungle as tight as I could jump, and suddenly come +face to face with a scrouching lion as big as a elephant, all ready to +pounce upon me, and there I was between two fires.</p> + +<p>"You might say three, because I was on the edge of a swamp and there was a +big alligator with his mouth wide open, ready to swaller me the minute I +got into the swamp."</p> + +<p>Percival gave Jack a knowing wink and said:</p> + +<p>"Well, that was a dilemma. What did you do?"</p> + +<p>"Well, I just didn't know what to do, 'cause whichever way I went there +was danger. The lion and the 'gator was in front an' the savage niggers +behind, and it was as bad to stand still as to run and no port in a +storm."</p> + +<p>"Well?" and Dick gave Jack a wink.</p> + +<p>"I just didn't do nothin', 'cause good luck did it for me. The niggers run +plump into the jaws of the lion or smack into the 'gator, an' in a brace +o' shakes one an' t'other was so stuffed full o' meat that they had no +appetite for me, an' I just laid a course down the river an' found my +mates in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>"That's another steal from Baron Munchausen with a few variations," +laughed Percival. "Did you ever hear of him, Ben?"</p> + +<p>"Huh! they's no 'arthly use o' spinin' any yarns to you, young gentlemen, +'cause you don't believe 'em nohow," muttered Ben in a disgusted tone, and +then he gave way upon the oars and did not say another word.</p> + +<p>When the boys reached the vessel, shortly before dinner, Jack told the +captain of what he had heard and seen, the officer being greatly +interested, and saying shortly:</p> + +<p>"If the fellow in the cove has a pilot on board maybe we can hire him to +take us out or maybe force him to do it. You couldn't signal to the +cutter, I suppose?"</p> + +<p>"No, we had no means. She has gone to the other side of the island now, +probably in search of the other vessel. You have not had any message from +the one that is coming to our assistance?"</p> + +<p>"No, I have not, but I expect her to-day or to-morrow. Could you find the +cove where the smuggler is hidden?"</p> + +<p>"I might," answered Jack thoughtfully.</p> + +<p>"If I can find her before she gets out," the captain continued, "I'll +catch him, and make him take us out of the bay to the open. Then I'll turn +him over to the cutter, and get the reward. These fellows captured one of +our vessels, and it'll be only turn about, which is fair play for +everybody."</p> + +<p>"Are your men armed?" asked Jack. "Remember, these men are ready for fight +at any moment. They always expect it, and are prepared. They act in +defiance of the government, and know that if caught they will be +imprisoned, and they are always on the defensive."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I know that, but if I can take them by surprise they won't have a +chance to fight."</p> + +<p>"Well, I will try to find the cove for you, sir, but, of course, I cannot +join in any fight you may have with the smugglers. The doctor would not +allow it."</p> + +<p>"No, I suppose not, and quite right, too. I'll see that you don't get into +trouble on our account, but I do want to catch this chap, and make him +take us out of here."</p> + +<p>"I heartily hope that you will, Captain," said Jack.</p> + +<p>After dinner the yacht steamed out into the open bay, inside the reefs, +and a lookout was kept for the cutter, which might still be in the +neighborhood, and at the same time Captain Storms told the doctor what he +had contemplated, and asked his permission to take Jack as a pilot to +discover the whereabouts of the smuggler.</p> + +<p>"He will be in no danger, I trust?" asked Dr. Wise, glaring at the +captain, as was his wont when greatly interested.</p> + +<p>"I will look out for that, sir," replied the captain. "He and his chum +were looking for this fellow this morning, and found out where he lay, +from the shore. I think he will be able to locate him from the water, and +if he does I'll have the rat out of his hole in a brace of shakes, +provided you will let me have him."</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, I think so," rejoined the doctor, looking as wise as his name +would indicate. "I am most anxious to get away from here, and if you think +there is a chance of it I am quite willing to let you use your own +judgment. You know best about such matters."</p> + +<p>A boat was lowered containing the captain, Jack Sheldon, Dick Percival and +six stout sailors, the entire party with the exception of the boys, being +heavily armed.</p> + +<p>A second boat, in charge of the mate, was lowered, and followed the first +at a little distance, the officer having orders to close up quickly in +case it became necessary.</p> + +<p>Jack sat in the stern with the captain, and, as they skirted the shore, +kept a sharp lookout for any possible inlet to the cove where the smuggler +lay in hiding.</p> + +<p>There was a full tide, and this enabled them to go closer to the rocks +than if it had been low, and Jack peered into every opening in the hope of +finding the right one at last.</p> + +<p>At length as they were proceeding slowly at a safe distance from an ugly +looking mass of rocks, which projected to some distance into the water, +and where there were dangerous looking eddies, Jack noticed a steeple +shaped rock higher than the rest, and at some little distance in shore.</p> + +<p>"That is the rock I could not get around, Dick," he said to Percival. "Of +course, I cannot from here see the rock from which I looked down on the +men in the boat, but I know that rock well. Keep on, Captain, and watch. I +think I can find the way now."</p> + +<p>"There was a turn in the passage, wasn't there, Jack?" asked Dick.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but there may have been others, and I think that the general +direction of the inlet was about east. I shall look for it at any rate."</p> + +<p>They kept on slowly, Jack directing them closer in to shore, and looking +sharply for any sign of the channel, which he presently detected by +keeping his eye on the water.</p> + +<p>At a point where the rocks seemed to have no opening he detected a motion +toward the bay, and, knowing that the tide was now on the ebb, had the +captain steer closer in to the rocks.</p> + +<p>"You won't run us onto them, sir?" whispered Storms.</p> + +<p>"No, sir. Look toward them. Can't you see that the tide is setting this +way, that there is no eddy, but the regular flow of the tide?"</p> + +<p>"By gravy! yes, I do," exclaimed the captain hoarsely. "Keep on, my boy, +and I believe you'll find the place."</p> + +<p>Jack watched the water, steered in closer, and suddenly, in rounding a +blunt point, saw the entrance to the cove before him, and noticed that the +tide was running steadily out of it toward the sea.</p> + +<p>"Here we are, sir," he said to the captain, and at once the other boat was +signaled, and came up in a few moments.</p> + +<p>Both proceeded up the creek side by side, and at length Jack saw the rock +whence he had watched the men in the boat, and pointed it out to Percival, +together with the one like a steeple, which had first called his attention +to the place.</p> + +<p>There was room for the two boats abreast, the passage being wide enough +for a good-sized vessel to pass, and they kept on side by side, past the +bend in the inlet, and then on and around another, suddenly coming in +sight of a vessel at anchor.</p> + +<p>"That's the <i>Circe</i>, the steamer that was taken by the smugglers," said +the captain. "I know her well, though I never sailed in her. They've +painted out her name, but that's her, I'll take my oath."</p> + +<p>At a signal from the captain the two boats dashed forward, and were +alongside the steamer before any one on board knew of their approach.</p> + +<p>The captain and mate, followed by four men from each boat, scrambled up +the side like monkeys, and made a dash for the cabin as a man came out and +demanded gruffly:</p> + +<p>"Hello! who are you, and what do you want?"</p> + +<p>"That's Davis," said Jack. "I know his voice. We have made no mistake."</p> + +<p>"Of course not," said Percival "Do you see that fender hanging over the +side? These fellows have forgotten it. There is your name <i>Circe</i>, as +plain as you please."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I see it."</p> + +<p>"There are lively times up there, Jack," Dick continued. "I'd like to join +in it."</p> + +<p>"Let the men go instead," laughed Jack. "We can look after the boats."</p> + +<p>"All right. Up with you, men!" and the invitation was accepted in a +moment.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX" />CHAPTER XIX</h2> + +<h3>THE WAY OUT FOUND</h3> + + +<p>The men scrambled out of the boats and on deck as soon as they had the +boys' permission, and for a minute or two there was the liveliest sort of +fracas on the deck and in the cabin of the <i>Circe</i>, but this shortly +ceased, and the mate coming to the side leaned over and said:</p> + +<p>"We've got 'em! They put up a fight, but everything is dead against them. +This is our company's vessel, and we've found enough unstamped stuff in +the cabin to give 'em a good long rest in jail. We've got Davis, the +captain, but the other fellow is over on the other shore, unless he has +made his escape by this time. Come on board, boys."</p> + +<p>The boys quickly accepted the invitation, and went on board where they +found Davis and his men prisoners.</p> + +<p>There was not a large crew, and some of them had been asleep at the time +of the surprise, these being captured before they knew what was going on.</p> + + +<p>"Go aboard with the boys and all the men you need," said the captain to +the mate. "I am going with the pilot. Follow us and do exactly as we do. +I've got this fellow under my thumb. He knows he'll get a good long term +for smuggling, but I can get some of it taken off if he pilots us out, and +I've promised him to do my best for him. It'll be as hard as finding a +needle in a haystack to get a pilot and we have him, so what's the use of +looking?"</p> + +<p>"Quite right, sir."</p> + +<p>The captain stood in the pilot house with a pistol at the head of the +pilot, and told him to give his orders, and to give wrong ones at his +peril.</p> + +<p>"If you sink us you'll sink yourself," he added, "so mind your chart and +steer straight."</p> + +<p>"All right, Captain," said the other. "I'll do as you say. I am not over +fond of Davis, who has done me many a dirty turn, and as for Rollins, +there is no more trusting him than there is a wolf, and I shall be glad to +be shut of both of them and the business at the same time."</p> + +<p>The boats were sent back to the yacht, which was put in charge of the +first officer, and followed in the wake of the <i>Circe</i>.</p> + +<p>In this case she proved to be worthier of trust than her beautiful +namesake of the days of Ulysses, and she not only made her way safely out +through the tortuous channel among the reefs, but led the yacht with the +boys on board to the open water outside.</p> + +<p>More than once as Captain Storms saw the waters bubbling and boiling +around them, and saw how close they were to the rocks he thought that they +were doomed, but as he watched the face of the pilot he saw that the man +was to be trusted, and held his peace.</p> + +<p>When they were outside, and a great cheer went up from the Hilltop boys, +they proceeded to the end of the island in search of the cutter and at +last saw her smoke in the distance.</p> + +<p>Sending her a wireless message they at length had the satisfaction of +seeing her approach, and at last the captain came on board and the <i>Circe</i> +and her crew were turned over to him, Storms saying:</p> + +<p>"Look out for the pilot. He is not as bad as the rest, and deserves some +consideration on account of getting us out of a bad scrape. Have you +caught Rollins?"</p> + +<p>"No, he was too quick for us, and slipped away, but we'll catch him yet."</p> + +<p>"I doubt if you do. However, never mind that. I'll put you in charge here +and will go back to my own vessel."</p> + +<p>He had been back in his own cabin but a short time, receiving the +congratulations of the doctor and the boys when the man on the lookout +reported a vessel in the offing, which flew the company's flag, and seemed +to be familiar to many of the officers and men.</p> + +<p>"That's the ship that Smith has sent to get us out," laughed Storms, "and +we've got ahead of him, and got out ourselves."</p> + +<p>He was correct, for in half an hour the newcomer was alongside and in a +moment Mr. Smith himself was over the side and grasping his son, Jesse W., +in his arms.</p> + +<p>"But how is this?" he asked. "I thought you could not get out. Did you do +this for a joke so that you could see me?"</p> + +<p>"No, indeed, sir," said young Smith. "We have not been away from the +island more than an hour or two, and it is to Jack Sheldon that you owe +your getting out. Come here, Jack, I want to introduce you to my father."</p> + +<p>"I am pleased to see you, sir," said Jack, coming up. "I am afraid that +Jesse W. gives me too much credit, although I am willing to take a little +of it. Captain Storms deserves the greater part of it, however."</p> + +<p>Mr. Smith held a consultation with the captain of the revenue cutter, and +an arrangement was shortly made between them whereby the <i>Circe</i> was to be +in the government's custody for a time, and then to be turned over to her +owners.</p> + +<p>The whole story was told and Jack, Dick, and many of the boys came in for +their meed of praise from Mr. Smith, as well as from Dr. Wise and the +captain.</p> + +<p>Mr. Smith had not found a pilot who could take him through the reefs to +Lost Island, as they all still called it, but his chagrin was greatly +tempered by seeing his son and all the boys safe out of their island +prison, and he complimented Jack on all that he had done, and said:</p> + +<p>"My dear boy, I have already promised my son to look after your interests, +and you need have no fear that they will be thoroughly attended to."</p> + +<p>"I am much obliged to you, sir," replied Jack, blushing, "but I am glad to +have found such good friends. I want to say a few words in behalf of your +son, and am only expressing the sentiments of the majority of the boys +when I tell you that he is a plucky little chap, and a credit to the +Hilltop Academy. I trust that we may long have him with us."</p> + +<p>"Hurrah for Jesse W., boys, give him a rouser!" cried Percival, and they +were given with a will.</p> + +<p>Mr. Smith went back to the relief vessel, the cutter took away her prize, +and by night the vessels had all parted company, Jesse W. Smith's father +to return to New York, and the yacht to proceed on her cruise, which, +although somewhat shortened as to route, was to continue until the time +originally set as to its duration.</p> + +<p>The cruise was a most pleasant one, and the boys learned much while it +lasted, and were sorry when it ended, and they set out for the north and +the Academy in the highlands.</p> + +<p>Later the <i>Circe</i> was turned over to its owners, and a share of the reward +for its recovery put to Jack's account in the bank, much to his surprise, +as well as satisfaction.</p> + +<p>The man with the white mustache, who was one of the boldest of the +smugglers, had made his escape, whither he had gone no one could tell, but +Jack's only interest in the man was to hope that he would keep away on +account of his mother, to whom he related nothing concerning his meetings +with the man, either at the Academy or in the tropics.</p> + +<p>"I do not wish her to think of him," he said to Percival, "and I do not +wish to think of him myself. Never mention him, Dick."</p> + +<p>"You may be sure I won't!" replied Dick with emphasis.</p> + +<p>There were some of the boys who did not escape seasickness on the way +back, for all they had been on the water so long, but the run home was, on +the whole, most pleasant, and Jack, Dick, young Smith and some others +enjoyed it thoroughly.</p> + +<p>"We shall have enough to think of and to talk about for a long time," +remarked Jack to Percival when they were at last on the train going back +to the Highlands, "and it is all the better that the trip was not what it +was originally planned to be. The very unexpectedness of our adventures +gave them all the greater charm."</p> + +<p>"I suppose so," said Dick, "but I generally like to know what is coming, +and then if I don't like it, I can get out of the way."</p> + +<p>"Well, we are all of us richer in experience."</p> + +<p>"And you in pocket," laughed Dick. "Don't forget that, my boy."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I have something that is worth a good deal more than the money that I +happened to get," said Jack, smiling.</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked Percival.</p> + +<p>"The friendship of a lot of good fellows, and of one or two who are a good +deal more than mere good fellows, real friends, in fact."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is worth a good deal, of course, but it seems to me that one +always has plenty of friends if he has money."</p> + +<p>"If he keeps them when he has no money, then they are friends, indeed," +said Jack, "and I think that I can count upon mine in any case."</p> + +<p>"Then you are lucky, Jack."</p> + +<p>For all that they had enjoyed themselves while afloat, the Hilltop boys +were glad to be back at the Academy again among the old familiar scenes, +and the work of the school went on with renewed vigor, Jack, in +particular, giving his entire attention to it so as to be as high as +possible in his classes at the end of the term.</p> + +<p>The greater part of the boys at the Academy, as well as the doctor and all +of the professors, were his friends, and the fact that some of the boys +were not, and did all they could to injure him did not worry him, for he +thought little or nothing of it.</p> + +<p>At the end of the term he was at the head of his class, and was so close +upon Percival that the latter said with a good-natured grin:</p> + +<p>"You'll be up with me next term, Jack, whether I look out for myself or +not."</p> + +<p>"Well, we generally have pretty good times together, Dick," Jack replied, +"so I don't think you will be sorry."</p> + +<p>"Not a bit of it," said Dick.</p> + +<p>Those who have been interested in following the fortunes of the Hilltop +boys may be glad to continue their acquaintance with Jack Sheldon and his +friends and enemies in the next volume, "The Hilltop Boys on the River," +which, in addition to giving an account of many aquatic sports, contains +also a number of thrilling incidents, which serve to bring out the +characters of the boys to good advantage.</p> + +<p>It was at the end of the term, and many of the boys were preparing to go +home when Percival said to Jack:</p> + +<p>"The doctor is going to let us have a summer camp for a few weeks. We are +to live on the river, and have all the fun we want with the addition of +some study, just to keep our hands in. What do you say, Jack? Will you +stay over if I do?"</p> + +<p>"I may stay in any event, Dick. I want to get on as fast as I can, and +this will give me a chance."</p> + +<p>"Then if you stay, so will I," heartily, "and between you and me you will +find a lot more who will do it if they know you are to be here."</p> + +<p>"The more the merrier," said Jack.</p> + + +<h3>THE END</h3> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island, by Cyril Burleigh + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 14879-h.htm or 14879-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/4/8/7/14879/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Emmy and the PG Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/14879-h/images/1-tb.jpg b/14879-h/images/1-tb.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa75d64 --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/images/1-tb.jpg diff --git a/14879-h/images/1.jpg b/14879-h/images/1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ceb4bfd --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/images/1.jpg diff --git a/14879-h/images/cover-tb.jpg b/14879-h/images/cover-tb.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c60af9c --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/images/cover-tb.jpg diff --git a/14879-h/images/cover.jpg b/14879-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2aa89e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/14879-h/images/emblem.jpg b/14879-h/images/emblem.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5af995 --- /dev/null +++ b/14879-h/images/emblem.jpg diff --git a/14879.txt b/14879.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a60a8e --- /dev/null +++ b/14879.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5234 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island, by Cyril Burleigh + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island + +Author: Cyril Burleigh + +Release Date: February 2, 2005 [EBook #14879] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Emmy and the PG Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + + + + +THE HILLTOP BOYS +ON LOST ISLAND + +BY +CYRIL BURLEIGH + +AUTHOR OF "THE HILLTOP BOYS" AND OTHER STORIES + +THE GOLDSMITH PUBLISHING CO. + +CLEVELAND +MADE IN U.S.A. + + +1917 + +PRESS OF + +THE COMMERCIAL BOOKBINDING CO. +CLEVELAND + +[Illustration: _He plunged the blade into the creature's vitals_.] + +CONTENTS + + CHAPTER PAGE + + I THE FLOATING ACADEMY 13 + II JACK'S DARING RESCUE 22 + III THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS 29 + IV CAUGHT ON LOST ISLAND 37 + V EXPLORING THE ISLAND 45 + VI A WALK UNDER WATER 54 + VII A REMARKABLE FIND 63 + VIII DISCUSSING THE FIND 70 + IX THE LAST VISIT TO THE WRECK 81 + X A THRILLING ENCOUNTER 89 + XI THE VOICES IN THE WOODS 98 + XII ADVENTURES IN THE WOODS 107 + XIII A STRANGE LIGHT AT SEA 118 + XIV THE MAN WITH THE WHITE MUSTACHE 125 + XV JESSE W. IS SENT FOR HELP 132 + XVI BEN'S STRANGE STORY 140 + XVII DISCOVERIES AND DISAPPOINTMENTS 148 +XVIII IN THE LAIR OF THE FOX 160 + XIX THE WAY OUT FOUND 170 + + + + +THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE FLOATING ACADEMY + + +"Well, if this is a life on the ocean wave or anything like it, I am +satisfied to remain on shore." + +"I knew that the Hudson river could cut up pretty lively at times, but the +frolics of the Hudson are not a patch on this." + +"They said we would not be seasick, but if I am not I don't know what you +call it. I don't want it any worse, at any rate." + +"They said it wouldn't hurt any if you were sick, but I wonder if they +ever tried it themselves?" + +"No, they are like the old bachelors who write about how to bring up +children. They never had any, so they don't know anything about them." + +"Well, if we get much more of this I shall get out and walk." + +"And I'll go with you, my boy." + +There were three boys on the deck of a large steam yacht, now about two +days out from New York, bound to the West Indies on a voyage combining +pleasure and education. + +The boys belonged to the Hilltop Academy, situated in the Highlands of the +Hudson, and their names were Billy Manners, Harry Dickson, and Arthur +Warren, all being close chums, and ready to share any adventure except +that of being seasick. + +They were none of them sick, but they were all afraid they would be, hence +their remarks upon the subject. + +There were close upon a hundred of the Hilltop Boys, and they were now on +a tour of the islands of the Spanish Main, having been invited by the +father of one of them, a man largely interested in the shipping business, +who had put at their service a commodious steam yacht large enough to hold +them all. + +Besides the boys there were Dr. Theophilus Wise, the principal, and a +number of his instructors, the negro coachman at the Academy, who was now +serving in the capacity of cook and general handy man to the doctor and +the boys, and the captain and crew, a considerable party all told. + +The sky was bright, there was none too much motion, and there was really +no reason why a lot of healthy boys should be seasick, and perhaps they +only feared they would be, and were just a little uncomfortable. + +They were to spend the Easter vacation and a few weeks longer among the +islands, continuing their studies as usual, and getting a knowledge of +geography and of many other things, which they could not get by merely +studying books, Dr. Wise having practical ideas on these points, and +having now a chance to carry them out through the generosity of Mr. Smith, +the shipping merchant, who had furnished the yacht. + +His son, Jesse W., one of the youngest boys at the Academy, had been found +and brought home when lost on the mountains by one of the Hilltop boys by +the name of Jack Sheldon, a general favorite at the Academy, and it was in +recognition of this act that he had decided to give the boys this glorious +vacation. + +As the three boys were complaining about the rough seas, and the chance of +becoming seasick, they were joined by two others, one of whom said in a +breezy voice and with a lively air: + +"Well, boys, how are you enjoying yourselves? Glorious weather, isn't it? +Fine breeze, just the thing to send us along, although we do not need it, +going under steam." + +"I'm glad you like it, Jack!" said Harry with a wry face, "but I can't say +that I do. You may be used to the water, but I am not." + +"I have never been at sea before," laughed Jack, "so I cannot be any more +used to it than you are. Perhaps you have been eating too much, that might +make you sick. You don't look it, at any rate." + +"I don't know how I look," muttered Billy Manners, stopping suddenly in +his walking, "but I know how I feel," and he made a dash for the cabin, +and was gone for some time, the others continuing their walk on deck. + +In a few minutes a smiling negro in a white jacket and cap came out of the +cabin carrying a tray containing cups of beef tea, which he offered to the +boys, saying with a grin: + +"Dis ain't like de beef soup yo' get at de 'cademy, sah, but mebby yo' +would like a bite or two dis mon'in' to sha'pen yo' appetite fo' dinnah?" + +"No, thanks, Bucephalus," said one of the boys, Dick Percival by name, who +was walking arm in arm with Jack. "I don't need anything to sharpen my +appetite, which is always good on sea or land." + +"The idea of offering a fellow anything to eat when he feels as I do," +growled Harry. "Take it away, Buck, or I'll throw you overboard." + +The high sounding name of the negro was often contracted to Buck by the +Hilltop boys, as in the present instance, but he was used to both, and +answered as readily to one as to the other, now saying with a broad grin: + +"Dat am a mistake, Mistah Harry. De worser yo' feel, de mo' yo' should put +in yo' stomach, dat is to say when yo' get good nourishmental food like +dis yer. Of co'se dey is detrimental substances which----" + +"That sort of talk will make me sick if nothing else will," said Harry, +hurrying away, while Jack and Dick sat down, and gazed out upon the +horizon, while sipping their bouillon and nibbling at their biscuits. + +"We will be in summer seas, as the advertisements call them, before long," +said Jack. "The air is pleasant enough as it is. Down here in the summer +it is pretty hot I take it, but in April it will be all right." + +"Think of us cruising around the Spanish main where the old buccaneers +used to roam," laughed Dick. "Perhaps we will dig up a pot of gold buried +on one of the islands by some of them." + +"If Captain Kidd had buried all the gold that folks said he did," replied +Jack, "he would have been kept busy till now. If people would work instead +of trying to find gold that was never buried, they would accomplish +something. The only treasure you dig out of the earth is the good crop you +get by working at your corn and potatoes." + +"That's true philosophy, Jack. I have never had to dig anything for +myself, having rich folks who always looked after me. Perhaps it would +have been better for me if I had had to do more for myself." + +"Well, you are not a spoiled child, Dick," said Jack, "as some sons of +rich parents are. You are not idle nor vicious, and you know the value of +money. You will do for yourself when you leave school. You are going +through a training now, that will do you good later." + +"Yes, I suppose so, but your having to do for yourself has made you a +stronger, more self-reliant fellow than I will ever be." + +"Oh, I don't know," returned Jack, half laughing, half seriously. "I am +not patting myself on the back, Dick." + +"No, you never would." + +The two boys were great friends, and were the leading spirits in the +Academy, having a great many friends, and being looked up to by the +greater part of the boys, and especially by the younger ones, who took +them as models. + +Dick was somewhat older than Jack, and was farther along in his classes, +having had more advantages, but Jack was studious and ambitious, and bade +fair to catch up with his older companion and schoolmate before many +months had passed, having already in the few months he had been at the +Academy greatly shortened the lead which Percival had in the beginning. + +Two days later the yacht was in much pleasanter waters, and the air was +quite warm and balmy, the boys going around in lighter clothing than +before, wearing mostly white flannel or duck, canvas shoes and caps, and +no waistcoats, some wearing only white trousers and shirts, and belts +around their waists, so as to get the most comfort they could. + +They were among the islands now, and expected to make a landing in a day +or so, when they were farther down the Spanish main than they were at that +time, the islands in the lower latitudes being more interesting in the +doctor's opinion than the larger and better known ones. + +It was a pleasant afternoon; none of the boys felt any touches of +seasickness now, and many of them were walking up and down the deck, some +taking their comfort under awnings spread aft near the cabin companion, +and some being on the bridge watching the steersman or looking out to sea +in search of sails or noting the flight of the gulls and other seabirds or +studying the movements of the dolphins playing around the bow, there being +many of these lively creatures about. + +Dick and Jack were on the bridge whence they could obtain a full view of +the deck and look all about them, ahead and astern, and on all sides, Jack +greatly enjoying gazing out upon the wide expanse and searching the +horizon for sails or a hazy view of some distant island. + +Below, on the quarter deck, which was guarded by a low rail only, was +young Jesse W. Smith, who took great pride in his full name and always +insisted upon being called by it, for whom primarily this expedition had +been gotten up, strutting up and down in sailor's trousers and shirt, +seeming to feel as if he were the commander of the entire southern fleet. + +"There's young Jesse, enjoying himself and seeming ready to say with the +fellow in the poem that he is monarch of all he sees," laughed Dick. + +"That was supposed to be Alexander Selkirk, the original Robinson Crusoe, +Dick," said Jack. "The line is 'I am monarch of all I survey.' You must +have recited it more than once in your younger days. That is not +altogether a safe place for young Jesse W., though. That rail is not very +high, and if we should happen to give a roll----" + +"You don't think there is any danger, Jack! Hadn't you better warn him!" + +"No, but I will go down and----" and Jack started to go to the main deck +and speak quietly to the boy. But before he had hardly said the words +there was a sudden startled cry and Jack, looking down quickly, saw that +the very thing he had feared had taken place. + +How it came about no one knew, but all of a sudden there was a loud cry of +"man overboard!" and Jack saw the boy just going down in the water. + +He was on the lower deck in a moment, and in another had thrown aside his +coat and kicked off his shoes, running to the rail as he did so. + +The cook had just been killing chickens on the forward deck, and was going +aft with two or three fowls in one hand, a knife in the other. + +As Jack reached the rail he saw something out on the water, just where the +boy had gone down that made him turn icy cold in a moment. + +Snatching the knife from the cook's hand, he sprang to the rail and leaped +overboard, taking neither rope nor life preserver with him. + +"By George! that's just what Jack feared, and there he is going to the +rescue before any one has shouted, almost!" exclaimed Percival, as he +hurried below. + +"H'm! pretty clever of Sheldon," sneered a stout, unprepossessing boy, who +seemed to be always scowling. "Knocks the kid overboard, and then goes to +his rescue to make himself solid with the father. Very clever stroke, +that, and just like him!" + +"If you say anything like that of Jack Sheldon, Pete Herring," stormed +Dick, who had heard the ill-natured remark, "I'll knock you overboard!" + +Herring, who was by no means a favorite in the Academy, quite the reverse, +in fact, had not supposed that Percival had heard his uncalled for and +utterly false assertion, and now hurried away with a snarl, evidently +fearing that Dick would carry out his threat. + +The captain, as soon as possible, gave orders to stop the engines, and to +hold the yacht near to the place where the boys had gone down, being ready +to turn and go to their assistance when they should appear again. + +All was excitement on board, for, until now, nothing had happened out of +the ordinary, and no one thought of being seasick or of complaining of the +monotony of the voyage. + +Jack came to the surface, looked around him, saw young Jesse W. just +coming up and shouting for help while he swam, and then, not far behind, +what had caused him to take the knife with him, the sharp dorsal fin of a +good-sized shark moving rapidly through the water. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +JACK'S DARING RESCUE + + +Straight toward the swimming boy swam Jack, rapidly estimating the +distance between them and the distance to be covered by the shark, the +presence of which was not yet known by the younger boy. + +He could swim, but he was more or less encumbered by his clothes, wide +bottomed trousers and full shirt, and could not make as good progress as +Jack in any event. + +Then, as he was only a little fellow, and probably not accustomed to +swimming very far out of his depth, Jack looked for his strength giving +out at any moment. + +"Keep up, J.W., you are doing fine!" he shouted, swimming straight on with +a long, even stroke, which carried him rapidly toward the struggling boy. + +Then some one on the yacht, with more anxiety than good judgment, shouted +out so that all could hear him: + +"Look out for the shark, look out!" + +The instant that the younger boy heard this, he turned his head and cast a +frightened look behind him, seeing the sharp fin just beginning to turn +over in the water. + +"Don't look, Jesse W., don't look, swim straight ahead!" cried Jack, who +had come up with the boy. + +Then he dove deep down so as to come up under the shark before he could +turn and rush at the boy so near him. + +Down went Jack, and presently began to rise, seeing the white belly of the +man eater just above him. + +With a fierce upward thrust of his right arm, which held the knife he had +taken from the cook, he plunged the blade into the creature's vitals, +drawing it downward and toward him, and turning his hand as he drew, thus +making a jagged cut, and fairly laying open the shark's belly. + +Young Smith, encouraged by Jack's shout, had darted ahead with his little +remaining strength, not again looking back, and knowing too well what was +about to happen when Jack dove. + +As the shark, mortally wounded, floated away, to be eaten by others of his +kind, Jesse W. suddenly became faint and felt himself giving out. + +Jack arose in a moment, however, and called out cheerily: + +"Hold on a moment, young fellow, and I'll be there. You mustn't give out +yet, because they haven't put about to take us aboard." + +The younger boy held out till Jack reached him, but seemed about to go +under again when Jack said quickly: + +"Here, get on my back and you won't have to swim. I'll tow you all right, +and you can get rested." + +"Did you kill him, Jack?" gasped the younger boy, as he obeyed the older +one's instructions. + +"Yes, yes, but never mind about that. Don't look behind you, just look +straight ahead. I don't know that there's anything there anyhow, but it is +always a good plan to look the way you're going to avoid accidents." + +"You're a funny fellow, Jack," said the other. "You don't want me to see +the sharks and be frightened." + +"That's all right, old man, but there are no sharks at present, and if any +come they will be too busy taking bites out of the other to bother me for +a time. H'm! they are putting about. That's all right." + +"You can carry me and swim yourself all right, Jack?" asked Jesse W. +"Maybe I can swim a bit myself now." + +"Never you mind about that," said Jack. "You just stay on my back till I +tell you to get off," and the boy swam with a good, steady stroke toward +the approaching yacht, keeping a lookout for sharks, as he knew they would +be sure to appear soon, seeming to scent blood for miles. + +Without letting the younger boy know that he was on the lookout he kept a +strict watch on all sides for more of the rapacious creatures, and at +length discovered two making for him in different directions, one of them +suddenly appearing between him and the yacht, which was rapidly +approaching. + +"That fellow will be frightened off or perhaps go under the vessel," he +thought, "but the other one is coming on pretty fast. I hope he won't get +to the yacht before me." + +The people on the yacht saw the shark between them and Jack, and Dick +Percival seized a gun from the captain, aimed at the creature and fired, +doing no great damage, but causing the voracious monster to rush off to +one side, and out of his direct course. + +Sharks have other fish to guide them, and without these they are helpless, +which was the case with this one, who, in his sudden change of course, got +away from his pilots, and had to be hunted up by them before he could get +his bearings on the boys in the water. + +This created a diversion in Jack's favor, and he swam on sturdily, +splashing and kicking, and making a great disturbance to frighten away the +second shark, which was coming alarmingly close to him. + +The yacht was coming on, however, and now they bore down toward him, +slackening speed a bit, one of the sailors throwing the boy a line. + +Jack caught it with one hand, as it settled over his head, and said to the +boy on his back: + +"Hang on, young fellow, and they'll haul us both up together. You are no +sort of weight, but just hang on." + +Jesse W. did as he was told, and both boys were hauled on board the yacht, +Dick, Harry, Arthur, Billy Manners and half a dozen others pulling in +heartily on the line. + +They were drawn on board just in time, for the baffled shark made one +terrific jump out of water as they reached the deck, the gangway having +been opened, and banged his nose against the plankshire, falling back into +the sea with a great splash. + +Bucephalus was at the gangway, an axe in his hand, and as the shark gave +his jump he aimed a swinging blow at the monster, but failed to hit him. + +"Go back dere, yo' sassy feller," he sputtered. "Ah jus' like to get one +good crack at yo' an' Ah rip yo' side open. Don' yo' perambulate dis yer +way again if yo' know what am salubrious fo' yo', yo'heah?" + +Bucephalus was fond of using big words, but did not always use them in the +most appropriate manner, so that the boys were always kept guessing as to +what he was next going to say when excited. + +The boys nearest the rail seized Jack and young Smith as they came on +deck, and bore them in triumph to the cabin. + +"Bully for Jack Sheldon!" shouted Harry, and fifty boys gave him the +heartiest kind of a cheer. + +"That's some nerve he showed," declared Arthur Warren, "but then, he +always did have nerve, Jack did. If he didn't he wouldn't have done the +things he has." + +"H'm! anybody could do that," said Herring with a snarl. "The yacht was +close to him all the time. You fellows are all the time cracking up Jack +Sheldon, but I don't see that he is any great shakes." + +"No, you wouldn't," said Billy Manners, with an emphasis on the pronoun, +"but decent fellows can see it. Would you have gone over after young +Smith?" + +"There wasn't any need to do it," growled Herring. "If I'd seen him first +I'd have done it." + +"You saw it as soon as any one except Jack himself, and you were nearer +the deck," said Percival, who came up in time to hear what Herring had +said. "I heard you say that Jack pushed the boy overboard so as to get the +name of rescuing him. You know that this is a lie, because Jack was on the +bridge at that time, and could not have done it. Jack and I both saw young +Jesse W. go overboard. Jack feared he might, and had started to go to the +deck when the thing happened." + +Herring did not care to get into a quarrel with Percival, who was much +stronger and better built than himself, and he, therefore, went away +muttering something which the boys could not make out. + +"He is always saying something nasty against Jack," declared Arthur. "He +hates Jack because Jack is smarter, and a general favorite. I wish he had +stayed on shore, but as Mr. Smith invited the whole Academy he could not +very well be left behind." + +"He ought to be marooned on some solitary, uninhabited island, and left +there to hate himself," chuckled Billy Manners. + +"They don't do those things nowadays, Billy," said Percival. "You have +been reading the lives of the pirates, and are full of that sort of +romantic stuff." + +"Maybe I am," chuckled Billy good naturedly, "but here come Jack and young +Jesse W., looking as fine as fiddles, and not a bit worse for their baths. +Whoop it up for them, boys!" + +Every boy in sight responded to the summons, and gave both boys the +heartiest cheers, both Jack and his young companion being favorites. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE UNEXPECTED HAPPENS + + +Neither Jack nor young Smith felt any the worse for his tumble into the +warm waters of the Caribbean, and after they had changed their clothes +they went on deck to assure their schoolmates that they were all right, +and suffering no inconvenience from their trip overboard. + +"Jack is a great sport," declared Jesse W., "but somebody called out +'shark!' a little too quick, for I nearly went to pieces. It may Have been +kind in him, but it was injudicious, to say the least." + +The boys smiled at the young fellow's wisdom, and Billy Manners replied: + +"Well, it wasn't me, J.W., although I know I do a good many fool things. +You can't lay that at my door, however." + +"Oh, you are a facetious fellow, and keep us amused, but you do think of +things," replied the younger boy. "The person who shouted 'shark,' is one +of the sort who yell 'fire' at the first sign of smoke, and raise a panic +in a crowded hall. They should be suppressed." + +"Very true, J.W., you have the right of it," said Billy, smiling. "You get +the right idea under your bonnet now and then." + +Young Smith had always been fond of Jack, but he was more so now and stuck +close to the older boy on all occasions, saying the next day to Jack as +they were walking on deck: + +"Do you know, Jack, you have done a lot for me, and it is time I did +something for you. I am going to speak to my father about you. It is a bit +of a job for you to get your schooling and your living and everything, +isn't it?" + +"Well, it is not so easy, Jesse W., and I do have a tussle now and then," +returned Jack, smiling at the other boy's earnestness. "Still, one has to +work for what he gets in this world." + +"Unless he steals it, and there is no satisfaction in that," said the +smaller boy wisely. "And later he has to work--in jail. What I wanted to +say was that now you have done this last thing for me, saving my life, +that's what it was, I think my father would like to do something for you, +help you through your schooling or something like that. Of course you +would not want him to give you money, for he does not put a commercial +value on my life, but he could help you to get ahead and so help yourself, +couldn't he now, Jack?" + +"I suppose he could," Jack laughed, "and you are a thoughtful young +fellow, J.W., but never mind about that. One of the sailors, Bucephalus, +any one, in fact, could have done what I did. In fact, it is all in the +day's work at sea, and nothing is thought of it." + +"No, but no one else did it, Jack. Any one might, but no one did. Only +you. Any one else could have done it, but they did not all the same. +That's nonsense about your pitching me overboard. I heard some of them +talking of it. Why, you were not there. I was on the quarter deck, where I +had no business to be, I suppose, with just a little bit of a low rail, +and when the vessel took a sudden roll I went overboard." + +"Jack saw you up there," said Percival, who was walking with the others, +"and spoke about warning you that it was dangerous. In fact, he was on the +way to tell you when you got ahead of him and rolled overboard." + +"Jack is all the time thinking of some one," said young Smith. "That's +what makes him different from the other Hilltop boys." + +"Oh, then you don't think I think of others, eh? That's one on me." + +"Oh, you haven't had to, Dick, you have always had some one to think for +you," said Jesse W. wisely, and both Dick and Jack laughed. + +"That young fellow will be doing something for you, Jack," said Percival a +few minutes later when the two happened to be alone. "He is thinking of it +now, and later you will hear from it." + +"I suppose he will," said Jack thoughtfully, "and I don't know how I can +stop him. I could not help doing what I did, but you would have done the +same if you had seen the danger before I did." + +"But I did not," returned Dick, "and that is just young Smith's line of +argument. It is nothing that you could have done something if you don't do +it. Well, you deserve all that can be done for you, and that is all there +is about it, old chap." + +Two days later in the middle of the afternoon, the day having been warm +with very little air stirring so that the boys were glad to seek the +shelter of the awnings spread across the decks, the breeze suddenly fell +away and the air became fairly stifling. + +The captain looked anxious, and ordered the awnings taken down, and told +the boys that they had better go below. + +Dr. Wise and the professors got the boys below, and none too soon, for all +of a sudden a funnel-shaped cloud appeared on the horizon, spread with +startling rapidity until it covered the entire heavens, and then from it +shot out a fierce flash of lightning, while the wind which had died out +now blew from an unexpected quarter with the greatest fury. + +Being under their own steam they, of course, had no use for sails, which +would have been blown away. + +For all that the waves dashed them ahead with great rapidity and the +propellers were now high out of water and now buried deep in the sea, the +yacht being almost unmanageable. + +The wind was behind them, and there was no chance of going about in such a +blow and with such great waves dashing against them, so in pitch darkness +they sped on, no one knew where. + +The electric lights in the cabin and the saloons were turned on so that +the boys were not in darkness, and some of the officers moved about among +them telling them that this was simply a squall, and would soon blow +itself out, and that there was nothing to be feared. + +The howling of the gale, the creaking and straining of the shrouds, the +thumping and pounding and groaning of the machinery, and the tramping of +men overhead made a combination of sounds that might well terrify anyone, +and the older boys tried to reassure the younger ones that it would be +over in a short time, and that they would soon be sailing on smooth seas +again, and be laughing at their former terrors, but it took a great deal +of faith to make all this believed, and some of those who urged it had +very little confidence in its truth. + +Herring, Merritt, and others of the same class were really terrified, and +took on dreadfully, predicting all sorts of dreadful things, and declared +that they were fools to have taken this voyage, and that they would never +undertake another. + +Jack Sheldon, Dick Percival, Harry Dickson, and even mercurial Billy +Manners were quite different, however, and young Jesse W. Smith acted like +a man, and although he was frightened, as any one might be, and no shame +to him, did not give way to his fright, but said very wisely that he +guessed the storm had been gotten up for their especial benefit so that +they might know what sort of things they could do in these latitudes. + +How long they were rushing before wind and sea they did not know, for it +seemed ages, where they were going they could not guess either as they had +come from an unexpected quarter, and so suddenly that they had not noticed +its direction, and were not where they could look at the compass. + +All was bright and cheerful in the cabins, but through the portholes they +could see that all was dark outside with an occasional vivid flash of +lightning, these coming less and less frequent at length till they ceased, +and then the skies began to brighten. + +Suddenly, however, before it was yet bright enough outside to make out any +objects, there was a sudden rush forward as if they had been struck by a +great wave, then a sudden upheaving as if they were mounting to the sky, +then another long rush forward, and then a shock as if they had struck +something, and for a few moments the lights went out. + +When they flared up again the vessel seemed to be at anchor, and the boys +said to each other: + +"What is the matter, have we struck on a rock, are we sinking, what is the +matter anyhow?" + +There was no confusion on deck, as there would have been if what the boys +feared had really happened, and presently one of the officers came below +and said reassuringly: + +"Well, we are all right as far as I can see, but where we are is another +story. In some landlocked bay, apparently, but where it is or how we +reached it I can't tell." + +"We were struck by a cyclone, weren't we, Officer?" asked young Smith, +with a wise air. + +"That's just what it was, and when those things strike you they strike +hard. Lucky for us that we happened to be going ahead of it, for if we had +been head on to it we might not have survived." + +"But there is no danger, we have not struck a rock or anything, we have no +holes in our hull?" + +"None that we can see. We are beached somewhere, and we may slide into +deeper water, but as far as we can tell now we are safe enough. Where we +are, however, will have to be determined when the sun comes out." + +The boys were reassured by this news, and after a time some of them went +out on deck, the yacht being now almost motionless, the waves just lapping +their sides, and running lazily up a beach, which they could now just make +out at a little distance. + +It grew lighter and lighter quite rapidly, and at length the sun appeared, +and they found themselves in a landlocked bay with a white beach in front +of them, beyond that a thick grove of palms of various kinds, green hills +on all sides and in the distance, straight ahead, a hill of considerable +size crowned with a thick growth of trees. + +As the sun grew brighter the scene increased in attractiveness, and the +greater part of the boys were charmed by it, making many exclamations of +delight, as they turned from one object to another. + +"It's a fine place wherever it is," said Jack. "I suppose they will locate +it to-morrow, and perhaps some one will come out to the yacht, and tell us +where we are." + +"I don't see any sign of dwellings," murmured Percival. "Perhaps there are +no people on it. Not all of these little islands are inhabited, and I +suppose it is an island?" + +"Probably, for I do not think we are near the South American coast. Some +one will know after a bit, doubtless. At any rate, we are safe and that is +a good deal." + +One of the officers came along where the two boys were standing, and Jack +asked him if he knew where they were. + +"No, I don't," was the answer. "We have not been able to get an +observation yet, and we started off at such a gait that it was impossible +to tell where we were going or at what rate. We will probably locate +ourselves in the morning, but there is no danger so you can make your +minds easy on that point, young gentlemen." + +"There is a good deal in that, sir," said both boys. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +CAUGHT ON LOST ISLAND + + +The sun set gloriously, and after a short twilight common to those +latitudes the full moon arose over the hills, and all the stars came out +little by little till the heavens were full of them. + +The moon dimmed their brightness somewhat, but they were still very +brilliant, and the night was a glorious one, the air warm and balmy, the +breeze just enough to temper the heat of the air, and all around them sea +and shore bathed in moonlight. + +After dinner, which was served in the saloon as usual, the boys went out +on deck for the most part, and enjoyed the beautiful evening, being +dispersed in little groups here and there, some seated and some walking +the decks. + +"We are safe enough, anyhow," observed Jack to Percival and a few of the +boys who were seated on deck with him, "and I suppose we will not leave +here till the morning at any rate." + +"We are sheltered in this bay, and even if there should be a storm outside +we will not feel it," returned Percival. "I hardly think there is one, and +it seems strange that we should have caught that cyclone at this time of +the year. Isn't it unusual?" + +"You can't call anything unusual in the tropics," laughed Jack. "I believe +you are liable to catch anything at any time here from yellow fever to a +tornado. They seem to have them always on hand." + +"Well, we are safe now, at any rate, and I am glad for that much. We will +make the best of this fine night, and take other things as they come." + +It was late when the last of the boys went to bed, for they all wanted to +make the most of the fine night, but they were all up early the next +morning, anxious to learn where they were, and if they would stay at the +island or put to sea again. + +Jack was the first of the boys on deck, and when he reached there he saw +Dr. Wise talking to the captain and the first officer, there being a +grizzled old seaman conversing with Bucephalus at a short distance. + +The doctor and the officers seemed to be carrying on a very earnest +conversation, and Jack heard a little of it as he came forward, and then +suddenly stopped, fearing that he might be intruding. + +"We are on the bottom, sir, and I don't know how long we may be there," +said Captain Storms. "The next high tide may raise us, and it may not. It +is my opinion that we have been on the bottom ever since we came into the +bay, and how we are going to lighten her I don't know." + +"But there are no holes, we have opened no seams, we have not taken in any +water?" asked the doctor, looking fixedly at the captain through his big +black-rimmed spectacles. + +"No, there are no open seams and no water. The bottom is sandy, too, I +think, and not the sharp coral rock you find in these parts that will cut +a hole in anything that touches it. No, it is simply a case of too little +water to float us, but that, as I may say, may be remedied. Time will +tell." + +"Then you do not think there is any cause for alarm, sir?" + +"Not any great amount, no, sir. The moon is not quite full, although it +looked so last night, and when it fills we may get higher water. We can +tell to-night. Meanwhile, there are the boats, and your young gentlemen +may go on shore and explore the island. I don't think there are any people +on it, as it seems very small. Many of the islands hereabouts have no one +on them." + +"You don't know which one it is as yet?" + +"No, I don't." + +The doctor walked forward, and looked over the rail, and Jack went up to +Bucephalus, and the old sailor and said: + +"You don't know where we are, either of you, I suppose?" + +"Ah haven't de remotest ideah, sah," replied the negro, "an' far as Ah can +make o't dis gentleman am in de same predicament. He says we am in de +tropics at a island ob not werry big size an' importance, but Ah was aware +of dese fac's mahself befo' Ah interrogated him, sah, so dat Ah am no +furder dan Ah was befo', sah." + +"This here is an island in the Spanish Main, the place where the old +pirates and buccaneers used to roam," said the old sailor whose name Jack +learned later was Ben Bowline, "and that's all I know about it. You didn't +come lookin' fur Cap'n Kidd's treasure, did you?" + +"No, we did not, and I don't believe we would find it if we had. Men are +foolish that go looking for such things. I don't believe that Captain Kidd +buried the hundredth part of the gold that he is reputed to have buried. I +have other things to do besides looking for buried gold." + +"You're about right," said Ben, "but there's plenty who do look for it, +and spend their lives at it and don't get nothing. This here is one of +them islands, and I thought mebby you boys had come a-lookin' for +something like that. Boys haven't anymore sense." + +"Thank you, but you'll find that the Hilltop boys have a good deal more +sense than that." + +After breakfast two of the yacht's boats were lowered, and some of the +boys went ashore to explore the island and amuse themselves in various +ways while the captain sent a party to find the outlet of the bay, and see +what their chances for leaving the island might be. + +Jack, Percival, Harry, Arthur and young Smith went on one boat, and were +the first to land, walking up the beach and into the woods as the other +boat came ashore. + +Picking a path as they went on Jack and his companions pushed into the +deep everglade, the lush undergrowth sometimes quite impeding their +progress, and making their advance very slow. + +"If we were going to be here any time," said Percival, "we should have to +make a path so that we could get about with greater rapidity. If we had +thought to bring an axe it would have been better." + +After a time their progress was more rapid, as the undergrowth was less +rank, and they went on with more comfort. + +Many varieties of cactus, prickly pears, plums and plants with the most +gorgeous flowers lined their path, and gave constant delight to young +Smith and some of the others, but Jack and Percival were more intent on +seeing where they would come out than in looking at plants and flowers, +and they gave the latter little attention. + +"There is certainly no one on the island," said Jack at length when they +came out upon an upland glade more open to the sky than the parts already +traversed, "or we should have seen them by this time. I think we have been +going in the same general direction, Dick, so suppose we push on in the +same line, and see where we come out." + +"All right, but there are hills, which we may have to climb if we keep +straight on. There they are ahead of us." + +"Yes, I see them, but they do not seem to be very high nor far away. If +they want us back at the yacht they will probably blow the bugle." + +They pushed on across the open space, and then through a wood where it was +not so easy to advance and at length, without noticing it, began to +descend, the way being good at times and at others very difficult so that +they were frequently obliged to halt and get breath. + +"I shouldn't wonder if we were the pioneers of this island," said Harry, +"for no one seems to have been through here before. How do you stand it, +young Smith, all right?" + +"Well, it is not so easy as walking along Broadway in New York," rejoined +Jesse W., "but I can manage it, I guess." + +"It strikes me that we are going down instead of up," observed Arthur, +"and we thought we would have to climb the hills we saw." + +"You often have to go up and down two or three times in climbing a +mountain," said Jack. "It looks all up from a distance, but there are +often intervening valleys, which have to be crossed, and then you go up +again." + +"This must be a pretty deep one, then," said Harry, "for we are going down +at a pretty steep incline now." + +They pushed on, passing through many great masses of rock, and still going +down at a decided angle until at length they came out upon a bare, rocky +shore with huge masses of rock to the right and left, and beyond a line of +reefs over which the surf was dashing, all being white both beyond and +inside the reefs. + +"We are on the other side of the island!" exclaimed Jack, "and we have not +climbed our hills at all or else they were so slight that we did not +notice them." + +"I would not like to be in a vessel driven on this side of the island," +said Percival. "See how the surf dashes over those reefs. You would go to +pieces in a short time." + +"That may be the reason why there are no people on it," said Jack. "It is +not very big, I take it, and is probably difficult of access. We seem to +have come to it without knowing it, and if we had I don't believe we would +have gone near it." + +They stood watching the surf, and taking in various parts of the shore, +seeing a great mass of rocks higher than those at hand, to the east of the +larger mass close in to land, and at length Jack suggested that they +return to the other side. + +"We ought to be able to follow the path we made coming across," he said, +"and in any event, we know the general direction, and if we do go astray a +bit it won't matter." + +They set out upon their return, and came out not far from where they had +started, finding Billy Manners and three or four of the boys on shore +waiting for them. + +"We thought you might be along soon," said Billy. "Would you believe it, +they don't know what this island is after all, don't know the name of it, +I mean." + +"How is that?" asked Harry. "Isn't it charted?" + +"Yes, it is charted all right, but there is no name given to it. The +captain says it is a sort of lost island, and they never thought enough of +it to give it a name or if it had one they didn't think it was good enough +to put on the chart." + +"Lost Island is a good enough name for us," observed Jack. "Suppose we +call it that while we are here. That will not be long, I suppose." + +"H'm! I don't know about that," Billy returned. "They have the yacht +afloat all right. They started the engines, and backed her off a sand bank +or whatever it was we were on, and are now in fairly deep water, but as to +leaving the island that is another matter." + +"How is it?" asked all the boys in a breath. + +"Because there is a line of reefs stretching right across the mouth of the +bay, and there seems to be no way of getting beyond them. There seem to be +openings here and there, but they are so narrow that the captain does not +think it wise to try to go through them." + +"Then we are lost on Lost Island, and are lost ourselves," said Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +EXPLORING THE ISLAND + + +The boys returned to the yacht in time for dinner, and here their +situation was talked over by the doctor and the captain, the former +assuring the boys that there was no great danger, for the yacht was +equipped with a wireless service, and the captain could easily make his +predicament known, and vessels would doubtless be sent to his relief. + +"We may pursue our studies as usual," the doctor continued, whereupon +there were wry looks upon the faces of many of the boys, "and as soon as +we get away from here we will pursue our voyage. It is simply an incident, +not an accident in our plans as arranged." + +After dinner Jack got one of the yacht's boats, and took Dick and young +Smith with him to the mouth of the bay to get a view of the reefs. + +For some little distance they could not see the opening of the bay on +account of its windings, the hills preventing them from getting a view of +the sea, but at length in rounding a wooded point they came in sight of +it. + +There were reefs in front of them, at some little distance, and points of +rocks on both sides, the outer bay being of considerable size, but +generally exposed to the weather, which they were not in the inner bay. + +They pushed on for some little distance, but not too near the reefs, where +they would be exposed to the force of the surf that dashed over the latter +and Jack presently pointed out a strange looking object on his right and +at some little distance. + +"I should say that that was a flagstaff sticking out of the rocks," he +said, "if it were not the most unlikely thing in the world that there +should be one there. If any one wanted to plant a flag-pole they would go +up higher on the rocks, I should think." + +"See if you can get a little nearer to it, Jack," said Dick. "It looks too +big for a flagstaff, but it might be the stump of a mast." + +"Which is much more likely," replied Jack. "A vessel might have gone +ashore there, and show the stump of a mast above water. It is a wonder to +me that we were not in the same predicament." + +"The only way that I account for it is that we were hit by a tidal wave or +the end of one, and carried right over the reefs without scratching, and +then the force of the water carried us to the inner bay where it left us +stranded for a time." + +"That sounds reasonable, and in the absence of any other explanation may +as well be received as the right one. I think you are correct about its +being the stump of a mast, Dick." + +Jack rowed as close to the point of rocks as he dared, not caring to be +dashed upon them, the landing being bad, and the boys got a better view of +the object that Jack had noticed. + +It was out in the water, and projected about five feet, and, being broken +off apparently about half way to the crosstrees, should be at least that +distance under water. + +"I should say there was five or six feet of water there," said Jack, "and +you can see from the marks on it that this broken end is still below high +water mark. I don't see any sign of a bowsprit but maybe that was broken +off when she struck." + +"And we can't tell whether this is the fore, main or mizzen," observed +Dick; "or whether she had more than two masts. There must be some of her +hull left, but it is all under water and maybe deeper than you think." + +"Yes," said Jack musingly, "and I am very glad that we are above it and +safe, even if we are on a lost island. The tide is coming in steadily now, +and there will be more surf, so I think it just as well not to be too near +the reefs." + +"We might get ashore at some other point farther back, and examine this +part of the coast," suggested Percival. + +"That woody point which we rounded and so came in sight of the outer bay +might be a good place," added young Smith, who seemed a boy of ideas, +although he was a little fellow and younger than the others. "We could go +ashore there, I think, Jack." + +"Yes, so we might," said Jack, as he began to row back. "There is time +now, I think. We have not got to go right back." + +He pulled on till he reached the point of woods and then looked for a good +place to land, finally finding one where there was a narrow white beach +and a bank which sloped gradually up to a distance of twenty feet to a +ledge whence there was another rise of about twenty feet to another grassy +bank. + +"This seems to be a good place," he said, as he pulled in to the little +beach. "Here is an old stump to which we can tie the boat so that it may +not drift away from us when the tide comes in if it reaches this point." + +Making the boat fast with plenty of slack to the rope in case the tide +should rise high, he got out and then he and Percival ascended the first +slope, helping Jesse W. between them. + +There was room enough for all of them on the bank, but it did not appear +to extend very far, and after taking a rest of a few minutes they set out +to ascend to the next landing place where they again rested. + +Here there was more room than before, but it was farther to the next +stopping place, and there was still more room when that would be reached. + +From this point they could see much of the inner bay, and make out the +yacht at anchor, but could not see much beyond that, and Jack suggested +that they go to a still higher point, and get another observation. + +There were trees, big and little, and rough rocks here and there, which +would aid them in making the ascent, and they kept on till they reached +another good stopping place of greater extent whence they could see much +more than before. + +Jack and Dick helped young Jesse W. up the bank, as, otherwise, it would +have been hard for the little fellow, who was under the average size for +boys of his age, and he felt quite proud of being with the older boys, and +said as he looked around on the water and the island and the yacht lying +at anchor: + +"When I tell the other fellows that I came up here they won't believe me. +I tell you, it is something to have two such big fellows to look after a +little shrimp like me." + +"Never mind, J.W., you will grow if you will only wait," laughed Jack. "We +were all little fellows once." + +"What sort of place is this, anyhow?" asked the smaller boy, looking about +him. "There are woods and rocks, and down there I can see that stump of a +mast. I wonder if we could see more of her by----" + +He was walking on, looking at the mast sticking out of water more than at +the ground at his feet when suddenly Jack noticed that he was right on the +edge of a hole just discernible in the tall grass. + +He darted forward, and caught the boy's arm just as he was about to step +into this hole without seeing it, and pulled him back. + +"Look out, Jesse W., or you'll go in!" he cried. "You don't know how deep +that place is nor where it will land you." + +"H'm! I never noticed it. It does seem deep, doesn't it? I wonder how far +down it goes, and what's at the end? Water, do you suppose?" + +"I don't know, I'm sure," said Jack, "but you might have had a bad fall, +my boy. You don't want to go star-gazing like that in strange places. You +never know what may be in the way. Always look where you are going." + +"Yes, that's good advice, but I wonder if there is anything down there +anyhow? Do you suppose we could get down?" + +"Possibly," returned Jack thoughtfully, "but I imagine it is a pretty good +job to get down there and a bigger one to get back, and nothing down there +anyhow." + +"You can't tell without going down," said the younger boy wisely, as he +knelt on the edge of the hole, and looked down. "Have you got a pocket +light with you? We might tell something with that." + +Jack parted the tall grass, and just then the sun shone out brightly, as +the breeze blew aside the branches, and a broad track of sunlight was let +into the hole. + +"It does not go straight down," said Dick, who was now at Jack's side. "In +fact, I don't think it is as steep as the path we came up. We might go +down and investigate." + +"Yes, but what would there be there when we got down?" asked the other +half impatiently. "We ran the risk of breaking a leg or an arm just for +the sake of exploring a hole in the ground, and get nothing out of it. If +there was anything there, now----" + +"Yon don't know till you look, as Jesse W. just remarked, and there might +be something there after all. Some of Captain Kidd's treasure, for +instance." + +"Nonsense! You are full of Captain Kidd's treasure, and so are half the +boys. You won't find anything down there, and you will have your trouble +for your pains." + +"I'm going to look just for the fun of it, anyhow," said Dick, "although +it would be very convenient to have a light as J.W. suggests. Another time +we can bring one." + +The sun shone more strongly into the hole, and Dick began to descend, +using a stout stick, which he had broken from a tree near at hand, to +assist him in going down. + +The smaller boy looked rather wistfully into the hole as Dick went down, +and Jack, breaking another stout stick, asked: + +"Do you want to go down there, young fellow, and follow Dick Percival on a +fool's errand?" + +"It might not be that," said the other, "and I would like to go." + +"All right, then, come along. Here is a staff for you. I can do without +one, I think. Keep close to me. Can you walk upright, Dick?" + +"Yes, generally," came back the answer in a muffled voice. "My! but the +place is filled with echoes, Jack. It goes down quite a distance I should +say. The light is a big help. Funny, but there seems to be a light down +here, although where it comes from I can't say." + +The boys kept going down and at length Jack said, pausing and trying to +pierce the darkness, the light that Percival had spoken of not being +visible at that moment: + +"I think we would better get a light, Dick. We don't know where we are +going, and it is dark. It is never safe to go anywhere in the dark unless +one is familiar with his surroundings." + +"That's true enough, Jack. Have you any matches? The next time we come +this way, if we do, we had better take a flashlight along." + +"I have matches," said Jack, and in a moment a tiny blaze shot up, +increasing till it enabled them to see to some extent where they were. + +They were still descending, but in a short time were on more level ground +or rock, whatever it was, proceeding till the match went out, and a few +steps farther when Dick suddenly brought up against something and +exclaimed in surprise: + +"Hello! we cannot go any farther, Jack. Strike another match, and let us +see where we are." + +Jack lighted two or three matches at once, and held them just above his +head so as to obtain a good view of his surroundings. + +"Hello! what is this?" exclaimed Percival. "A cave, or what?" + +Just before them was a jagged opening into some region beyond, but whether +it was a cave or not puzzled them. + +Jack went closer, and held his light in the jagged opening. + +"It's a hole in the side of a vessel, Dick!" he cried in amazement. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +A WALK UNDER WATER + + +"That's what it is, Jack," said Dick, after the first sensation of +astonishment had passed. "It is more in the bow than on the side, however. +You can see how she narrows a little farther on. This hole is pretty well +forward. I tell you what! This is the vessel we saw under water, or the +one that stump of a mast belongs to, at any rate." + +"I believe it is, Dick. Probably she drove in here, had a hole smashed in +her bow, and then sank. The earth has settled in between the masses of +rock above and around her, and hidden her, but there is still the fissure +down which we have just come." + +"This is as good as finding Captain Kidd's treasure, isn't it?" exclaimed +young Smith. "We never expected to find anything. Shall we go in and see +what more there is, Jack?" + +"We may find ourselves in the water before we know it," murmured Jack. +"No, I think we would better stay where we are. It is the safest plan by +long odds. It looks like taking too many chances to go into a place like +that. Better wait till another time." + +"Give me a match or two, Jack," said Percival. "I'll promise not to take +too great a risk." + +Jack handed him the matches, and he struck them, and advanced a step or +two into the opening. + +"It is plenty wide enough," Percival said. "Yes, these are ship's timbers, +all right. She must have struck hard to make such a gash. We are on a +level with the lower deck. I can't see much cargo around, but there is a +way aft. This must be a sort of steerage, and the lower hold where the +cargo is stored is below us. I believe we could walk right ahead to the +after bulkhead, and if there happens to be a door in it, as is often the +case, straight into the after cabin." + +"If there were anything to make a torch of, Dick, I'd go with you," said +Jack, "for I am as much interested as you are in this strange find, but we +don't know what we might stumble against or into what hole we might fall. +Wait, Dick. We shall not probably leave the island for some time, and +there will be opportunities to find out more about it." + +"Yes, I suppose so, but I would like to find them out now. However, you +have the right of it, and it is just as well to be cautious." + +"Besides, I have only a few more matches left, and we must get back to +where we started. If you and I were alone----" + +"Yes, quite right," and Dick came out, as his matches were extinguished, +and they started back. + +A match or two gave them all the light they wanted till they began to +ascend, the way up being more difficult than coming down, and both older +boys being obliged to assist the younger one. + +However, they reached the top at last, the light seeming to be almost +dazzling after they had been used to the darkness for even the short time +they were down in the strange place. + +"I never knew the sun to be so bright," said Jesse W. "It's like what men +say coming up out of a deep well is." + +"We'll go there again," said Percival. "I want to know more about the +place. Better not say anything to the other fellows. We'll have them +swarming over the place if we do, and then there is more or less danger in +going down there." + +"I believe you want to keep the discovery all to yourself in case we did +find treasure there," said Jack. "Probably there is nothing more than a +lot of spoiled beef and some old clothes." + +"Oh, after we have seen all there is to be seen I don't care, but I do +want to have it to ourselves until we have had a chance to see all there +is to be seen. Think of going into a vessel through a hole in the side. +Very few people can say they have done that." + +"There'll be no getting the vessel out of that now," said young Smith. "I +wonder how old it is!" + +"It cannot be so very old," replied Jack. "If she were, the moss and slime +on that stump of a mast would be thicker, and there would not be so much +of the stump. Probably she is filled with water in any event." + +"There was none in the part we saw." + +"No, as that was above water, but the lower part undoubtedly is. I do not +believe we could go all the way through as Dick suggests." + +They went back to the place where they had left the boat, made their way +down and rowed back to the yacht, where they went on board, and saw some +of the boys, telling them of visiting the reefs, but saying nothing of the +strange discovery of the vessel among the rocks. + +There was a very high tide that night, but Captain Storms decided that it +would be very unwise to try to pass beyond the reefs, none of the openings +being wide enough and the surf very heavy. + +"There is no use, young gentlemen," he said to Jack and Dick and a few +others. "We will have to stay here for a time until I can get in +connection with the outside world. Then, perhaps, some one may know about +this place, and a way out of it. One vessel has gone down here, and I +don't care to be the next, and leave my mainmast sticking up out of the +water to show folks the way to destruction." + +"We saw that stump ourselves," said Jack. "Was that wreck long ago, do you +think?" + +"Not so many years, twenty, perhaps, or maybe less. The rocks would hold +her tight, but I don't believe there's much left of her. Nothing worth +taking away, I guess." + +Jack gave Dick a peculiar look, and neither of the boys told what they had +seen. + +The boys had lessons and a lecture that afternoon, and again the next +morning and in the afternoon were free to go about as they pleased, +explore the island or go out on the water with some of the sailors. + +"I want to take another look at that old vessel," said Percival to Jack +after dinner. "I have borrowed a stout rope and an axe, and I have my +pocket light with me. Will you go along, Jack? I suppose we should take +J.W. with us, but he is a little fellow, and there might be danger." + +"If we find anything whatever we can take him another time," said Jack. "I +don't want anything to happen to the young fellow. Some of the boys may be +saying that I took him to a dangerous place just to have the name of +rescuing him again." + +"You don't mind what such fellows as Herring and some of the rest say, I +hope?" sputtered Percival. + +"Not altogether, but it is annoying all the same." + +"What those fellows need is a good thrashing." + +"Well, I don't like this constant wrangling, and I keep away from them as +much as possible and don't give any cause for talk." + +"Which is the cheapest kind of goods dealt in. Never mind them, but come +along and make another investigation of the wreck. I believe we may find +something in it." + +"Spoiled beef and rotten clothes," laughed Jack. "However, I will go with +you, Dick." + +They took the boat and rowed to the woody point where they made fast, and +climbed to the top as before, having much less trouble on account of not +having the younger boy to assist. + +They made their rope fast to a tree near the edge of the hole among the +rocks, and by its help descended to the bottom, then lighting their way to +the hole in the side of the vessel. + +With the axe Percival cut away the jagged edges of the timbers at the +opening, and then he and Jack pushed forward, using the axe now and again +as rubbish of various kinds came in their way. + +They could see boxes and bales and casks on either side as they went on, +there being a passage-way between the tiers of the cargo, and here and +there a post or stanchion had half fallen and impeded their progress, +obliging them to cut it. + +As Percival had predicted, there was a door at the end of the bulkhead, +dividing the hold from the cabin, but this was fast. + +"It is not very thick," said Percival. "I believe I can break it in with a +blow of the axe." + +"Wait a moment, Dick," said Jack cautiously. "Listen! It strikes me I hear +the sound of water. We don't want to let a flood in on us. It is likely +that the after hold and cabin are full of water, and we don't want to be +swamped." + +Percival put his ear to the door, and then flashed his light through the +keyhole. + +"There's nothing there, Jack," he said. "If there were water it would come +through here. We have gone so far, and I'd like to go the rest of the way +and get to the cabin. I believe we can. There is probably a passage on one +side of the companion leading to the after cabin." + +"Yes, and the companion is open, and the place full of water." + +"There is none here, at any rate, and it will be time enough to look for +trouble when it comes," returned Percival impatiently. "Stand aside, old +man, and throw the light on the door so that I can give a good blow." + +Jack did as requested, and Percival raised the axe and dealt the door a +sturdy blow, which took it off its hinges and sent it crashing into a +narrow passage beyond. + +"There is no water there!" he exclaimed in triumph. "Come on, Jack." + +The two boys went into the passage, stepping over the fallen door, Jack +showing the way with the pocket electric light, which was great use to +them in the strange place. + +The passage was narrow, not wide enough for the two boys to walk side by +side, and was about two fathoms in length, leading to another door which +was fast like the first. + +In many vessels there is a passage like this leading from the after cabin +to the steerage, where the entire hold is not open from the hatches to the +keel, as in big ships, which the captain may use in reaching certain +portions of the cargo with less trouble than in the case of its being +stored in a solid bulk. + +"Here is another door, Jack," said Percival. "I don't see any sign of a +companionway from the deck." + +"No," said Jack, putting his ear to the door and listening intently. "I +can hear the swash of water just the same, Dick. We had better be a bit +careful." + +"We would hear it here, anyhow, Jack. There is water outside, and I don't +suppose there is much depth here. You would be very likely to hear it the +same as you hear water dashing against the side of a vessel when you are +in the hold. It doesn't follow that the water is beyond there." + +"No, I guess not. Well, give it a smash, and be ready to run in case there +is water there." + +Percival took as much room as he could in the narrow passage, swung the +axe, and sent the door crashing into the space beyond. + +Instead of a flood of water breaking in upon the boys, as Jack more than +half expected, there was considerably more light while the sound of water +was more distinguishable than before. + +"Well! I declare!" exclaimed Percival, pressing forward. + +The boys found themselves in the after cabin of a vessel, which was as dry +as if she had been in her dock, a soft light from overhead showing them +the details of the place perfectly, even without the light of the torch. + +"We are under water, Jack!" cried Percival. + +"So it seems." + +"That light comes from the bull's-eye overhead. The water over it softens +the light. Otherwise, the sun would pour right into the place." + +"That would be better than having the water pouring in on us, Dick. The +flashings of that skylight are tighter than most of them, however, or the +water would have gotten in here long before now." + +"It is just possible that the glass has been covered with sand which has +been lately washed away. That would fill all the cracks around the +flashings and make them tight. Very likely the wave that sent us in here +has uncovered the skylight, and that is how it is light in here. It is +dry, too, Jack. Why, this is like being in one of the submarines we have +read of." + +"Where you slide back a panel and look at the fishes in procession, +through a plate-glass port," laughed Jack. "That always seemed absurd to +me, but there are lots of things that Verne wrote about which have been +more than realized." + +"I should say so! Why, his balloons and his submersibles would not be a +patch upon what are actually in use these days." + +"Well, now that we know it is safe here, and the water is not going to +pour in upon us, let us have a look at the place," said Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A REMARKABLE FIND + + +The cabin where the boys now found themselves, so strangely lighted and so +marvelously discovered, was not of any great size and was evidently the +stateroom of the late commander of the vessel, which itself was not of any +great size so far as the boys could determine. + +It was furnished with a standing bed fixed against the side, a table and +two chairs, all fixed to keep them from moving about when there was any +commotion outside. + +The skylight was just above the table, which could be used in writing or +to have a meal served upon, there being evidences of its having been used +for both purposes at the time of the wreck, for there were papers and +writing materials scattered about, and a plate and a wine glass just under +it, having fallen off during the commotion of the wreck. + +There were lockers along the floor under the bed, and along the sides of +the cabin, and in one corner a heavy chest such as seamen often use to +contain their valuables, this being brassbound and padlocked. + +There was a small door forward and another aft, but the boys did not +attempt to see what was beyond either of them, being satisfied with what +they saw, and not knowing what dangers they might bring upon themselves by +doing so. + +"It's a bit uncanny, Jack," murmured Percival, "having the water so near +to us and not knowing at what moment it may come in upon us. One of those +doors probably leads to the companionway going on deck, and the other to +the cockpit, but I don't think it would be wise to open either." + +"No," said Jack, picking up a bit of writing from the floor. + +"There may be, and probably is, another door beyond this after one leading +into the cockpit," pursued Percival, "but we don't know if we would let +the water in upon us, and it is just as well to leave it alone for the +present. The other doubtless leads to the companionway, and there may be +another one beyond at the top or perhaps at the bottom. I don't see how +the water has not made its way in here, but----" + +"Both doors are of iron," said Jack. "Probably the skipper wanted privacy, +and--do you read Spanish, Dick! You know a number of modern languages, +more or less." + +"No, not very well, but what made you ask me?" replied Percival in some +surprise. "What have you got there, Jack?" + +"A letter addressed to some official in Mexico, but whether of the +provisional or rebel government I cannot make out." + +"H'm! you are always picking up strange letters." + +"Yes, it seems so. You are thinking of the one I found in the flying +machine. We never settled whether that was really genuine or not, Dick, +but this seems to be so. As far as I can make out it refers to a shipment +of some sort, arms or gold or--why, Dick, this wreck cannot be so old, +after all. The date of this is only that of last year and late at that." + +"Then that knocks the Captain Kidd idea silly!" + +"Never mind Captain Kidd. Let us see if we can open this chest. Do you +know, I am a bit nervous about staying down here too long. You said it was +uncanny, and so it is. I'll save these letters," picking up another from +the floor. "Suppose we try the chest, Dick." + +"The only reason that the water did not come in through that hole forward +is that it was probably made by the rocks when she struck and this after +part is much lower. She was caught fast and could not fall back. Well, +what about the chest, can you open it?" for Jack was kneeling before it, +and trying the fastenings. + +"I don't know. The lock is closed, but it is only an ordinary iron one, +and perhaps you might break it with the axe. There is no other lock that I +can see. Try breaking it open, Dick." + +Percival struck the padlock a terrific blow with the axe, and broke it in +half, it being just a cast-iron affair and easily broken. + +"It seems funny to put a lock like that upon a chest supposed to contain +something worth while," remarked Jack, as he removed the pieces of the +lock, pulled aside the hasp and opened the chest. "That is the way some +persons do, however." + +Throwing back the lid of the chest he found a tray containing some papers, +a pair of pistols and a knife, a few odd trinkets of very little value, +some loose cigarettes, two or three dozen in number, a cheap photograph, +and a purse made of silver mesh containing a few gold coins. + +"Whose picture is that, Dick?" he asked, handing the photograph to +Percival, who took it and examined it carefully. + +"Why, that's Villa or some of those rebel Mexicans," Dick answered. "I +have seen it in the papers often. What's in the body of the chest?" + +Jack removed the tray and set it on the floor, opening his eyes with +astonishment, and giving vent to a startled exclamation at the same time. + +"Well, it is not Captain Kidd, Dick," he cried, "but it is money, just the +same, bags of it, and gold," untying the cord around one of the bags, and +showing it to be full of gold pieces. + +"Not pieces of eight, Jack?" asked Percival with a broad grin. + +"No, American twenties and tens, and a few English sovereigns," said Jack, +taking out a handful of the coins. "Why, there's more than a hundred +dollars right in my fist." + +"And a lot of bags, too, Jack," and Percival bent over and looked into the +chest. "There must be thousands of dollars there, Jack." + +"Yes, if they all contain gold. Take care of this one, Dick, while----" + +At that moment there was a sudden heavy sound outside, and both boys +started up in surprise. + +"What's that, Dick?" + +"I don't know, but I don't like it." + +"There is no water coming in?" + +"Not that I can see." + +The sound was repeated, louder than before, and Percival said nervously, +while his cheek was noticed to have perceptibly paled: + +"Let us get out of here, Jack. I am frightened, I admit. If anything +should happen to you I would never forgive myself." + +He closed the lid of the chest with his foot, caught Jack by the arm, and +said as he hurried away: + +"I don't know what it is, but I am not taking any risks." + +They hurried along the passage by which they had entered the cabin, +reached the hole in the bow by which they had entered and then, as +Percival turned on his flashlight, which he had extinguished after +entering the cabin aft, they hurried forward toward the hole in the rocks. + +"There is no water here, Dick, at any rate," said Jack. + +"No, there is not, but I can't think what made--hello!" + +"What's the matter, Dick?" + +"Where is the way up? I can't find it. The passage was not a wide one, was +it? We cannot have gone astray?" + +"No, I don't see how we could," muttered Jack, as he looked around him, +the place being well lighted by Dick's flash. "Hello! I see what the +trouble is, and now I know what the noise was." + +"Well?" asked Percival. + +"Some of the rocks have fallen in, Dick. That was what made the noise. +Here is our rope. We are in the right place, therefore. The way up is +closed, however. Or, at any rate, it is closed here, but I don't +believe----" + +"The rocks were not loose, were they, Jack?" + +"I did not notice that they were, and there has been no rain to send them +down. They must have been loose, however. How else could they have tumbled +in?" + +"I don't know, unless some one took a bar or a pole, and sent them down +that way." + +"Nonsense, Dick! Who would do that?" + +"I know plenty who would do it. Who pushed you into the ravine, back at +Hilltop at the risk of your life?" + +"Yes, but there is no one around, and no one knew where we were going. You +don't suspect little Jesse W., do you?" + +"No, indeed," said Percival, with a hearty laugh, "but some one has seen +us go down here, and they have thrown down the rocks to make it harder for +us to get out." + +"It does not seem likely, Dick," said Jack in a doubting tone. "There was +no one about, and we are the only ones who know the place. We said nothing +about it, and young Smith will keep quiet. Come, that is hardly worth +thinking of. Let us see how we can get out. There must be some way." + +Dick turned his light this way and that, and Jack lighted a match, saying +with a significant chuckle: + +"That is all very well, but this is better for our purpose. Watch!" + +The flame presently began to flicker, and indicated the presence of a +draught of air, Jack noticing the direction whence it came, said: + +"Try this way, Dick. There is a draught which makes the flame flicker. Try +the axe on the rocks and see if you can loosen them, or, better yet, see +if there isn't a fissure somewhere." + +"Yes, there is," said Percival, climbing a mass of rock somewhat to one +side of where the others had fallen. "Yes, I see it, Jack." + +Between them, working with the axe and their hands, the boys opened up a +passage between the rocks wide enough for them to crawl through, and in a +few minutes were on the top of the wooded point only a few yards from +where they had entered the strange place. + +"The boat's gone, Jack!" exclaimed Percival. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +DISCUSSING THE FIND + + +The boys could see the water and the bank from where they stood, and Dick +had been the first to notice that the boat was not where they had left it +before going down into the buried wreck. + +"I suppose it might have drifted away," said Jack. "The warp could have +become loosened." + +"Yes, it could have done so," sputtered Percival, "but it did not do so +without help. The same fellows who tumbled the rocks into the hole took +away the boat. I have an idea who they were. I spoke pretty sharp to +Herring the other day, and he has probably been nursing his wrath ever +since." + +"You are too suspicious, Dick, and--hello! did you bring that bag with +you?" for the first time noticing that Percival had the bag of coin which +he himself had handed to his friend. + +"Yes, you told me to take care of it, and I did," and Percival put the bag +in the outside pocket of his jacket. "Well have to hail the yacht, old +chap. We can make our way in that direction along the top of the bank. It +is not such bad going, and then we have the axe if it is necessary to cut +our way through the undergrowth." + +They set out along the top of the bank, keeping a lookout for the vessel, +now and then having to cut their way on account of the thickness of the +growth, which was often as high as their waists. + +"The rocks could not have fallen in by themselves, and the boat gotten +adrift at the same time," muttered Percival as they went on. "Both of +these things were done by some one who wished to annoy us. Watch and see +how some of the fellows look when we get back." + +"Very well, I will, but I don't see why any one should have done it, +perhaps both of these things were accidents." + +"Either one of them might have been, but is it likely that both were, and +that they happened at the same time? Of course not. You will find that +Herring or Merritt, or perhaps both, have had a hand in it. They don't +like you, and do everything to hurt you, and they don't care any more for +me than they do for you. Bother this tangle! It keeps you busy every +moment. I believe things grow up here in a night. There will be bare rocks +one day and a regular forest on them the next. It beats all how things do +grow in these tropical islands!" + +Keeping on, now in sight of the water, and then having to leave it on +account of the thickness of the jungle, they pushed on till they saw the +yacht lying at anchor. + +Descending to the shore at the risk of a bad fall, they hailed the vessel, +and presently some one put out in a boat and came toward them. + +Bucephalus and old Ben Bowline were in the boat, the old sailor hailing +them when he neared the shore. + +"Well, mateys, did you think you'd walk out to the yacht?" he asked. "The +old man was afraid you'd fallen in, and been gobbled up by sharks. Some of +the boys found the boat adrift, and brought it in. Don't you know how to +tie up a boat yet? I'll show you some knots if you don't know them." + +"We know all the knots you can show us, Ben, and perhaps a good many +more," grunted Percival. "The boat was tied all right, but----" + +"Wha' was yo' goin' to say, sah?" asked Bucephalus. + +"Some one untied it," said Percival. "Who brought it back, Buck?" + +"Ah donno, sah, Ah didn' saw dem, othahwise Ah could identify de pussons. +Have yo' any ideah as to deir pussonality you'se'f, sah?" + +"I have an idea, but ideas can't hang a man. Anyhow, I don't want it to +get abroad that Jack Sheldon and I do not know how to tie up a boat or tie +any ordinary kind of knot. The whole Academy would laugh at us if that +notion got around." + +"Ah reckon de 'cademy knows all abo't yo' an' Mistah Jack a'ready an' wha' +yo' done befo' dis," said the negro with a broad grin. "Ah reckon, too, +dat de story was a fabrication puah an' simple. Fact am, if Ah done tol' a +story lak dat folks would call it a lie witho't mincin' wo'ds." + +"That's about what it was," said Percival, as he and Jack got into the +boat, and Bucephalus and Ben Bowline started to row them to the yacht. + +"I had a comical adventure with a boat myself once, mateys, if you care to +hear it," said old Ben as he bent leisurely upon his oar, "but maybe the +young gentleman won't believe it." + +"Go ahead, Ben, let's have it," spoke up Jack. "Never mind whether we +believe it or not. It will amuse us at any rate." + +"A sailor man is a mo' pribileged pusson dan one what resides on sho', +Ah've noticed," observed Bucephalus. "Folks lak to listen to dem an' dey +don' call it lyin', whereas an' on de oder han', ef Ah indulge in any +picturesque adaptations o' de trufe dey say Ah'm lyin' right away." + +"Never mind that," chuckled Percival. "There is no hurry and Ben wants to +spin his yarn, so you might as well let him. Take it easy. There is no +hurry. Go ahead, Ben." + +The old sailor was a good deal mollified by Dick's present attitude, and +taking an easy stroke with his oar, he began his more or less veracious +narrative. + +"It was down on the coast o' South Ameriky that this here thing happened, +but I never had it put in the log 'cause the old man wasn't along an' +nothin' went into it that he didn't see hisself; but it's just as true, +I'm giving you my word----" + +"As the one about the whale!" roared Dick. "Go on, Ben." + +"We was sailin' along the coast o' South Ameriky," Ben went on, "when one +day as I was cleanin' out one o' the boats to have ready when we went +ashore, which we judged would be in a little while, there come up a sudden +squall an' I was chucked clean overboard, boat and all. + +"Davits, falls, blocks and everything went, and me too, striking the water +kerplump. Then it got so dark that I couldn't see nothin', and where I was +I had no idee, no more'n nothin', 'cause I couldn't see a thing and there +was such a noise all around that I couldn't hear a thing. Then it come on +to rain for further orders and I was just drenched to the skin and had all +I could do to keep the boat bailed out. + +"I couldn't see nor hear anything of the old hooker and I just drifted +without knowin' where I was goin' and not carin' much nuther, bein' wet to +the hide an' tired out with bailin' an' just ready to flop down an' quit. + +"Well, I drifted an' drifted without knowin' where I was driftin', till +finally I seen a shore at some distance off an' took the oars an' pulled +for it, havin' somethin' to think of now. + +"It was still a-rainin', but I didn't care for that now, but just pulled +for shore till it got dark again and stopped rainin', which was a comfort. +I pulled on till it was too dark to see anythin', and then I come to a +stake stickin' out of the water and hitched my boat to it and lay in the +bottom an' went right to sleep. + +"As long as I was tethered to the stake or bush or whatever it was I +reckoned I was all right, an' so I slep' on without feelin' a bit alarmed, +knowin' that I wouldn't drift no more an' in the mornin' I could go on an' +reach the shore. + +"When I woke up in the mornin' I was mightily astonished to find myself +lyin' on the ground at the foot of a big tree and to find the boat hangin' +to the topmost limb. Ye see, the rainwater had run off an' left the ground +bare again, and as the boat slipped down to the perpendickalar I was +dropped out an' went from branch to branch till----" + +Percival let out a hearty laugh and fairly shook himself, saying at last +when he could find breath: + +"Baron Munchausen with variations. I've heard that story before, Ben, but +the rain was snow and the twig was a church steeple. Still, it's a good +story and will bear a bit of a change." + +"H'm! I knowed you'd say I was lyin'!" grunted Ben, pulling heartily on +his oar and cutting his story short. + +Dick put the bag of gold and the letters Jack had picked up in his trunk +under his berth and locked it, saying nothing at that time to any one, but +resolving to go again with Jack, and bring away the chest if they could +manage it. + +He meant to tell the doctor about their wonderful find when they had all +of it safely in their possession, and to have the letters translated so as +to learn definitely all about the wrecked vessel and its mission, but just +now he thought it wise to say nothing and Jack agreed with him. + +Not all of the boys were on the yacht when the two young adventurers +returned, and nothing was said about their having to hail the yacht, but +as the others began to arrive, some time later, Percival watched them in +turn to see if he could distinguish guilty looks on the faces of any. + +When Herring and Merritt came on board he suddenly stepped out from behind +a funnel, which had hidden him so that the two bullies did not see him +till just as he faced them. + +Both of them showed surprise, and Percival said to himself: + +"They are the ones, just as I supposed. When anything happens to me or +Jack and especially to Jack, look out for Pete Herring." + +The two bullies passed him as quickly as they could, and had nothing to +say, being evidently much astonished at seeing him on the yacht, but +fearing to say anything lest they should betray themselves. + +Passing Percival they came suddenly upon Jack, not having time to prepare +for a meeting with him, and both of them flushed crimson. + +"Oh, then it was you who found the boat afloat and brought it back?" Jack +said carelessly. "Very kind of you, I am sure." + +"What boat, what are you talking about?" growled Herring, turning redder +than ever. "I don't know nothing about no boats." + +"No, I suppose not," laughed Jack carelessly, and then going on to join +Percival, who said: + +"Herring and Merritt are the fellows." + +"Yes, so I supposed. They don't know anything about it. They never know +anything about things that happen to me, and generally you cannot prove it +on them." + +"We can't now, but I am satisfied that they were in it just the same." + +"Well, we got out of it all right, so there is no need of accusing them. +The next time we go there we will be on the watch." + +"I suppose they saw the boat, and then came up to see what we were doing, +saw the rope and knew we were down in the hole, and closed it upon us." + +"They might have drawn up the rope, but they don't think of everything, +fellows like that." + +"No, they do not, and that's how you can catch them." + +Later Dick and Jack saw the captain and Dr. Wise in the cabin, and told +about the wrecked schooner, as she probably was, and of the visit to the +cabin under water, and the finding of the gold. + +Dick exhibited the bag Jack had given him, and showed the letters found on +the floor, the captain being able to read them. + +"There were money and supplies shipped to the Mexican rebel leader," he +said, "and probably the vessel may have been chased, and put in among the +islands of the Caribbean to get away, and was wrecked here. There is quite +a lot of money in this bag, about a thousand dollars, and if there are +many of the bags and they are all as full as this, you will have a pretty +good sum to dispose of." + +"The money belongs to Jack," said Percival. "He discovered the wreck and +it should be his. He needs the money, and I do not." + +"You worked with me," put in Jack, "and if I have any of it you should +have a share. Does it belong to us, however?" + +"Of course it does," said Captain Storms. "You found it and that's the law +of treasure trove. It isn't likely that the Mexican rebels or their agents +will put in a claim for it, and it is yours all right." + +"But we have not got the rest of it," said Jack, "and the hold might be +flooded before we go there again. It is a wonder that the water has kept +out as long as it has." + +"The iron doors have done a lot to keep it out; they are probably +watertight. That cabin you were in was like a strong room, and maybe the +skipper had it built that way a purpose. You don't know what sort of crew +you may get when you are on a lay of this sort, and I guess he wasn't +taking chances, having a lot of money on board." + +"That may account for it, but it made me feel a little creepy being in +there, and knowing that the water was just above me, and perhaps on the +other side of those doors." + +"I don't wonder. They say divers get afraid when they see all sorts of +fishes swimming around them under water. I'd like to go to the place with +you. I've had some queer adventures, but nothing so queer as that." + +"I should be very glad to have you, sir, and if you want a share of the +money in the chest----" + +"No, that's all right. It belongs to you and your friend and the little +fellow, too, I suppose." + +"Why, of course, they must have their share of it." + +"I don't think Jesse W. will take it, and, anyhow, he was not with us when +we went into the cabin, and I certainly don't want it," said Percival. "It +all belongs to you, Jack." + +"Not if I don't want to take it," Jack replied with a laugh. "How are you +going to make me take it, Dick?" + +"I'm sure I don't know, but it ought to be yours, just the same. I'd like +to get the rest of it, and suppose we go after it to-morrow?" + +"That will be all right." + +"And I'll go along to help you," said the captain. "There's no getting out +of here right away, and we may as well do something. I can't get any +answer to my wireless messages yet, and maybe folks think they're only a +joke, and don't pay any attention." + +"You have tried to get New York?" asked Jack. + +"Yes, and Havana and any place I can, but I can't do anything. I don't +know if I am tuned up with those fellows or whether they think it is only +a joke or what. I've tried American and International, wired S.O.S. and +all the different distress signals, but could not seem to make +connection." + +"Why don't you try Mr. Smith in New York? He would be interested on +account of his boy. Try a plain commercial message. That ought to go. You +can at least try it." + +"That is very sensible advice," said the doctor. "I suppose you have been +sending out distress signals, and the wireless people, if they have caught +you up simply regard it as a hoax." + +"Well, I'll try again, and do as the young man suggests. In the meantime +I'd like to visit this wreck. I never was in a ship's cabin under water +when it was safe, and I'd like to try it." + +"We will go to-morrow," said Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE LAST VISIT TO THE WRECK + + +The next day, as agreed upon, they went to the old wreck on the rocks to +get more of the treasure in the hold, and to satisfy the captain's +curiosity about the place. + +It had gotten around among the boys that Jack and Dick had found a sunken +treasure, and there were stories of fabulous wealth afloat in a short +time, all the boys, with a few exceptions, wishing to visit the place and +gaze upon the buried gold with their own eyes. + +"We cannot have all those boys visiting the place and getting in our way," +sputtered Percival when it was suggested by Harry that he and one or two +others go with the party. + +"But we would not be in the way," said young Dickson, "and we might be of +assistance." + +"How did you find it out anyhow?" asked Percival. "We did not say anything +about it." + +"I don't know, but, at any rate, it is all around, and everybody knows +about it. I heard Herring talking about it. He seems to think it is a big +hoax, and that you did not find anything." + +"Well, we did, all the same, but we don't want a lot of fellows with us, +and, besides, it is dangerous. Never mind, Hal. You are in with us on the +most of our adventures, but I don't think you had better go this time. We +have promised to take young Jesse W. with us, as he was there the first +time, but not the second, and he has never seen the cabin with its strange +lights, the swash of water outside, the chest of gold and all that." + +"H'm! you make me want to go with you all the more," said Harry, half +laughing, half impatient. "You should not appeal to a boy's imagination +like that, Dick. I want to go with you now the worst way." + +"Well, I suppose you do, but you'll have to be satisfied with what I tell +you about it. I'll write a composition about it, and you will think you +are reading Jules Verne and the Arabian Nights all over again." + +"You be smothered!" sputtered Harry, half cross and half good natured. "As +if that would satisfy me." + +"It will have to, Hal," laughed Percival. "Never mind, I'll give you a +ten-dollar gold piece to hang on your watch chain as a charm. You can say +it was one that Captain Kidd had." + +"Yes, and they were not made at that time, two hundred years ago," said +Harry in disgust. "Well, never mind. Billy Manners and I will find a +buried treasure, and never let you have a smell of it" + +"All right, Harry," and Dick went away to get Jack, young Smith and the +captain, and start on their visit to the point. + +The captain had a rope and an axe, and Jack took his pocket flash along +with him, having found it very useful on the second visit to the submerged +vessel. + +They climbed up the rocks, and found the place where they had gone down, +but now the opening was so small, more rocks having fallen in, apparently, +since their last visit, that they doubted if they could get down. + +"I am afraid we shall have to give it up," said Jack in some +disappointment. "The last time Dick and I were here we had to squeeze +through to get out, but now it seems worse than before." + +"Let me try, Jack," said young Smith eagerly. "I am only a little fellow, +and can get through where big fellows like you and Dick could not. Don't +you remember how you put me through the little window at the Academy, that +time of the rebellion in the school? Well, you can use me now in the same +way. I want to see that place down there. You know I did not see it the +last time, and I want to see it very much. Try, Jack. I am not so big, and +can squeeze through almost anywhere." + +Jack found a place where it would be quite possible for Jesse W. to get +down, but not for himself or Percival, and, of course, out of the question +for the captain, who was nearly as big as both of the latter combined, and +he said: + +"Here is a place, J.W., which, I think, will fit. It does seem too bad +that you should not see the place, having been with us on our first trip, +and we will give you a chance." + +"I can bring away a bagful of the gold, anyhow, Jack, and perhaps go for +another one after that. I should like to see the place, anyhow." + +"All right, you shall do so, old man, but don't load yourself down with +gold. That has drowned many a man before now. Get the rope, Dick. We will +lower him into the place. Take a light, Jesse W., for you will need it. +You know just how to find everything?" + +"Yes, I go into the hole in the bow of the vessel which we saw, follow +along till I come to a door, and then go along a passage till I come to +another door and there I am, right in the cabin with a light overhead, +shining through the water." + +"That's it. Don't stay too long, and don't load yourself down with bags of +gold. I'd rather not have it than have you take any risks." + +"But you don't think there is any danger, Jack?" asked the younger boy, as +they prepared to lower him. + +"No, if I did I would not let you go." + +The boy got down safely enough, and called to Jack and Dick when he had +reached the bottom that he was all right, and then threw off the rope, +which had been put around him under his arms. + +He called to them from time to time, his voice growing fainter every time +he called, and at last they could not hear him at all. + +"I hope it is all right," murmured Jack when the boy had been gone a few +minutes. "I thought it would be when I let him go, but now----" + +"It is all right," said the captain. "He is a plucky little fellow, and +there isn't anything that can happen to him. The rocks hold the vessel as +tight as a vise and there is no chance of her slipping back into the water +or anything of that sort." + +"Well, I hope so, but somehow I begin to feel nervous, and wish that I had +not let him go down." + +"Young Smith is all right, Jack," said Percival reassuringly. "He is not +afraid of anything, and really I don't believe there is anything to be +afraid of. There was not when we went down." + +"No, but we are a couple of big boys, and he is only a midget. If anything +happened to him I should never forgive--listen, and see if you can hear +him coming." + +"No, I cannot, but he has had hardly time to get there yet. Give him a +chance. He will want to see all there is, boy-like. Let him have a good +long look at the wonders of the place. He has never seen anything like it +before, and never will again." + +Jack was very anxious in spite of Dick's cheering words, and the minutes +seemed like hours till at last, holding the rope in his hand he felt a tug +at, and then heard: + +"Hello! Are you up there?" + +"Yes!" shouted Jack. "Are you all right?" + +"Sure I am. Wait till I get the rope under my arms. I've got a bag of the +stuff, as I said I would, but I don't think----" + +"You don't think what?" asked Jack, thinking that he detected something in +the tone of the boy's voice that indicated danger of some sort. + +"Nothing, wait till I get the rope fast." + +"Very good. Take your time." + +"All right," the boy called in a few moments. "I have got it. Haul away!" + +They saw the light of the electric torch flashing upon them, as the boy +came nearer and nearer to them, and at last drew him out of the hole, Jack +noticing that he seemed quite pale, and then suddenly noticing that he was +wet up to his knees. + +"Hello! what is this, Jesse W., how do you happen to be so wet?" he asked. +"There was no water in----" + +"Yes, some," answered the boy quietly. "It had worked in under the door or +at the side somewhere. Maybe they had settled. Anyhow, I got the bag and +here it----" and then the boy sank limp and helpless into Jack's arms and +fainted away. + +"By George! he was a plucky little fellow and no mistake!" exclaimed Jack. +"He said that he would get the bag and he did, and standing in water up to +his knees, and not knowing at what time he might have the whole Caribbean +sea tumbling in upon him. Get some water, Dick!" + +The boy presently came around, however, and said faintly, but with a half +laugh: + +"I told you I'd bring it, didn't I, Jack? Well, I did, and I hope it will +be enough to keep you at the Academy for the rest of the course. If it +isn't, my father----" + +"You are a brave young fellow, Jesse W., but you don't go back for +another, I tell you that!" + +"You bet he does not!" echoed Percival. "So the water had made its way in, +had it? That's the last we will see of the place, then." + +"Yes, it had come in somewhere, at the bottom, I guess. Still, it was not +coming in all the time nor fast, and I wanted to see the place, and I had +promised to fetch a bag of gold to Jack and----" + +"And you wanted to keep your word even if you were drowned," sputtered +Percival. "Much you could have kept it in that case. You are a young +brick, J.W., but don't you do anything like that again." + +"Well, I won't, if you say so, Dick," answered the little fellow. + +"That's a brave little chap," said the captain. "He said he'd do a thing, +and he did it. There's lots who wouldn't." + +They returned to the boat, and the captain told Percival to row toward the +reefs and as close to the stump of a mast as it was safe to go, as he +wanted to observe the wreck again. + +Nearing the wreck they noticed that the water was swirling and eddying +very violently at a point where they judged the cabin to be, and the +captain said, after looking at the boiling waters for a short time: + +"The water is making its way in and will run forward as far as its level. +She'll break up with all that water in her, and I wouldn't be surprised to +see her go any time." + +In fact as they lay there watching the boiling waters over the sunken +vessel, they saw them become more greatly agitated and Percival pulled +away to a safer distance as the agitation increased. + +Then of a sudden the stump of a mast sank into the water, there was a +still greater agitation and a mass of broken timbers shot up into the air +and then fell back, and went floating away on the tide. + +"That's about the last of her," said Captain Storms, "or, at any rate, you +won't go into the cabin again. You've made your last visit to the wreck, +and if any one ever gets that money he'll have to dive for it. You can be +thankful that you went there when you did." + +"So I am," said Jack. "Come on, Dick, pull away from here." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +A THRILLING ENCOUNTER + + +Returning to the yacht first for the captain to get aboard, Jack and +Percival then took the boat and went to the outer bay on a little +exploring trip of their own, the rest not caring to make any more +explorations at that time. + +The boys guided the boat along shore not too near the rocks, both keeping +watch for any nook which might prove of interest or afford an opportunity +for an adventure of any sort. + +There was a short, keen-bladed hatchet to cut their way through the +thicket if necessary when they went ashore, and Percival had a rifle with +which to shoot any game they might come across, both being placed on one +of the forward thwarts. + +Jack was provided with his pocket flashlight in case they went into dark +places, and Dick had a revolver in his pocket, declaring that this might +be of as much use as the torch in case they came to close quarters with an +enemy, no matter of what sort. + +As they were rowing at a lazy rate, keeping up a slow, even stroke, Jack, +who was keeping a lookout on the shore and steering at the same time, +suddenly said, looking toward a mass of rocks which they had just come +abreast: + +"There looks to be a sort of cave in there, Dick. At any rate, there is a +hole which seems to run in to some little distance. Suppose we explore it +and see how far we can go." + +"I'm in for anything that you are, Jack," replied Dick. + +"All right, pull ahead, not too fast, and we'll have a look at the place." + +"Pull ahead it is, Jack." + +Jack was in the bow and he now steered the boat toward the opening in the +rocks, which was quite big enough for them to enter, and they went on at a +slow, steady gait, presently gliding into the water cave, for such it +seemed, with plenty of room above and on both sides. + +Jack turned his head now and then to see how they were progressing and if +there were any obstructions in the way, and presently said: + +"A little slower, Dick. It is getting darker in here now and I do not want +to run into anything." + +"Slower it is, Jack. It would not be any fun to stave a hole in the bottom +of the boat. It doesn't belong to us." + +"That would be reason enough for not daring, with some persons," said Jack +with a low laugh. "They will take care of their own things, but are +careless with those belonging to others." + +"The woods are full of such, Jack." + +Jack rowed with one hand, drawing in his other oar so that it might not +strike the rocks in case the passage narrowed, and then got out his pocket +flash and shot a strong ray ahead of him. + +"Good gracious! what's that?" suddenly exclaimed Percival in accents of +terror. "Back water, Jack, for heaven's sake!" + +"What is it, Dick?" asked Jack, turning his head and sending the light +directly in front of him. "I don't see anything." + +"It's gone, Jack, or the light does not strike it now, but it was +something awful. It fairly gave me the creeps to look at it." + +"But what was it, Dick?" and Jack slowly turned the light this way and +that so as to get a sight at the object which had so terrified Percival. + +"I don't know. It had two awful eyes and a beak and a lot of legs, or +arms, or whatever they were, and a fat body which--there it is, Jack!" + +Jack saw it and shuddered. + +"It's a devil fish, an octopus, Dick," he muttered, turning the light now +full upon the grisly object squatting on a rock at the farther end of the +water cave and glaring balefully at the boys through his blood-red eyes, +like some demon of the deep, the very mention of which might send terror +to the bravest hearts. + +"We'd better get out quick, Jack!" gasped Percival. "If that fellow----" + +What he might have said was cut short by a sudden splash in the water +which caused the boat to rock violently and dashed the spray in their +faces. + +Then there was a whip-like sound and Jack felt himself struck by something +which quickly wound itself about one arm and a part of his body and +swiftly pulled him out of the boat. + +He dropped his flashlight, but as he left the boat his free arm swung out +and his hand touched something which he seized in an instant. + +It was the short hatchet on the thwart and he had seized it by the helve, +well up toward the top. + +With the swiftness of thought itself he realized what had happened. + +The octopus had wound one of its tentacles about his arm and body and, +clinging to them with a tenacity which he could not overcome, had pulled +him out of the boat. + +Percival gave a scream of fright as Jack went overboard, although he was +usually a very self-contained young fellow and not apt to give way to +hysterical outbreaks. + +It was dark in the cave, but he quickly groped for the torch which Jack +had dropped, and cried out: + +"Where are you, Jack? What has happened?" + +Jack went under water and felt himself being drawn toward the end of the +water cave where he had seen the octopus squatting on the rock. + +His thoughts flew like lightning and, being a resourceful boy, he +instantly decided what to do. + +He had kept his breath from a natural instinct and now with his free arm +he dealt a swinging blow with the little axe in a direction which would +not cause him to injure himself but might strike the clinging tentacle. + +His one hope was that another of the flying arms might not reach him and +secure his other arm, which fortunately was his right. + +He suddenly felt a resistance and realized that he had struck something +and hoped that it might be the tentacle of the octopus. + +In another moment he felt the pressure on his arm and body relax and then +realized that something had fallen from them. + +He struck out vigorously with both arms, the pressure upon his lungs from +having held his breath so long beginning to be unbearable. + +Then he felt his right arm seized, the suckers on the tentacle pressing +strong upon his muscles and seeming to draw the blood even under his +clothing, and he knew that the baleful creature had again gotten a hold +upon him. + +He was able to clutch the hatchet in his left hand as the power gave out +in his right, and at that moment he arose to the surface and drew a +succession of deep breaths before another of those terrible arms seized +him by the leg and drew him again under water. + +In another instant, as he struck wildly at the eldritch creature that held +him and felt the tension on his arm relax, everything became suddenly +black. + +The octopus had resorted to one of its natural tricks and had ejected a +dense black fluid into the water which made it impossible for him to see +anything. + +The creature was drawing him toward some hole in the cave, probably under +water, and he realized most poignantly that something must be done shortly +or he would be sacrificed to the pitiless water devil. + +He felt himself rising and in a moment, when he most needed it, was able +to get his breath. + +The devil fish, even with the loss of two of its arms, was still powerful +enough to make all his efforts futile, and he felt himself being drawn +into some recess beyond where he had first seen the octopus squatting on +the rock and glaring at them with its horrible eyes. + +Percival, having found Jack's electric torch and searching the cave below +and above water for a sign of his friend, suddenly saw the devil fish rise +to the ledge where he had first seen it. + +Jack was now caught in two of its remaining arms and was being drawn +toward some deep recess whence there would be no rescuing him. + +Transferring the light to his left hand, Percival whipped out the revolver +from his hip pocket with his right and took rapid aim. + +"I'm afraid it will be like trying to pierce an elephant's hide," he +muttered, "but I'm going to try it for all that." + +Luckily he caught sight of the creature's eyes at the moment and took aim +straight for one of them. + +Jack was being drawn toward the horrible beak and the sight nearly +unnerved Dick. + +Fortunately he had aimed and pressed the trigger before he saw this +ghastly sight. + +He fired three or four shots in quick succession and then heard the sound +of a plunge in the water. + +Jamming his torch into the clutch of one of the tholepins, he seized the +rifle and shot a quick glance ahead of him. + +Jack was not to be seen, but he did see the octopus writhing and waving +its frightful arms on the ledge. + +"Where are you, Jack?" he shouted. + +"All right!" cried Jack himself, rising just alongside the boat and +holding on to the gunwale with one hand. + +"I'll finish that demon before he can do any more mischief!" hissed Dick. + +It was Jack falling into the water that had caused the plunge he had heard +and not the return of the octopus to its element. + +Now, taking quick but careful aim, Percival fired half a dozen shots from +the repeating rifle he had seized and with deadly effect. + +The revolver shots had wounded the octopus, but not fatally, and he might +at any moment plunge into the water and seize Jack. + +The heavier caliber weapon did the work. + +As Jack climbed into the boat there was a great plunge into the water +which caused the light craft to rock again and the spray to fly. + +"That settles him!" gasped Percival, and then he dropped his weapon and +drew Jack into the boat, where he promptly sank limp and helpless under +the thwarts, all his strength having seemingly left him. + +"All right, Jack?" asked Percival. + +"Yes, but get away," answered Jack feebly. + +Percival was not slow to obey the injunction. + +Seizing the oars, he quickly backed water and then turned the head of the +boat toward the entrance of the cave, whence he shortly saw the light +streaming in as he pulled a quick, powerful stroke. + +"I'm glad that's over!" he said with a sigh of deep relief as he neared +the opening. "No more exploring queer places like this again!" + +When he was outside the cave he rested on his oars and said: + +"You are all right again, Jack?" + +"Yes," said Jack, getting up and seating himself on a thwart, "but I don't +want another such an experience. I feel as if all the blood had been drawn +out of me by that horrible thing in there." + +Out in the bright sunlight, away from the gruesome cave and its dreadful +tenant, Jack seemed to recover his spirits quickly, however, and he +presently took one of the oars and then another, and said: + +"It's all right, Dick. We are away from the horrible thing and I thank +heaven I am still alive to tell of it. Let us go somewhere else." + +"Right you are, I will," echoed Percival heartily. "If I had had any idea +that there was such a thing in that place you could not have hired me to +go into it or to have let you ventured there. I am glad enough that I was +around to be of assistance." + +"So am I, Dick, but suppose we say no more about it. I hate to even think +of the horrible object and I only hope that I will not dream of it these +nights." + +Then the boys rowed swiftly away from the place where they had had such a +thrilling encounter and never once looked back at it. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE VOICES IN THE WOODS + + +After the boys had gone some little distance from the water cave they +pulled at a more easy stroke and began to talk again, their thrilling +experience with the devil fish having made them silent for a time. + +They did not allude to it again, but talked of other matters, Percival +saying as they neared a green, shady wood where the trees grew thick and +cast a deep shade on the white sands and showed a more than twilight +darkness in their farther recesses, everything being quiet and peaceful +within those heavy shadows: + +"That's a place where everything seems to be asleep even at midday, Jack. +It looks like the cave of the seven sleepers that we used to read about in +mythology." + +"It seems quiet enough for a fact," said Jack with a smile, "but it is hot +outside and the birds are probably all taking a rest. Probably just before +dawn or at sunset you would hear them making noise enough." + +"It is a thick wood all right, just the place to get lost in. If the +African jungle is any worse than this I don't care to enter it." + +"The trouble is you can't see far ahead and then there are briars and +brambles and a lot of spiky plants, prickly pears and Spanish bayonets and +cactus to run against and get scratched and cut with. Our own woods are +good enough for me, or bad enough, I might say." + +"I wonder if we could find anything if we did go in there?" said Percival +musingly as they rowed along shore, fascinated by the bright glare of the +sands, the dense green of the woods and the dear blue of the skies. "We +might have a try at it, Jack." + +"Yes, I suppose we might if we did not go too----" And then Jack suddenly +paused and a look of alarm came across his face. + +A harsh voice from the wood suddenly interrupted him and he glanced here +and there to see whence it came. + +The words he heard were in Spanish, as far as he could judge, but he could +see no one. + +Other voices quickly joined the first and the boys rowed out somewhat from +shore and looked closely at the woods, expecting to see some one. + +"There are people on the island after all, Jack." + +"Yes, Spaniards, I think. Sailors, I guess. At any rate they are not using +the choicest language from what little I know of the language; Jack. I do +not see any one. Do you?" + +There were loud and angry voices in the woods, but the boys could see no +one and went on slowly, farther out from shore so as to be out of danger +in case any one appeared. + +"A lot of drunken sailors would not be good company," declared Jack. "I +would rather be alone." + +"It can't be any one from the yacht, can it?" + +"No, I don't think so. We have no Spaniards and Captain Storms brings his +men up better than that. Besides, if it were some of our men we would see +a boat, and there is nothing." + +They still heard the voices at intervals as they rowed on and had no +desire to enter the woods as long as the men were there. + +"That's a nuisance," said Percival with a half-growl as they rowed on. "I +would have liked to go ashore there, but of course if there are a lot of +swearing Spaniards hanging about it wouldn't do." + +"I'd like to know what brought them here," remarked Jack. "We got in by +the sheerest good luck and it does not seem possible that another vessel +could have done the same. Those things don't happen twice." + +"Well, they are here, at all events, and it stops our going ashore. I'd +like to know if they saw us in the boat?" + +"I don't suppose so. They did not show themselves and they would not have +made so much noise if they had----" + +Just then the voices were heard again and the boys stopped rowing. + +"There they are again!" muttered Percival. "We may have trouble, Jack." + +The voices were very loud and the language used was not of the choicest, +although, being in Spanish, it was not as offensive as it would have been +in English, the boys not understanding much of what was said. + +"Are they quarreling, do you suppose?" asked Percival. + +"No, I don't think so," and Jack suddenly laughed. + +"What are you laughing at?" asked Percival, somewhat impatiently. + +"Listen a minute, Dick," said Jack. + +The voices had ceased, but presently they were heard again, closer than +before, and then a big, gorgeously feathered parrot flew out of a clump of +trees not ten feet from shore. + +"There are your quarrelsome Spaniards, Dick," laughed Jack, as another +parrot joined the first. + +"Well, I declare!" laughed Dick. "Are you sure, Jack?" + +"Yes. The first time I heard them I was deceived, but just now I fancied +there was something queer about those voices and I decided that there were +parrots in the woods." + +"Yes, but Jack, Spanish is not the natural language of parrots and they +must have heard it from men. That proves that there are men on the +island." + +"Or that there have been, at any rate, but we don't know that there are +any here at present." + +"Well, as long as we know that there is nothing more dangerous than a lot +of parrots, suppose we go ashore and look about a bit." + +They found a good landing place where there was a shelving beach extending +for some distance in either direction, and a clump of trees close to the +water, where they tied the warp of the boat to keep it from floating away. + +They saw more of the parrots, but not all of them imitated the human talk, +chattering and making harsh sounds after their own fashion and making the +glades bright with their gorgeous plumage. + +Both boys laughed at the recollection of their first fright when they +heard the birds and thought that there were men on the island, and then, +taking their bearings, set out to explore the island for a short distance. + +As Jack had a good idea of direction, they were not likely to get lost, +although in the jungle they were often in a twilight shade and could not +see the sun, which might have told them which way they were going. + +"It gave me something of a start when I thought there were other people on +the island besides ourselves," remarked Percival as they went on through a +semi-darkness, the vegetation being thick above and around them so that +they could see nothing of the sky. "It's pretty dark here." + +"Yes," agreed Jack, turning on his pocket flash. "Hello!" + +"What's the matter?" asked Percival, Jack's tone being one of alarm. + +A shot rang out, and then Jack jumped back, exclaiming: + +"I guess I've settled him, Dick!" + +"What have you settled, Jack?" + +"That fellow there," and Jack turned the light upon something at his feet +and then pushed it aside. + +"A snake!" exclaimed Percival. "You blew his head off. Is he very +dangerous, Jack?" + +"Well, not now," said the other with a dry laugh. + +"No, I should say not. Would he have been?" + +"He belongs to the family of dangerous snakes, one of the most dangerous, +in fact. He is either a fer de lance or a first cousin to it, and either +is a sort of creature to keep away from. The bite is nearly always fatal, +as the virus acts so rapidly upon the system. It was lucky I turned on the +light when I did. These creatures inhabit the dark places and are always +ready for an unwary traveler." + +"H'm! I think we had better keep in the light, Jack. We go into a dark +water cave and run across a devil fish. Then we go into the dark woods and +meet with this poison gentleman. Let's go back to the light!" + +"I think we had better," returned Jack. "We are strangers here and the +residents seem to resent our coming. I am sure I'll be glad enough to +leave the place for good." + +It did not seem to be such an easy matter, however, for difficulties beset +them on every side as soon as they started to leave the jungle, as though +there were some malign influence in those gloomy shades which was +endeavoring to hold them captive. + +There were morasses which they had to avoid, there were bramble thickets +which barred their way, and Percival questioned whether Jack was going in +the right direction and asked him to try another. + +"We are going toward the shore, Dick," said Jack, "and if we keep on you +will see that I am right." + +"I don't doubt that we were going that way in the beginning, Jack, but we +were thrown out of our path by the brambles and again by the swamp, not to +mention the snake, and I don't believe we are going that way now. Don't +the trees give you any idea?" + +"Yes, and I am sure we are going toward the water. If we had a bit of +daylight I could convince you, but it is as dark as a pocket here. I never +saw trees grow so thick." + +Jack had his way, for Percival had confidence in him and at length the boy +paused and said: + +"Listen, Dick! There are the parrots again. They won't talk if it is dark +and all we have to do is to follow the sound and we will shortly come out +into the light." + +"I guess you're right," laughed the other. "I know we always used to cover +our bird with a dark cloth when it got to chattering too much, and it +stopped in an instant. But I don't hear them." + +"Listen!" said Jack, pressing forward by the light of his pocket torch. + +"I hear them now," said Percival. "They are using as bad language as ever. +Those are educated parrots, although their education has not been of the +best." + +In a short time they heard the parrots much plainer than before and then +it grew lighter and still lighter till at length they were able to see the +sky overhead through the branches and finally the sun itself, by which +time they were right among the parrots, who were making a tremendous +chattering. + +"Well, we are obliged to you at any rate, even if you are a noisy lot," +laughed Percival. "You frightened us first and then you showed us the way +to the light. Still, are we in the right direction, Jack?" + +"Certainly," and pushing on, Jack led the way into more open ground and in +a short time they came in sight of the inner bay where the vessel lay at +anchor. + +"We are not so far out of our way, Dick," said Jack. "The boat lies just +on the other side of that clump of trees and we can reach it in a few +minutes." + +He proved to be correct and, getting in, the boys rowed back to the yacht, +where they amused and interested a party of their companions by telling of +their adventures. + +"Well, it is certainly not safe to go far away from the vessel," declared +Billy Manners, "and I think if I do I will be sure to take Jack along as a +guide." + +"Not very complimentary to me," said Percival dryly. + +"Oh, you want your own way too much." + +"H'm! if I had had it we would have been lost yet, so I guess you are out +there, William." + +"Well, that only proves what I said in the first place," said Billy with a +chuckle. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +ADVENTURES IN THE WOODS + + +One day not so long afterwards the boys returned to shore, but at a +different place than they had been before, and set out on a walk through +the woods toward the hill, which they had never managed to get to before, +although they had tried it more than once. + +They took the axe along, not knowing but they might want it, and set out +in high spirits. + +Hearing voices ahead of them they pushed on, and soon came across the old +sailor, Ben Bowline, and the acting head cook, Bucephalus, discussing some +knotty point. + +"Ah tell yo' dis am not de way," said the negro in a very positive tone, +"an' any one what has any perspicuity in his haid will tell yo' so." + +"I don't know what that 'ere is, and I don't believe I ever had any, but +it ain't the right road 'cordin' to the course," returned the sailor. "We +sot out nothe-nothe-east, and this here course is due nothe, which ain't +at all proper." + +"Which way yo' wan' to go, Sailorman?" asked Buck. + +"This here way, of course," said Ben, pointing. + +"Huh! an' there ain't no path there, nothin' but briahs an' big rocks an' +swamp. How yo' goin' to get through there? This here way is the right way, +because it am plain to be seen that it am a thoroughfare, and has been +promenaded by pedestrians before now." + +"I don't care what has happened to it, and it may be a good road all the +same, but it ain't the course we sot out on, and so it's the wrong one to +take, and I ain't going to take it." + +At this point Jack, Dick and Jesse W. came along, being much amused at the +arguments offered by the disputants. + +"How are you heading, Ben?" asked Jack in the soberest fashion. + +"Nothe-nothe-east, sir," said the old seaman, saluting. + +"Change your course to north." + +"Aye-aye, sir, north it is," said Ben. + +"And follow in our wake in case you are needed." + +"Aye-aye, sir, follow in your wake it is, yes, sir." + +"You could not have persuaded that grizzled old tar that there was any +course but the one he started on, no matter what the difficulties of his +course were, but give him a new one, and he will take it without the least +question. That's the sailor of it." + +"And they would have stood there arguing till the cows came home," said +Dick. "You settled it in a moment." + +"And if we need them they are there." + +They kept on, now in the open and now in deep shade, having occasionally +to cut their way, pushing on toward the hill, which Jack had determined to +get to the top of, and now and then seeing it when they reached higher and +more open ground. + +They reached the top at length, and had a fine view of the island and of +the sea, but could not see any other islands in the distance. + +"We are on a lost island and no mistake," said Percival. "There is not +another one in sight. I wish I could make out a passage through the reefs, +but there does not seem to be any." + +"We may find one unexpectedly," said Jack. "That often happens. You hunt +and hunt for a thing and don't find it, and then you give up hunting and +the first thing you know you find what you have been looking for without +looking for it." + +"That sounds like a contradiction," laughed Percival, "but I know what you +mean." + +Leaving the hill after getting a good view of the surrounding sea and the +island, the boys took a course which would lead them to the part of the +reefs, which they had not before visited. + +They were pushing on leisurely when they suddenly stopped and listened, +having heard what seemed to be a cry for help. + +"Somebody is in trouble," said Jack. "Where is it, straight ahead?" + +"It sounds like it, and that sounds like the voice of Billy Manners." + +"Maybe he is joking," said young Smith. "He always is." + +Just now came a lusty cry for help in so serious and agonized a tone that +Jack said with a smile: + +"Billy is not joking now, that is certain. He is in real trouble. Come on +and let us see what it is." + +They pushed on rapidly, the call being presently repeated, and at the same +time they heard a bellowing sound, which they could not make out. + +"Come on!" cried Percival. "Billy is in trouble, and that sounds like the +bellow of a wild beast." + +"I should say it was a calf," remarked Jesse W., "if you were to ask me +about it, but what a calf is doing here----" + +He hurried on to keep up with Jack and Dick, Buck and Ben following +quickly, having evidently heard the noises. + +Coming in a short time into an open space the boys paused and then began +to laugh heartily, something they would certainly not have done if Billy +had been in danger. + +There, in the crotch of a little tree about six feet from the ground, was +Billy Manners, while at the foot of the tree was a calf a few months' old +bellowing lustily and evidently calling for food. + +"I told you it was a calf!" laughed young Smith. + +"Help!" roared Billy, seeing the boys. "Here is a wild bull, and I am +treed. Shoot him, boys, drive him away, anything!" + +Instead of doing anything the boys only stood there and laughed, and when +Bucephalus and Ben Bowline came up in great haste they did the same, all +joining in a full-voiced laughing chorus. + +"Why don't you help a fellow?" wailed Billy. "There you all are, laughing +to beat the band, and I can't get down on account of this wild bull at the +foot of the tree." + +"Wild bull nothing!" exclaimed Percival. "It is a three months' old calf, +and you're another, only you are a bit older than that. Can't you tell a +calf when you see one, or have you been brought up in the city where they +don't have them except in the way of veal cutlets?" + +"That a calf?" asked Billy in disgust. "I thought it was a wild bull. He +makes noise enough." + +"Probably calling for its mother," laughed young Smith. "I said it was a +calf right along." + +"Shoo!" said Buck, advancing on the terrible wild bull, which had so +frightened Billy. "Get o't o' dat or Ah cut yo' up fo' de young ge'men's +dinnah. Shoo!" + +The calf let out a tremendous bellow, and scampered off into the woods, +whereat the boys laughed harder than ever till the tears fairly ran down +their cheeks. + +"That's a good one on Billy who is all the time getting off jokes on other +folks," said Percival. "That is too good to keep." + +"Dick Percival," said Billy, laughing in spite of himself, "if you say a +word about it I'll cut you dead." + +"I can't help it," chuckled Dick; "it's too good to keep, and I won't keep +it, no matter what are the consequences. Think of a boy who has spent the +biggest part of his life in the country not knowing the difference between +a little three months' old heifer calf and a wild bull. Billy, my boy, you +have neglected your opportunities." + +Billy got down from the tree, and all hands laughed again, but Jack said +thoughtfully: + +"That was not a wild calf, and the question naturally arises, what is a +domesticated calf doing on a supposedly uninhabited island? If there is a +calf there must be a cow and if a cow, then people who own and take care +of her. There must be people on the island after all, although we have +never seen them." + +"We have not been all over the island," said Percival, "and it is likely +that in the very parts where we have not been we shall find the people who +own the calf." + +"They are probably negroes or halfbreeds," added Jack, "and seldom visit +the shore. Suppose we keep on. We may find a village, or, at any rate, one +or two houses occupied by them. Come on, Billy, you are safer with us in +case we come across another wild bull." + +"Get out!" said Billy, half laughing, half in disgust. "How much will you +take to keep quiet on that subject?" + +"I could not think of making a bargain, Billy," chuckled Jack, "and then I +am afraid it would cost you too much. Remember, there are myself and Dick, +Jesse W. Smith, Bucephalus Johnson and Ben Bowline to be bought off, and +the prices might go up." + +"All right," muttered Billy with a wry face, "but don't rub it in too +much, that's all." + +"All right, I won't, but remember when you feel like playing jokes on the +boys that I may say something about it." + +"All right, but I say, what about it, that calf is not wild?" + +"Not a bit of it, she is just as tame as any barn-yard calf along the +Hudson valley. Calves are the same the world over." + +"And Billy was one not to know it," said Percival with a grin. "Remember, +William, you have not bought me off yet. I have made no promises, and +neither has Jesse W. Smith." + +"Oh, I don't care anything about it," said the smaller boy. "I won't say +anything about it no matter how much Billy jokes, I am interested in the +other matter. If there are tame calves here there must be more or less +civilized people living on the island." + +"Well, we have made two or three very good discoveries on our island," +observed Percival. "We have found treasure, and we have found calves, and +probably inhabitants." + +"And the next thing is to find a way through the reefs," said Jack. + +"If we found the others why should we not find that?" asked Percival. "We +did not expect to find anything, and we have found a lot." + +"But we won't find our way home," said Billy, "if we don't start pretty +soon, for it will be dark in a little while." + +"The funny fellow grows serious once in a while," chuckled Dick, "but I +think he is right for all that." + +"I think we had better be going myself," said Jack. "Ben Bowline?" + +"Sir to you, sir," said the seaman. + +"Steer south, and go on a free wind at four miles." + +"Aye-aye, sir!" said Ben, and they all set out for home, as they called +the yacht. + +"Talkin' about calves," said Ben Bowline as they were walking on in a body +through the woods, "there was another adventure of mine which----" + +"You're a liar!" suddenly interrupted a strident voice speaking in Spanish +and then some bad language in the same tongue followed. + +"Mah goodness, dat am fightin' talk!" exclaimed Bucephalus. "Ah wouldn' +stan' dat, Sailorman." + +"Jus' wait till I get my mudhooks onto him," growled Ben, "an' I'll let +Trim know whether I'll stan' it or not." + +"There are people on the island besides ourselves," muttered young Smith, +getting close to Jack and Dick. "Maybe they own the calf." + +"If you tell them anything about me," sputtered Billy, "I won't speak to +you again in a week." + +Then there was more talk in Spanish and Bucephalus put his hands over his +ears and whistled. + +"Mah wo'd! Ah done hear disreputable language in mah days, but nothin' to +compaiah with that!" he declared emphatically. "It ain't respectable. Ef +Ah meet de fellah wha' talk lak dat Ah's gwan to tell him wha' Ah done +thought ob him." + +There was still more of the talk, and Ben Bowline doubled his fists and +said angrily: + +"It's as bad to be told you're a liar in Spanish as it is in English or +French or Dutch or any other lingo, an' I'm not goin' to take it from +nobody. Just wait till I get hold----" + +Dick and Jack were both laughing heartily now, much to young Smith's +amazement, Billy's surprise and the disgust of Ben Bowline, Bucephalus +looking on and wondering what had come over his "young gentlemen" as he +was accustomed to call them. + +"What are you two fellows laughing at?" asked Billy. + +"I don't see anything funny in it!" sputtered Ben. + +"I think it's awful!" murmured Jesse W. + +"Why, those are not men talking," laughed Dick. + +"They aren't!" exclaimed Billy. + +"Mebby dat am all imagination, sah!" added Bucephalus. + +"What is it if it isn't men!" asked Ben. + +"Parrots!" laughed Jack. "Don't you remember, you fellows, what we told +you happened to us the other day when we were ashore together, Dick and +I?" + +"H'm! and I forgot all about it," chuckled Billy. + +"Oh, that's different!" said J.W., greatly relieved. + +"Parrots?" asked Ben. "Poll parrots? Well, I'll be keelhauled!" + +"Mah we 'd! Ah knowed parrots could talk an' use de mos' obstreperous +vocabulary at dat," declared the negro cook, "but Ah done suspected dat +dey was men, fo' shuah Ah did." + +The parrots, for such indeed they were, as all the party now realized, +continued to talk and scream and chatter, and in a short time the boys and +their companions caught sight of a number of them as they came out into a +more open bit of woods. + +"We were a bit alarmed ourselves, as you may remember," said Jack, "when +we first heard them, and it was some little time before we realized that +they were not men." + +"They have caught the talk of men who have been to the island," added +Percival, "and probably that of men who are here now. That calf is a tame +creature and is probably owned by some one now on the island. The parrots +may have heard them." + +"If that is the sort of talk they heard, the birds were not in very good +company," remarked Billy, "and it is just as well that we did not meet +them this time. In fact, I hope we won't." + +"Well, I'm glad it was only Poll parrots!" grunted Ben, "for I was ready +for a fight." + +"I'm glad myself," echoed Jesse W., greatly relieved, "for I don't want to +get into a fight at all." + +"That accounts for the milk in the cocoanut," laughed Billy. "I wondered +what you two fellows were laughing at. If it had been Dick alone I would +not have thought so much of it, but Jack has more sense." + +"Thank you," said Dick dryly. "I know a tame calf from a wild bull, +however, if I haven't much sense." + +"Come ahead, boys," said Jack. "We must get back to the yacht. If there +are other men on the island besides ourselves we do not want to meet them +just now. They are not a desirable lot, most likely." + +The entire party then pushed on, and in a short time reached the shore, +got their boat and returned to the yacht. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +A STRANGE LIGHT AT SEA + + +The captain and Dr. Wise were very much interested in the report that the +boys brought back from their walk through the woods, and to the top of the +hill in the interior of the island. + +"If there are people here they know how to get out through the reefs," +observed the principal, "for they must have come here once, and no doubt +are in communication with the people outside." + +"They may have lived here all their lives," returned the captain. "I never +saw any one on these islands, natives, I mean, that knew very much. We +can't tell how long they have lived here, they and their ancestors, of +course, and these fellows probably don't know when they came, and don't +suppose there is any other place in the world." + +"H'm! that does not speak for a very high state of intelligence," remarked +the doctor with a grunt. + +"You won't find it in these natives nor even in the half breeds, sir," the +captain returned. "The rating is pretty low. It'll be interesting to see +these people, but I don't think that you will find them very intelligent. +You'd better not expect too much." + +The next day there was nothing to be seen of the wreck, and when Jack and +Percival went to the wooded point to look for the place where they had +descended when they first found it, there was nothing but a great hole +into which the sea poured, and made a great disturbance at every tide. + +"That's the last of that," said Jack. "No one would believe us if we told +them we had gone down there and found a vessel fast in the rocks." + +"But we know we did, for we have the evidences of it, and you are at least +a couple of thousand dollars richer by it. That will help you a lot in +getting your education, my boy, and give your mother something as well." + +"Yes, and she is the first one to be considered," said Jack. + +There had been no answers as yet to the captain's wireless messages, and +that day he sent out another one, this time to the owners of the vessel in +New York, addressing Mr. Smith in particular, thereby hoping to receive +attention. + +Meantime, the boys went on with recitations, wrote descriptions of the +different parts of the island they had seen, took excursions on the bay +and through the woods, and got up little entertainments to pass away the +evenings so that altogether they were kept quite busy, and, as a +consequence, were very well content with their situation, although it was +not just what they had expected when they left home. + +The day after sending out the personal message to Mr. Smith the captain of +the yacht picked up a message which, although not addressed to him, was +the first he had been able to pick up, and was of some interest on that +account if on no other. + +The message was to some government official in Florida, and related to a +certain smuggler who had been defrauding the government by sending +shipments of tobacco without paying the duty thereon. + +"Are on track of Rollins and smuggler crew. Sighted them near Isle of +Pines. Will keep on watch there and in Caribbean." + +Such was the message and the captain, although not especially interested +in Rollins, whoever he might be, was glad to get any information from the +outside world which seemed so far away, although almost at their very +doors. + +He sent a wireless to the sender of the message, and asked if information +of their situation could be sent to the government, and help despatched to +them, hoping by this means to receive some recognition at last. + +"If I get other folks' messages some one will probably get mine," said the +captain, "and by communicating with these people I may finally get +attention. Rollins? Don't remember to have heard of him. There's probably +a gang of them working between our border, Cuba and the South American +ports. Whistling cyclones! they might be working among some of these +little islands. A man who would defraud his government is no better than a +pirate and pirates used to hang around these waters a lot. It isn't such +an unlikely thing that these new pirates should do it now." + +The next day quite unexpectedly the captain got a call and at once sent +for the doctor and said: + +"I've had word at last. From our owners. From Mr. Smith himself. He has +just heard from us, and is going to send out a vessel to get us away from +here. It seems that one of our smaller vessels, a steamer, has been +captured by some smugglers working around Cuba, Porto Rico and the +neighborhood, who are using it in their trade. Some of the men got away, +and took the news to Havana. The name of the vessel is a good deal like +our own, and Smith thought that we had been taken at first, and began a +lot of investigating. Then he got our messages, which had been held up by +some one else, thinking they were fakes, or some boys' play. These young +wireless operators make a lot of trouble now and then." + +"Well, as long as we know that help is being sent to us we can feel +relieved," said the doctor. "That is something, at any rate, but----" + +"But you don't think that it will do any good, Doctor?" + +"Well, if you cannot get out how is any one else going to get in?" the +doctor asked, as if merely seeking for information, and not being +especially interested in the matter. + +"There's something in that, sir," replied Captain Storms musingly, "but +we'll see how it turns out when they get here. At any rate we are not +forgotten altogether, and that is something." + +The boys were told about the message, and were greatly interested, Jesse +W. saying to Jack: + +"Now I'll have a chance to speak to father about you, Jack, and to tell +him what you have done for me. He has always been interested in you, and +now he will be all the more so." + +"Never mind doing too much for me, J.W., or you will spoil me altogether," +laughed Jack, who, nevertheless, felt grateful to the younger boy for his +interest. "We Hilltop boys should help each other, and so I don't deserve +any extra credit for simply doing what is expected of me. It is only the +big brother idea which is gaining ground every day, and is a good thing +both for the little brothers and the big ones." + +That night as Jack Sheldon lay asleep in his berth in the cabin set off +for the Hilltop boys, he was suddenly awakened by a bright light flashing +in his face, there being a porthole opposite. + +"That's odd!" he murmured, as he sat up and looked around. "Where does +that light come from? Or did I only imagine it?" + +At that moment the light flashed in his face again, and he got out of his +berth and went over to the porthole, looking out to see where the light +could have come from, there being only water on that side. + +The yacht had changed her position, and was now in sight of the outer bay, +and having changed the direction of her head on account of the tide, the +boy could now look out upon the bay, which he had not been able to do at +the time he went to bed. + +He saw the flash again, and in a moment realized that some one out there, +probably beyond the reefs, was using a regular code of signals, a thing he +had himself done with his pocket electric light. + +Having had this experience he was familiar with the code, and at once +began to read the message sent by those outside, whoever they might be. + +"That cannot be the steamer Mr. Smith has sent," he mused. "No, of course +not. 'Where are you? Am dodging government vessel.' Why, that must be one +of the smugglers that the captain told us about. But where is the man he +is signaling? I wish I could tell that." + +The signals ceased, but presently the lights flashed again, and Jack read +the message: + +"Why don't you answer? Am waiting." + +"My word! I believe the fellow takes our lights for the smuggler's, and +thinks that he is in here. It would be just the place for him. By Jove! I +have a mind to answer him myself, and get him in here. Then we could get +out. Even if a smuggler takes us out that is better than waiting." + +His pocket flash was in a convenient place, and he quickly got it out and +flashed out through the port: + +"In the bay. Come inside." + +After sending this message he waited a few minutes, and then saw the reply +being flashed to him: + +"Cannot. Don't know the passage. Come out" + +"H'm! that's too bad," muttered Jack. "I was in hope I could get him in +here. I'd like to know--I guess I'd better see the captain." + +Partly dressing himself he hurried on deck, and looked for the light, but +could see nothing. + +An anchor watch was kept, or supposed to be at least, but Jack saw the man +on deck fast asleep on a bench against the house on deck instead of +keeping a lookout as he was supposed to do. + +He could not see any vessel's light out at sea, and saw no more flashes, +although he looked for them for several minutes. + +"Well, I can't go to waking the captain in the middle of the night," he +said, "and it is likely this fellow has gone. It is simply another +disappointment. I think I'll go to bed." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE MAN WITH THE WHITE MUSTACHE + + +In the morning Jack told the captain, Dr. Wise, and a few of his most +intimate friends among the boys under the promise of keeping it quiet, the +strange event of the previous night, asking the doctor if he had done +right in not calling the captain. + +"If you had aroused me I would probably have been mad," chuckled the +captain, "and could not have done anything anyhow. It is clear that there +is a way in here, although we don't know it, and that this fellow you saw +signaling mistook our lights for those of one of his evil associates. I'd +like to watch him, but there is no use in crying over spilled milk, and +you did all right in not calling me." + +"It is all very singular," said the doctor, knitting his brows. "Of course +we would like to get out of here, but as to seeking the assistance of a +smuggler----" + +"I'd as soon go out under his escort as that of any one else," laughed +Storms, "although we might get in trouble afterward if a government vessel +happened to see us in company with smugglers. Well, I guess it won't be +long now before the relief steamer comes, but----" + +"But they may not know the way in, and we are as badly off as before," +finished the doctor. "I don't see that we have advanced any, except, +perhaps, to let people know where we are." + +"And you think there is little satisfaction in that?" with a grin. "We +might be worse off, however, so I guess we had better wait and trust to +good luck. Clever game, that of Jack's, wasn't it, stealing the fellow's +despatches?" + +"Why, yes, clever in a way," admitted the doctor, glaring at the captain +through his big black-rimmed glasses, "but does it not savor somewhat +of--h'm--of deception? Pretending to be one person when he was another, +and quite a different one, by the way?" + +"But he did not pretend to be anybody. He simply flashed a message, and if +that fellow outside took him for another person it was not Mr. Sheldon's +fault. All is fair in love and war, you know." + +"H'm! so I have heard, but as I have been in neither I cannot say whether +it is so or not. However, I am not accusing you, Sheldon, you understand? +I suppose, under the circumstances, that what you did was perfectly +justifiable. At any rate, we shall not have to wait for this person to +come and take us out. But where was the person to whom he was sending +signals? You did not see him, Captain?" + +"No, indeed, and I wonder that my man on deck did not see them. Asleep, +I'll warrant. That means loss of shore liberty to him for some time. The +other fellow was not here, of course. How could he get in?" + +"I believe there is a way, sir," spoke up Jack, "and that this place is +used as a retreat for smugglers. If not just here, then some part of the +island. How about the calf we saw? I thought at the time that there were +people here, but did not think of smugglers." + +"Why, I guess you've been reading about Captain Kidd and Blackbeard and +those old pirates, and have got your head full of secret lairs and all +that sort of stuff." + +"Oh, no," smiled Jack in reply, "but evil men hide in woods and mountains +and all sorts of odd places as much now as they did in the old days. There +is just as much of this in modern times as there was in the old, but it is +accompanied with greater danger." + +"Yes, I reckon it is. At any rate, I'd like to get hold of these rascals. +There'll be a pretty big reward for them, I fancy." + +The boys left the cabin and during the afternoon Jack, Dick and young +Smith set out for a stroll over the island, taking one of the paths +already made, so as not to subject the younger boy to too much trouble. + +"I hardly think these smugglers are on the island," said Jack, as they +walked on, "or, at least, I don't think that they got in through the +reefs. They could have landed on the other side, although there are many +difficulties connected with it, not to say dangers. You remember the +rocks, Dick? And there is a good deal of surf there also. One would need +to be careful in making it. A vessel could lie to, of course, while boats +landed the men, and that has probably been done." + +"Yes, I suppose so," said Percival carelessly, thinking of other things at +the moment, and not paying much attention. + +The boys walked on without paying much attention to where they were going, +young Smith being greatly pleased at being with the older boys, but at +length Jack stopped, looked around him, and said with the least bit of +alarm in his tone: + +"H'm! I believe we are where Billy was treed by the calf the other day or +pretty near it, at any rate. We thought there might be people in the +neighborhood, but we did not see them." + +"I suppose it might be as well to go back," said Percival. "It would not +be pleasant to run across a lot of half-civilized natives to say nothing +of smugglers." + +"No, it would not," and at that instant there was a rustling in the bushes +not far away, and two men stepped out, the singular appearance of one of +them causing Jack to turn suddenly pale. + +This man was of good height and build and evidently quite strong, and was, +besides, a person of superior intellect if not of the best tendencies, as +his face indicated, but what attracted most attention was the fact that +while his mustache was snowy white his hair and eyebrows were quite dark, +this making him noticeable in a moment. + +"You here, George----" + +"Rollins," said the other, evidently thinking that Jack was about to +pronounce another name, which was the fact. "Yes, I am here. It is safer +than back in New York state or any of the states, in fact. May I ask what +you are doing in this part of the world! I am as much surprised to see you +here as you are to see me," and the man made a sudden quick signal with +his left hand. + +Jack heard a rustle behind him, and turned quickly, but not soon enough to +escape the quick rush of three big, strong, bearded men who sprang upon +him and his companions and held them fast. + +"What does this mean, George--Rollins?" asked Jack, hesitating at +pronouncing the name, "Who are these men!" + +"Friends of mine," laughed the man with the white mustache. "Business +partners I might say." + +"The majority of your business partners get in jail or are shot by the +police, Mr. Rollins," said Jack. "Are these the same sort? What business +are you in now?" and then a look of intelligence shot across the boy's +face, as he remembered that Rollins was the name of the smuggler he had +but recently heard mentioned. + +The other saw this look, and said with an evil glance: + +"I think you have heard the name before. What are you doing here? You are +in the government service, you and your boy friends? What is this uniform +you wear?" + +"That of the students of the Hilltop Academy. You knew that I was one of +them, for on the occasion of our last meeting----" + +"I say, Jack," said Percival suddenly, "this is the man who was concerned +in the robbery of the Riverton Bank, your----" and the boy suddenly +paused, a deep flush on his face. + +"His father, you were going to say," laughed the other, an evil look +crossing his countenance. "Yes, you are quite right, I am----" + +"You are not!" cried Jack hotly. "You married my mother a year or so after +my own father's death, and made her life miserable, but that does not make +you my father, and you well know that I have never admitted your claim. No +court would admit it. Courts? You take good care to keep away from all of +them, Mr. Rollins, as you choose to call yourself." + +"Take them away," said the man with the white mustache. "Let no harm come +to them. I don't understand why they are on the island, but it would be +awkward if any of their friends should know of our presence here. Don't +let them get away, but don't hurt them." + +The men were much stronger than the boys, and Jack saw the futility of a +struggle during which the younger boy might be hurt, and he, therefore, +submitted to being led away, hoping to escape at some later time. + +The boys were led some little distance to a little opening where they saw +a number of small crudely built houses, several dark-skinned men, who were +neither Indians nor negroes, but perhaps a combination of both, and a +number of domesticated animals, calves, pigs, a sheep and several fowls. + +There were people on the island, therefore, as they had supposed, and +these men visited the place on occasion as in the present instance. + +There was a strongly built house somewhat larger than the rest on one side +of the little village, and here the three boys were taken and locked in a +small square room with one window, this being small and protected with an +iron bar, evidently to make it safer, Jack noticing several cases in one +corner opposite the window. + +"Make yourselves comfortable, young gentlemen," laughed Rollins, as he +called himself. "You will be set free, but not at present," and with that +he went away, and the door was stoutly locked. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +JESSE W. IS SENT FOR HELP + + +All was quiet in a few minutes after the man with the white mustache had +left the boys in the room with the barred windows, and presently Percival +said, half apologetically, but with the greatest kindness: + +"You know I did not mean to call that man any relation of yours, Jack, but +the sudden recollection of the last time you met him when I did not see +him at all made me blurt out suddenly. I did stop, though." + +Jack had come unexpectedly upon his stepfather during his first term at +the Academy, several months previous, the man at that time being concerned +in the robbery of a bank near the Academy, but escaping capture and +suddenly disappearing, Jack had hoped, forever. + +He felt nervous and discouraged now that the man had again come into his +life, and he sat in a corner of the room on a chest and thought deeply, +Percival presently saying to him in cheery tones: + +"Brace up, Jack. It is not like you to give way to despondency. What are +we going to do? We can't stay here even if that fellow with the white +mustache has given orders that we are not to be harmed." + +"I tell you what," whispered young Smith. "That window is small, but not +too small to put me through. You have done that before, you know. If you +can get that bar loose it will be easy enough to put me out, and then I +will go straight to the vessel and get the captain, old Ben Bowline, and a +lot of sailors to come and get you out." + +"You know the way, do you, Jesse W., you won't get lost!" asked Percival, +catching at the idea. "You are a plucky little fellow, but I don't want +you to take any risks." + +"They are nothing but what I can take easy enough," answered the other +quickly. "Don't you suppose I would do anything for Jack? And for you, +too. You have both done a lot for me, and this isn't much. You get me +through the window, and I'll do the rest." + +Jack arose quietly, crossed the room, took hold of the iron bar put across +the window and tested it. + +"I believe we could pull it loose, Dick," he said in a low tone, not +knowing if there were any one outside who might hear him. "It is only +driven into the frame, and I believe we could pull out frame and all." + +"Let me look at it," said Percival, and, taking hold of the bar, he +suddenly swelled up his muscles, gave it a quick, sharp wrench, and had it +out with a part of the frame as well. + +"H'h! great protection that was!" he laughed. "I suppose they thought the +window was too small for any one to get through, and it is for most folks, +but Jesse W. is only half size and we can put him through all right." + +"And I'll put through the other part," said the younger boy. "I am glad I +can do something for you two, for you have both of you done a lot for me +at one time or another." + +"But see here, J.W., do you understand that there is considerable danger +in getting away?" asked Jack in a serious tone. "These fellows may be +watching, and they would handle you roughly if they caught you. And then +it is dark going through the woods, for the moon does not rise till pretty +late, and you might fall down some----" + +"And I might not!" interrupted the other in a decided tone. "I have a +pocket light with me. I always carry one now, whether I think I am going +to need it or not, and I can find my way easy enough. Besides, I have a +pocket compass as well, and I know which way the vessel lies, and I am +going to get you boys out of here and that's all there is to it!" + +"All right!" and Jack smiled at the smaller boy's determination. "But I +wouldn't let you go if I didn't think you had the pluck to carry it out, +and that the only difficulties are at the outset. Listen at the door, +Dick, and I'll see how the land lies in this direction," and Jack pulled +the chest to the window and looked out. + +He could not see very far, but he saw that there were no huts on that +side, and that it was not far to the woods, and calculated that the boy +could get to them without being observed. + +"All right, J.W., the coast is clear," he said. "You are sure you know the +way and the general direction? What is it, in fact?" + +"About south, and I will get in sight of the water as soon as I can. It +will not be dark for some little time yet, and I ought to get to the yacht +before sunset or a little after at any rate." + +"Very good. Keep in the open as much as you can after you get away from +here, and don't run too fast." + +"All right. Are you ready?" and the boy stood on the chest beside Jack, +looking up into the latter's face with such an air of determination that +he laughed and said: + +"Yes, I'm ready, up with you!" and Jack lifted the little fellow to the +window level, and put him through, Percival saying in a low tone: + +"It's all right. I don't hear a sound. I imagine they are all away +somewhere, for I can neither see nor hear anything." + +"Out you go!" said Jack, dropping the boy to the ground, and looking out +to see that he was all right. "Now then, cut!" + +He watched the boy till he disappeared in the woods, and then as he +neither saw any one nor heard anything of an alarming nature, he said in a +tone of great relief: + +"He is all right, and I believe he will get there without trouble. I had +an idea he would, or I would not have let him go." + +"There he is, only half a boy, you might say," said Percival, "but ready +to undertake anything for us, no matter how dangerous and there are those +big overgrown bullies, Herring and Merritt, who would go all to bits if +they had the half of this to do. I tell you, Jesse W. Smith is worth both +of them in a lump, and with considerable on his side of the ledger after +that, Jack." + +"Yes, so he is," agreed Jack. + +"And now we will simply have to wait, I suppose?" + +"I don't see anything else. The window is too small for us and the door +seems to be very strong and heavy, and securely locked. No, I considered +these points before I let the boy go." + +"But suppose our man with the white mustache should return and miss him?" +asked Percival. + +"Well, we will put the bar back in its place, put the chest in the corner, +and place our coats in a neat pile over there where it is darkest. There +are things that we can put under them, and there is the boy fast asleep +after his tramp through the woods." + +"A good idea, Jack! You are full of resources. Now I would never have +thought of a way out of the trouble, but only of the trouble itself." + +They replaced the bar so that no one would know by a casual glance that it +had been tampered with, put the chest back where they had taken it from, +and, gathering up a few loose articles from the floor, made a bundle of +them and spread their coats over it. + +"A mere reference to the boy being asleep will be enough," said Jack. "The +look of the thing is enough to carry out the idea, and they will accept it +without question." + +"To be sure, and in the meantime the plucky young fellow is hustling to +get back to the vessel and bring us help." + +Having settled all this the boys sat down and waited, now and then +conversing, and occasionally listening for any sound that would denote the +return of the so-called Rollins and the men with him. + +It was getting on toward sunset when Jack heard Rollins and another man +talking outside, although he could not see them when he went to the little +window and looked out. + +"You say there is a vessel in the bay?" + +"Yes, inside the reefs." + +"Government vessel?" + +"No, private yacht, the one these boys belong on. It's a school on a +vacation or tour or something." + +"Do they know the way through the reefs!" + +"I guess not. They were washed in the other night when there was a cyclone +or tidal wave." + +"They did not come here after us?" + +"No, they didn't know anything about us. They have been here for some +time, a week I guess, and can't get out." + +"H'm! let them stay here then!" growled the man with the white mustache. +"They can't bother us any. If they don't know the way out, which very few +do, they'll have to stay here for all I can see." + +"But suppose we want to get in on that side ourselves?" + +"They could not make us any trouble. We don't want to get in there at this +time, although it is a better hiding place than this." + +"Then you're going to let them stay there?" + +"Certainly. They can't do us any harm. After we get away with our cargo we +don't care what happens to them." + +The men went away or stopped talking, at any rate, and Jack did not hear +any further conversation between them. + +"They will probably let us out as soon as they are ready to go," he said +to Percival, "but we don't want to stay here till they get ready to let us +out, and then there is just a chance that they may forget us altogether. +It was just as well that we sent Jesse W. off on his errand." + +"I think so myself, and I don't doubt that he will carry it out." + +"If Rollins knows the way out through the reefs," said Jack presently, "we +might either force or persuade him to pilot us out. If we should capture +him we might force him to do it. Otherwise, I might persuade him to do it +on consideration of allowing him to escape after we were perfectly safe +outside. Very few know of the way out, and it is not likely that the +vessel which they are sending to our relief will have any good pilot for +these waters on board." + +"You don't know positively that this man knows the passage!" + +"No, I do not, but he does know some one who does, to judge by his talk, +and if he cannot be bargained with perhaps the other man can. I am averse +to having anything to do with the man, as you can readily understand, but +I do not want to see the whole Hilltop Academy kept prisoners here for an +indefinite time." + +When it began to grow dark one of the men who had brought them to the +place came in with some food and a bottle of wine, and said, as he put it +on a chest: + +"There's something for you to eat. Other boy asleep, h'm? Well, there is +all the more for you then." + +Then the man went away, never noticing the little bit of deception which +the boys had practised, locking the door after him. + +"The things to eat are all right," said Jack, after the man had gone, "but +we would better not touch the wine. I never do, anyhow. This is likely to +be drugged to make us sleep, so that we will give no trouble." + +"I don't want it anyhow," said Dick. + +The boys ate a supper, and then, as it grew dark, sat and waited for some +sign of their friends, and at last when it was quite dark hearing a +peculiar whistle somewhere outside. + +"That's the Hilltop signal!" whispered Percival "Aid is at hand!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +BEN'S STRANGE STORY + + +Jack jumped upon the chest, which he quickly dragged to the little window, +and answered the signal, one generally used by the Hilltop boys when they +wished to communicate with each other at a distance. + +In a moment it was answered, and then young Smith ran up under the window, +and said eagerly: + +"You are all right, boys, you are there still, and safe!" + +"Yes," answered Jack. "Who is there?" + +"Some of the boys, Ben Bowline, the captain and Buck, all ready for a +fight if necessary." + +"All right. I don't think you will need to make one." + +Percival was at the door now, and in a moment he heard the outer one fall +in with a crash, and then came the rush of many feet. + +There were shouts outside, but these were drowned by the yells of the +boys, and of the old sailor. + +"Are yo' dere, sah?" the boys heard Bucephalus say in a few moments, just +outside the door. + +"Yes, but we are locked in." + +"Nevah min' dat, jus' lemme get mah head at it an' Ah'll break it down in +a hurry, sah." + +"Here, stop that!" roared Ben Bowline. "You'll crack yer skull!" + +"No, sah, Ah's used to dem things!" guffawed Bucephalus. + +"Don't you know that his name means 'ox-headed,' Ben?" cried Percival with +a laugh. "Why, he could split a two-inch plank with that head of his. Let +him do it, but first wait till I get out of the way." + +It was not necessary for Bucephalus to butt the door down, however, as one +of the men with Rollins had been captured, and was forced to open the door +with his key. + +It was the same man who had brought them food and wine, and at the sight +of the boys, for lights had been brought, he exclaimed: + +"Guess you boys didn't drink anything?" + +"No, we did not," said Percival. "Won't you have it your self?" + +"Huh! I think not. But where's the little fellow? The one that was asleep +when I come in." + +"Here I am!" piped up Jesse W. himself, "and you'll find that I am pretty +wide awake." + +The boys picked up their coats, and put them on, and the man muttered, his +eyes opening wider every moment: + +"Huh! that was a neat trick! Then the boy was not there at all?" + +"No, he was on his way for help," said Jack. "Never judge too much by +appearances. Still, I am glad you did this time." + +The boys and their friends now left the house, the man being taken a short +distance to prevent his giving the alarm, although the natives had already +scattered in many directions at the coming of Ben, Buck and the boys. + +"Young Smith got to us all right," said Harry to Jack and Dick, "and we +set out without delay. You must have had quite an adventure." + +"So we did, and it might have been worse. Rollins is on this part of the +island, sir," to the captain. "He got in yesterday or to-day, I am not +sure which. I do not believe he has seen the man who was signaling to him +last night, and I do not think he knows anything about him. He does know +that government vessels are on the watch for him, however, and I think he +will shortly get away from here." + +"I wish we could get word to them so as to stop him," growled the captain. +"These smugglers give honest traders a bad reputation, for folks think we +are all alike." + +A considerable number of the Hilltop boys had come to the rescue of the +two boys, and these were now carried on the shoulders of the others, and a +triumphal march back to the vessel was begun, young Smith being taken up +as well as Jack and Dick, the boys saying that he had traveled enough for +one day and that he needed a rest. + +Many of the boys had pocket lights with them, and others cut pine branches +and made torches of them so that there was light enough to show them the +way, and it was not necessary to wait for the moon to rise. + +The boys sang and shouted, and made a lot of noise on the way back so that +if the smugglers or any of the natives had had any idea of attacking them +they would have been deterred by the very din. + +They reached the shore at length, and were taken on board the yacht, +Bucephalus presently announcing that supper was ready, the boys having the +best of appetites for it, and making it a feast in honor of Jack, Dick and +young Jesse W., who was considered as much a hero as his older +schoolmates, and was certainly regarded so by them. + +Not all the boys had gone over to the other side, some staying away on +account of the fatigue of the journey and others, noticeably Herring and +his cronies, because they were either not asked or would not have gone if +they had been. + +It was a feast in honor of the three boys, nevertheless, and those who +were not ready to join in praise of the heroes were wise enough to keep +quiet and not to make any dissent. + +After supper Jack and a few of the boys discussed the situation, and tried +to calculate how long it would take the vessel which Mr. Smith had sent +out to reach them. + +"If we knew that, we would know how long we would have to wait," observed +Arthur. "Some vessels are faster than others." + +"It would take at least three or four days," said Jack, "and if he has +sent a fast vessel and given directions to make all speed they might be +here in less time. Then they must pick up a pilot who would be likely to +know these seas, and who is used to making difficult passages. Any +ordinary pilot would not do. He should have a special one." + +"And he cannot tell just what is required till he gets here, and, perhaps, +would have to hunt one up, and there is more lost time," said Harry +dolefully. "It's a pity we are wasting so much time." + +"Yes, but I don't see how we are going to help ourselves." + +"No, perhaps not." + +Late that night Jack was awakened as he lay asleep in his berth, not by a +flash, as before, but by hearing some one say, as he went by the door: + +"It can't be, it's too much like the flying Dutchman." + +"That's what I say, but all the same I was sure I saw one come in through +the reefs." + +"You didn't see any lights?" + +"No, but I could make out her masts and rigging." + +The two men went on, and Jack heard no more. + +"There has some vessel come in through the reefs," he said to himself as +he sat up in bed. "I must try to find them to-morrow. I have always said +that I thought it possible for a vessel to get through if one knew the +passage, and this shows that it has been done. No wonder these men thought +it was a phantom ship." + +Partially dressing himself he went on deck, and looked around him. + +He could see nothing, and he hardly expected to do so, but had yielded to +impulse and had come on deck. + +Ben Bowline presently came up, looked at him, touched his grizzled +forelock, and said: + +"Sir to you. Come up to get the air?" + +"Yes," Jack answered shortly. + +"Kind of a pretty night, don't you think, sir!" the old sailor said after +a pause during which he stood balancing himself first on one foot and then +on the other. + +"Yes, it is a fine starlight night. The moon ought to be coming up soon, +and then we can see things better." + +"Yes, so we can. Was you looking for anything particular, sir?" in a +mysterious tone. + +"How about that vessel, Ben?" asked Jack in a low tone. "Are you sure you +saw her? What was she, the long, low, rakish craft we read of in old +stories or a saucy steam yacht with tremendous speed?" + +"Sh! the old man might hear us," cautioned Ben Bowline. "Do you know I +don't want to think it were the Flying Dutchman 'cause it's plumb bad luck +to see her, but how is a live ship going to get in here?" + +"Easy enough, if she knows the way, Ben. Don't say anything about it, but +are you sure you saw something?" + +"Well, I dunno, but I think I did. She was out yonder, just where you can +see the open water, and she was only there half a jiffy, as you might say. +Tom saw her, too, or I would have thought I was dreaming." + +"Steamer, Ben?" asked Jack, sure now that there was something in the old +fellow's story. + +"Reckon she was, though I did see something white, which gave me a creepy +feeling like as if I'd seen a apparition or something similar. Maybe she +had sail on to help her steam. Some of 'em do." + +"And you saw her for a short time only!" + +"Yes, sir, not half a minute nor half that even. There wasn't time to say +'Jack Robinson' twice, sir, before she was out of sight." + +"Well, if she came in she can get out, and so can we, Ben. Keep this quiet +till I speak to the captain about it. It will be just as well not to have +every one know it, and have it talked about all over the vessel." + +"Shouldn't wonder if it would, sir," and as Jack walked away the old +sailor continued his own passage up and down the deck. + +"There are probably places to hide that we have not seen," thought the +boy, as he took a turn of the deck, and then started to go below, "and we +may not be able to see this vessel in the morning. I shall have a look for +her, nevertheless. If there is to be a bargain made and I don't see why +there should not be, unless we trade directly with lawbreakers and assist +them. That we could not do, of course, but if we hire a pilot we are not +supposed to know whether he is honest or not." + +The question was a puzzling one, and Jack had not solved it when he went +below, turned in and quickly fell asleep. + +In the morning, nothing having been seen of any strange vessel from the +deck of the yacht, Jack told Percival quietly what he had heard, and after +breakfast they went ashore and set out for a search for the stranger. + +"If she is here," Jack said, "she is one of the smugglers, and will not +want to be seen. If we can find her it may mean that we can get out of our +strange prison." + +"How are we going to find her, Jack? There are probably plenty of hiding +places about here that we don't dream of." + +"I know it, Dick, but we must find them if we want to leave here. I do not +think that Smith will be able to get us out, and if we can do it +ourselves, so much the better." + +"Yes, and all the more credit to us, Jack." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +DISCOVERIES AND DISAPPOINTMENTS + + +The boys landed at the point where they had first gone ashore, well up in +the bay, as that would give them less walking, and pushed toward the +north, keeping as near to the shore as they could in the hope of being +thus better able to see the hidden smuggler in case she was still at the +island. + +Making their way over rough ground, they at length came to an opening in +the rocks which was quite high enough for them to enter, and Jack said in +an eager tone: + +"It is possible we may find something here, Dick. This seems to be a cave, +and smugglers and men of that sort make such places convenient." + +"It looks rather dark, Jack," murmured Percival. "We had a pretty gruesome +experience in a dark cave when we first came to the island and I don't +want to repeat it." + +"You won't find any devil fish in there, Dick," said Jack reassuringly. +"Besides, we have our flashes with us and are armed as well, and if we do +find anything uncanny we can put up a good fight, I imagine." + +"That's all right, Jack, but once I have an experience of that sort I am a +little shy at venturing into a place anything like it. The mere look of +this cave made me think of the other." + +"But there is no water here and it may be only a hole in the rocks after +all. Then it may lead to some retreat of these smuggler folk, and if it +does, so much the better." + +"All right, Jack, I am with you," said Percival, and the boys entered the +hole in the rocks, as Jack called it. + +It was more than that, as they presently discovered, for they found that +it extended much farther than they thought, and Jack, turning on his +pocket flash when there began to be less and less light to guide them, saw +that the passage went on for some distance. + +It was high enough for them to walk upright and wide enough for three or +four persons to walk abreast, there being a few turns, but none sharp +enough to cut off the view ahead for some distance. + +"Well, we won't get under water as we did in the other place, Jack," +observed Percival as they walked on, meeting the first sharp turn and +being now unable to see behind them, "for we are going toward the interior +of the island and not toward the sea." + +"No, and there will be no one to tumble down rocks upon us and shut us in, +or think they did, as happened before. In fact, the place seems to be +decidedly uninteresting, Dick." + +"Nothing has happened so far, if that is what you mean," laughed the +other, "but you never can tell." + +They made one or two more sharp turns and at length came to an opening of +greater magnitude where they could see three or four passages leading in +different directions, some very narrow and one wide enough for them to +walk side by side. + +"Which one shall we take, Jack?" asked Percival. "The place begins to grow +interesting now that we have several routes to choose from. Does it look +as if men had been here? Do you see any smudges on the walls or any +footprints in the dust? Is this just an accident, or has it been cut out +and made of use for a hiding place?" + +"No, there are no smudges which might have been made by torches, Dick, and +I don't see any footprints except our own. I don't believe any one has +been in here for years." + +"Then you think that there may have been some one here at some time, Jack? +It has been used?" + +"Yes, for it has not the looks of a natural cavern which has not yet been +discovered. It has been cleaned up to a certain extent. Still, I do not +think that the particular gang of malefactors we are looking for has ever +occupied it." + +"Then there is not much use in our going any farther, Jack?" + +"No, not if we want to find Rollins and the rest." + +"Suppose we take the widest passage, Jack!" + +"Very well. Come ahead." + +They went on for twenty feet, when the floor of the passage began to take +a sudden decline which increased at every step. + +"Hold on, Dick," said Jack, holding his light low and flashing it along +the rough floor. "This thing may take a sudden drop and----" + +"So it does!" gasped Percival, lying at full length on the floor and +crawling carefully forward a pace or two. "It takes a drop for fair. It is +a lucky thing you noticed it." + +"Then we may as well go back, for I don't care to take a drop I don't know +how deep." + +"I'll see," muttered Percival, picking up a loose stone as big as his fist +and tossing it ahead of him. + +Not until several seconds had passed did the boys hear the sound of the +stone falling into water, and Percival said with a sigh of relief: + +"Well, we didn't go that way, at any rate. Come on, Jack, there is nothing +to be seen in that direction." + +The boys returned to the place where the passages diverged, and Percival +suggested that they take one of the narrower paths and follow it for a +time. + +"All right," laughed Jack, "but I don't believe we shall find any more +than we have already found. In fact, I don't believe the smugglers know of +this place at all and we won't find out anything." + +However, they proceeded down the narrow path till they suddenly found +themselves at the end, where the place widened into a chamber about ten +feet square, and here they saw a sight which made Percival tremble. + +It was a pile of human skeletons reaching nearly to the roof of the vault +and thrown promiscuously about like so much rubbish. + +"I say, I've got enough of this!" gasped the young fellow. "Let's get out +of this, Jack, before we find anything worse. First the bottomless pit and +then a charnel house. I am satisfied!" + +"It is not a very pleasant sight," said Jack musingly, "but they cannot do +us any harm. They have probably been here for years." + +The boys returned to the chamber they had left and then went back along +the way they had come without seeking to explore any other passages. + +Getting out into the light at last, they proceeded with their search for +the smugglers, resolving not to enter any more mysterious caves, but to +look for places where a vessel might be able to hide. + +"There must be a lot of coves along here," said Jack, "that we have not +been able to find on account of the difficulty of making one's way along +the rocks, but now we are looking for them we don't mind doing a lot of +scrambling." + +"No, we are used to that, and, besides, we are alone, and haven't young +Smith with us. I suppose he would have been delighted to come, for he +likes being with us, but it would have been too much of a task for him." + +"And yet he would not have complained, Dick. He is a plucky little chap. +Just think of his going into the cabin of the wreck, up to his knees in +the water, to get that bag of gold just because he said he would." + +"Yes, it was a nervy thing to do, and there are bigger boys in the Academy +who would not have done it. But I say, Jack, it is getting pretty rough +along here. I am afraid we may have to change our route." + +They had come upon a mass of high rocks over which it was well nigh +impossible to make their way, and Jack stopped, looked around him and +said: + +"It seems a pretty tough job, Dick. Suppose you give me a boost, however, +and let me see if I can get to the top of this one. I am lighter than you, +and perhaps I can make it." + +"All right, Jack, just as you say," and Dick bent his back so that his +companion could get upon his shoulders, and then straightened up slowly, +Jack holding on by some of the projections in the rock and going up with +him, being able to reach a bit higher when Percival was at his full height +and saying, with some satisfaction: + +"That is fine, Dick. I should reach the top now. Catch me if I come +tumbling down, however." + +"I don't think you will, Jack. You are a regular cat to keep your feet, +and I guess you are all right." + +Clinging with toes and fingers to the rock and going up inch by inch, Jack +at length reached a point whence it was easier climbing, and here he +advanced more rapidly than before, Percival watching him closely, and +standing ready to catch him in case he happened to lose his footing. + +Jack did not, however, and at last, as he reached the top of the rock, +threw himself forward and found himself on a flat, but somewhat rough +surface a few yards in extent with higher rocks on one side, but nothing +in front of him. + +Beyond, at some little distance, there were other rocks, but he judged +that if he went to the edge of the rock to which he had climbed he might +see something, and he, therefore, crept along cautiously for fear of being +seen, until he reached the edge. + +Here he looked over and saw that there was water below him, quite a good +sized cove, in fact, which ran up from the shore to a considerable +distance, apparently, but had a turn a few rods farther up in shore. + +Looking the other way Jack could see the bay in which they lay, and said +to himself: + +"That is the way they could come, but now let us see if they did, and if +there is room beyond for a vessel of any size to pass." + +The higher mass of rock on his left prevented his going much farther, +however, and he was thinking that he might be obliged to climb to the top +of this, being unable to get around it, when he heard a suspicious sound +below him, and lay flat on his face, peering cautiously over the edge. + +There were some bushes and coarse grass here and these hid him somewhat +from observation, while they did not prevent his seeing anything going on +below. + +The sound he had heard was the splash of oars and the hum of voices, and +in a few moments he saw a boat containing two men appear around a corner +of the higher rock, which descended sheer to the water's edge, and make +its way slowly toward the open bay. + +"I tell you there is one, Davis," Jack heard one of the men say, +recognizing the voice as that of the man with the white mustache, as he +always thought of him, and not as his stepfather. + +In fact, he had long since repudiated any relationship whatever with the +man, and regarded him as a stranger who had come into his life without any +wish of his own, and whom he would willingly put out of it, and be +satisfied never to see or hear of again. + +"But weren't you in here the other night when I signaled?" asked the other +man, who was rowing. "You answered and told me to come in." + +"Me?" with a laugh. "I tell you I was not. I don't know the way in any +more than you, though I know that there is one." + +"But I saw lights, and I got flashes from some one on deck, in the regular +code, too." + +"They were from the deck of this yacht I told you of, and I will show her +to you if you are patient. Go easy, though, for we may come in sight of +her at any moment." + +"But how about the signals I got? How could any one know I was out there, +and how would they know the code?" + +"They got you by accident, perhaps, and then were smart enough to take +your signals and answer them. I know a boy who is clever enough for that. +He is on the yacht, too. She has a lot of schoolboys who are on a trip to +these seas. They were carried in here by a tidal wave, and now cannot get +out, not knowing the passage." + +"Well, I don't know it myself, and I never would have come in only for +finding a pilot who knows the ins and outs of all the islands in the +Caribbean, but if I noticed any lights when I came in I must have thought +they were yours." + +The men rowed on out of sight, for Jack did not care to lean over too far, +partly from fear of falling and partly because he might be seen if any one +else should happen to pass that way. + +There had a vessel come into the bay, then, and she was now probably up +the cove out of sight, and the man in the boat with the other was her +captain. + +"That is the man whose vessel I signaled the other night," thought Jack. +"Rollins must have come over to this side and met him. They know each +other, it seems. Birds of a feather flock together." + +Not caring to expose himself to the risk of being seen by the men when +they returned, Jack now crept back to the other side of the rock and began +to descend carefully, Percival being at length able to help him. + +"Well, Jack," said the latter when his friend was safe on the ground, "did +you discover anything!" + +"Yes, I did," and Jack told him briefly what he had seen and heard. + +"H'm! then there was a vessel coming in last night, and old Ben was not +mistaken?" exclaimed Percival. + +"No, he was not, and she is in a cove somewhere on the other side of the +rocks. I don't know how far up it goes, but there is one there. I could +not see the vessel either." + +"We must try to find it, Jack." + +"Yes, and we must get around these rocks. There is no way of getting to +the cove this way, unless we climb another high rock, and it is dangerous +and we might be seen also." + +"Then let's look for another way." + +They went back for a distance, and then began clambering over masses of +other rocks they came to, getting higher and higher, but at last coming to +a great mass of ledge rock, which rose sheer above their heads for twenty +feet without a single projection upon which they could rest their feet and +without a crevice where they might get a finger hold. + +"There is no use trying to get up there, Jack," murmured Percival in +disgust. "A goat could not climb up there. Nothing without wings could +manage it, in fact." + +"No, there is clearly no getting around this way, Dick. We shall have to +go back and try some other place. There is a vessel on the other side of +those rocks, but how to get a sight of her is the question. I think we +would better try to find the head of the cove." + +They went back, therefore, to where they had tried to ascend the rocks, +and pushed on toward the interior of the island, finding the way +difficult, but at length getting clear of the rocks and after struggling +through a perfect jungle coming out upon one of the paths they had +themselves made in their explorations. + +"Well, we know where we are now!" exclaimed Percival with considerable +satisfaction, "but we seem to be no nearer the head of the cove than +before. What are you going to do, Jack?" + +"Look for the cove," said Jack tersely. + +"All right, my boy, I am with you," said Dick with a chuckle, as if the +idea was a most amusing one. + +"Seems funny, doesn't it?" said Jack, smiling. "Well, we have had a lot of +trouble, I admit, but you are not the one to give up when you undertake a +task, and you know that I do not like to." + +"Not only that you don't like to, Jack, but that you don't do it." + +They set out toward the shore again, determined to find the cove if it +were a possible thing, and looking for every possible clue to its +whereabouts, and plunging into what seemed the most impassable thickets in +their efforts, halting at nothing, in fact. + +"We should have brought axes, Jack," muttered Percival in disgust, as both +boys paused at length, tired and hot in a little glade where the way was +clearer than before, and yet having no assurance that they were anywhere +near the place they sought. + +"Yes, but that is just like a couple of boys who are bound to do a thing +and don't make all their calculations ahead. Our hind thought is better +than our forethought, Dick." + +"Yes, but we could not think of everything. I think we have done pretty +well, considering." + +"Yes, I suppose so, but it rather takes the conceit out of a fellow to +meet with so many obstacles. Why, I always thought I was good in making my +way through tangled woods, but I begin to think that I am not." + +"There is one thing you have forgotten, Jack. We are in the tropics, the +woods here are regular jungles and the temperature is something +considerably above what you have been used to. You must not scold yourself +too much, Jack. I think we have done very well--'sh, what's that!" in a +hoarse whisper, and looking around him with alarm. + +"Some one coming, Dick. Hide, quick!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +IN THE LAIR OF THE FOX + + +The boys quickly secreted themselves in the high grass, and in a few +moments several men came into the glade, evidently in great excitement. + +"We've got to get him quick," said one. "Is this the right way, do you +think? We can't waste no time waiting around here with that revenue cutter +hanging around." + +"Him and Davis went over to this side 'cause he wanted to show Davis that +there was a vessel in the bay, and now this here other one is hanging +about, and she may come to our side and find us," said another. "This here +is the way, I think, but I ain't sure." + +"Well, come on and find him," growled a third man. "As you say, we'd +better not waste no time with a revenue cutter hanging about and looking +for us. Come on!" + +The men hurried on, and when there was no longer any sign of them Jack +arose and said: + +"They have seen a vessel outside, probably from one of the hills, and have +taken the alarm. It is likely that this is the vessel Mr. Smith has sent +to get us out. I hardly believe she is a revenue cutter, although these +men would hardly be deceived on that point." + +"They might," said Percival. "They would take alarm at anything. I think +myself that it is likely to be the vessel sent to get us out. She should +be here by this time, according to our calculations. Let us get on the +hill, Jack, and have a look at her ourselves. We may be able to tell what +she is if we can get a good look at her." + +"Very good," and the boys at once struck out in a direction which they +judged would take them into one of the paths leading to the northern end +of the island. + +They reached one in five minutes, and then pushed on till they came to the +open, and in another few minutes came out upon a higher level whence a +fairly good view of the open sea could be obtained. + +"There she is!" cried Jack, pointing out to sea. "She is a cutter, Dick. +The men were right. She is under a good head of steam, too, as you can +tell by the smoke pouring from her funnels. She is cruising about here, +and is evidently in search of some one. Perhaps she suspects that Davis is +in here, and is trying to locate him." + +The boys watched the cutter for ten minutes, and then saw her alter her +course, and take one which would bring her around to the other side of the +island. + +"I wonder if Storms has seen her?" said Jack. "I don't believe she knows +the way in here. If she did she would have come in. She is going away. We +won't see her in a short time." + +"I don't wonder that the smugglers were alarmed. Well, if she goes to the +other side Rollins may leave unless he is hidden in a cove, the same as +Davis is. The latter will have a good chance to get out if the coast is +clear. She is getting farther and farther off, Jack." + +"Yes, and we won't see her in a little while. She is probably going to the +other side to look for these fellows. Well, we have not seen exactly what +we came out to see, but we have seen something, and I think we had better +go back. It is getting later than I thought." + +The boys, accordingly, set off toward the shore, and at length reached it, +finding Ben Bowline waiting for them with the boat. + +"Your Flying Dutchman was a real vessel, Ben," said Jack, "and she is +hiding in a cove along shore, but just where I can't tell you. I would +have to look for her. Did you see the revenue cutter outside?" + +"No, we did not. Revenue cutter, hey? Not the vessel that's coming to take +us out, sir?" + +"No, but a revenue cutter. She is looking for your Flying Dutchman, I +imagine, or for another smuggler. This place seems to be a favorite hiding +place for such craft." + +"Well, they're welcome to it, sir, for if we get out all right they can +have it to themselves, for all o' me." + +"The trouble is how to get out, Ben," said Percival. "Whichever way you +turn there seems to be some difficulty ahead of you." + +"Yes, and that reminds me of a time when I was sailing around the coast of +Africky lookin' for slavers. Ever heard tell about it!" + +"No, but you must be older than I thought, Ben, to have been alive at that +time. There have been no slavers for sixty years or more around these +parts, and you wouldn't----" + +"Well, there was slavers for all that," persisted Ben. "I didn't say I was +chasin' American slavers. They is others, or was. Portuguese an' other +fellows was in the business in them days. Well, anyhow, talking about +meetin' trouble wherever you turn, this here adventure o' mine was that +sort." + +"What was it, Ben? We have time to listen to it before having to start +back, I guess, or you can tell it to us while you are rowing us out to the +yacht." + +"Well, we was cruisin' around the Guinea coast, and one day I went on +shore to look about and got separated from the other fellows, and all to +once got so tangled up in the jungle that I didn't know which way to go +nor nothing." + +"That's interesting," said Percival. + +"Then all of a sudden about forty black niggers jumped out of the jungle +and gave chase, for I didn't stop to calc'late which way I orter go when I +seed them, but just laid a course what would take me away from 'em the +quickest. + +"I just put through the jungle as tight as I could jump, and suddenly come +face to face with a scrouching lion as big as a elephant, all ready to +pounce upon me, and there I was between two fires. + +"You might say three, because I was on the edge of a swamp and there was a +big alligator with his mouth wide open, ready to swaller me the minute I +got into the swamp." + +Percival gave Jack a knowing wink and said: + +"Well, that was a dilemma. What did you do?" + +"Well, I just didn't know what to do, 'cause whichever way I went there +was danger. The lion and the 'gator was in front an' the savage niggers +behind, and it was as bad to stand still as to run and no port in a +storm." + +"Well?" and Dick gave Jack a wink. + +"I just didn't do nothin', 'cause good luck did it for me. The niggers run +plump into the jaws of the lion or smack into the 'gator, an' in a brace +o' shakes one an' t'other was so stuffed full o' meat that they had no +appetite for me, an' I just laid a course down the river an' found my +mates in a jiffy." + +"That's another steal from Baron Munchausen with a few variations," +laughed Percival. "Did you ever hear of him, Ben?" + +"Huh! they's no 'arthly use o' spinin' any yarns to you, young gentlemen, +'cause you don't believe 'em nohow," muttered Ben in a disgusted tone, and +then he gave way upon the oars and did not say another word. + +When the boys reached the vessel, shortly before dinner, Jack told the +captain of what he had heard and seen, the officer being greatly +interested, and saying shortly: + +"If the fellow in the cove has a pilot on board maybe we can hire him to +take us out or maybe force him to do it. You couldn't signal to the +cutter, I suppose?" + +"No, we had no means. She has gone to the other side of the island now, +probably in search of the other vessel. You have not had any message from +the one that is coming to our assistance?" + +"No, I have not, but I expect her to-day or to-morrow. Could you find the +cove where the smuggler is hidden?" + +"I might," answered Jack thoughtfully. + +"If I can find her before she gets out," the captain continued, "I'll +catch him, and make him take us out of the bay to the open. Then I'll turn +him over to the cutter, and get the reward. These fellows captured one of +our vessels, and it'll be only turn about, which is fair play for +everybody." + +"Are your men armed?" asked Jack. "Remember, these men are ready for fight +at any moment. They always expect it, and are prepared. They act in +defiance of the government, and know that if caught they will be +imprisoned, and they are always on the defensive." + +"Yes, I know that, but if I can take them by surprise they won't have a +chance to fight." + +"Well, I will try to find the cove for you, sir, but, of course, I cannot +join in any fight you may have with the smugglers. The doctor would not +allow it." + +"No, I suppose not, and quite right, too. I'll see that you don't get into +trouble on our account, but I do want to catch this chap, and make him +take us out of here." + +"I heartily hope that you will, Captain," said Jack. + +After dinner the yacht steamed out into the open bay, inside the reefs, +and a lookout was kept for the cutter, which might still be in the +neighborhood, and at the same time Captain Storms told the doctor what he +had contemplated, and asked his permission to take Jack as a pilot to +discover the whereabouts of the smuggler. + +"He will be in no danger, I trust?" asked Dr. Wise, glaring at the +captain, as was his wont when greatly interested. + +"I will look out for that, sir," replied the captain. "He and his chum +were looking for this fellow this morning, and found out where he lay, +from the shore. I think he will be able to locate him from the water, and +if he does I'll have the rat out of his hole in a brace of shakes, +provided you will let me have him." + +"Why, yes, I think so," rejoined the doctor, looking as wise as his name +would indicate. "I am most anxious to get away from here, and if you think +there is a chance of it I am quite willing to let you use your own +judgment. You know best about such matters." + +A boat was lowered containing the captain, Jack Sheldon, Dick Percival and +six stout sailors, the entire party with the exception of the boys, being +heavily armed. + +A second boat, in charge of the mate, was lowered, and followed the first +at a little distance, the officer having orders to close up quickly in +case it became necessary. + +Jack sat in the stern with the captain, and, as they skirted the shore, +kept a sharp lookout for any possible inlet to the cove where the smuggler +lay in hiding. + +There was a full tide, and this enabled them to go closer to the rocks +than if it had been low, and Jack peered into every opening in the hope of +finding the right one at last. + +At length as they were proceeding slowly at a safe distance from an ugly +looking mass of rocks, which projected to some distance into the water, +and where there were dangerous looking eddies, Jack noticed a steeple +shaped rock higher than the rest, and at some little distance in shore. + +"That is the rock I could not get around, Dick," he said to Percival. "Of +course, I cannot from here see the rock from which I looked down on the +men in the boat, but I know that rock well. Keep on, Captain, and watch. I +think I can find the way now." + +"There was a turn in the passage, wasn't there, Jack?" asked Dick. + +"Yes, but there may have been others, and I think that the general +direction of the inlet was about east. I shall look for it at any rate." + +They kept on slowly, Jack directing them closer in to shore, and looking +sharply for any sign of the channel, which he presently detected by +keeping his eye on the water. + +At a point where the rocks seemed to have no opening he detected a motion +toward the bay, and, knowing that the tide was now on the ebb, had the +captain steer closer in to the rocks. + +"You won't run us onto them, sir?" whispered Storms. + +"No, sir. Look toward them. Can't you see that the tide is setting this +way, that there is no eddy, but the regular flow of the tide?" + +"By gravy! yes, I do," exclaimed the captain hoarsely. "Keep on, my boy, +and I believe you'll find the place." + +Jack watched the water, steered in closer, and suddenly, in rounding a +blunt point, saw the entrance to the cove before him, and noticed that the +tide was running steadily out of it toward the sea. + +"Here we are, sir," he said to the captain, and at once the other boat was +signaled, and came up in a few moments. + +Both proceeded up the creek side by side, and at length Jack saw the rock +whence he had watched the men in the boat, and pointed it out to Percival, +together with the one like a steeple, which had first called his attention +to the place. + +There was room for the two boats abreast, the passage being wide enough +for a good-sized vessel to pass, and they kept on side by side, past the +bend in the inlet, and then on and around another, suddenly coming in +sight of a vessel at anchor. + +"That's the _Circe_, the steamer that was taken by the smugglers," said +the captain. "I know her well, though I never sailed in her. They've +painted out her name, but that's her, I'll take my oath." + +At a signal from the captain the two boats dashed forward, and were +alongside the steamer before any one on board knew of their approach. + +The captain and mate, followed by four men from each boat, scrambled up +the side like monkeys, and made a dash for the cabin as a man came out and +demanded gruffly: + +"Hello! who are you, and what do you want?" + +"That's Davis," said Jack. "I know his voice. We have made no mistake." + +"Of course not," said Percival "Do you see that fender hanging over the +side? These fellows have forgotten it. There is your name _Circe_, as +plain as you please." + +"Yes, I see it." + +"There are lively times up there, Jack," Dick continued. "I'd like to join +in it." + +"Let the men go instead," laughed Jack. "We can look after the boats." + +"All right. Up with you, men!" and the invitation was accepted in a +moment. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE WAY OUT FOUND + + +The men scrambled out of the boats and on deck as soon as they had the +boys' permission, and for a minute or two there was the liveliest sort of +fracas on the deck and in the cabin of the _Circe_, but this shortly +ceased, and the mate coming to the side leaned over and said: + +"We've got 'em! They put up a fight, but everything is dead against them. +This is our company's vessel, and we've found enough unstamped stuff in +the cabin to give 'em a good long rest in jail. We've got Davis, the +captain, but the other fellow is over on the other shore, unless he has +made his escape by this time. Come on board, boys." + +The boys quickly accepted the invitation, and went on board where they +found Davis and his men prisoners. + +There was not a large crew, and some of them had been asleep at the time +of the surprise, these being captured before they knew what was going on. + + +"Go aboard with the boys and all the men you need," said the captain to +the mate. "I am going with the pilot. Follow us and do exactly as we do. +I've got this fellow under my thumb. He knows he'll get a good long term +for smuggling, but I can get some of it taken off if he pilots us out, and +I've promised him to do my best for him. It'll be as hard as finding a +needle in a haystack to get a pilot and we have him, so what's the use of +looking?" + +"Quite right, sir." + +The captain stood in the pilot house with a pistol at the head of the +pilot, and told him to give his orders, and to give wrong ones at his +peril. + +"If you sink us you'll sink yourself," he added, "so mind your chart and +steer straight." + +"All right, Captain," said the other. "I'll do as you say. I am not over +fond of Davis, who has done me many a dirty turn, and as for Rollins, +there is no more trusting him than there is a wolf, and I shall be glad to +be shut of both of them and the business at the same time." + +The boats were sent back to the yacht, which was put in charge of the +first officer, and followed in the wake of the _Circe_. + +In this case she proved to be worthier of trust than her beautiful +namesake of the days of Ulysses, and she not only made her way safely out +through the tortuous channel among the reefs, but led the yacht with the +boys on board to the open water outside. + +More than once as Captain Storms saw the waters bubbling and boiling +around them, and saw how close they were to the rocks he thought that they +were doomed, but as he watched the face of the pilot he saw that the man +was to be trusted, and held his peace. + +When they were outside, and a great cheer went up from the Hilltop boys, +they proceeded to the end of the island in search of the cutter and at +last saw her smoke in the distance. + +Sending her a wireless message they at length had the satisfaction of +seeing her approach, and at last the captain came on board and the _Circe_ +and her crew were turned over to him, Storms saying: + +"Look out for the pilot. He is not as bad as the rest, and deserves some +consideration on account of getting us out of a bad scrape. Have you +caught Rollins?" + +"No, he was too quick for us, and slipped away, but we'll catch him yet." + +"I doubt if you do. However, never mind that. I'll put you in charge here +and will go back to my own vessel." + +He had been back in his own cabin but a short time, receiving the +congratulations of the doctor and the boys when the man on the lookout +reported a vessel in the offing, which flew the company's flag, and seemed +to be familiar to many of the officers and men. + +"That's the ship that Smith has sent to get us out," laughed Storms, "and +we've got ahead of him, and got out ourselves." + +He was correct, for in half an hour the newcomer was alongside and in a +moment Mr. Smith himself was over the side and grasping his son, Jesse W., +in his arms. + +"But how is this?" he asked. "I thought you could not get out. Did you do +this for a joke so that you could see me?" + +"No, indeed, sir," said young Smith. "We have not been away from the +island more than an hour or two, and it is to Jack Sheldon that you owe +your getting out. Come here, Jack, I want to introduce you to my father." + +"I am pleased to see you, sir," said Jack, coming up. "I am afraid that +Jesse W. gives me too much credit, although I am willing to take a little +of it. Captain Storms deserves the greater part of it, however." + +Mr. Smith held a consultation with the captain of the revenue cutter, and +an arrangement was shortly made between them whereby the _Circe_ was to be +in the government's custody for a time, and then to be turned over to her +owners. + +The whole story was told and Jack, Dick, and many of the boys came in for +their meed of praise from Mr. Smith, as well as from Dr. Wise and the +captain. + +Mr. Smith had not found a pilot who could take him through the reefs to +Lost Island, as they all still called it, but his chagrin was greatly +tempered by seeing his son and all the boys safe out of their island +prison, and he complimented Jack on all that he had done, and said: + +"My dear boy, I have already promised my son to look after your interests, +and you need have no fear that they will be thoroughly attended to." + +"I am much obliged to you, sir," replied Jack, blushing, "but I am glad to +have found such good friends. I want to say a few words in behalf of your +son, and am only expressing the sentiments of the majority of the boys +when I tell you that he is a plucky little chap, and a credit to the +Hilltop Academy. I trust that we may long have him with us." + +"Hurrah for Jesse W., boys, give him a rouser!" cried Percival, and they +were given with a will. + +Mr. Smith went back to the relief vessel, the cutter took away her prize, +and by night the vessels had all parted company, Jesse W. Smith's father +to return to New York, and the yacht to proceed on her cruise, which, +although somewhat shortened as to route, was to continue until the time +originally set as to its duration. + +The cruise was a most pleasant one, and the boys learned much while it +lasted, and were sorry when it ended, and they set out for the north and +the Academy in the highlands. + +Later the _Circe_ was turned over to its owners, and a share of the reward +for its recovery put to Jack's account in the bank, much to his surprise, +as well as satisfaction. + +The man with the white mustache, who was one of the boldest of the +smugglers, had made his escape, whither he had gone no one could tell, but +Jack's only interest in the man was to hope that he would keep away on +account of his mother, to whom he related nothing concerning his meetings +with the man, either at the Academy or in the tropics. + +"I do not wish her to think of him," he said to Percival, "and I do not +wish to think of him myself. Never mention him, Dick." + +"You may be sure I won't!" replied Dick with emphasis. + +There were some of the boys who did not escape seasickness on the way +back, for all they had been on the water so long, but the run home was, on +the whole, most pleasant, and Jack, Dick, young Smith and some others +enjoyed it thoroughly. + +"We shall have enough to think of and to talk about for a long time," +remarked Jack to Percival when they were at last on the train going back +to the Highlands, "and it is all the better that the trip was not what it +was originally planned to be. The very unexpectedness of our adventures +gave them all the greater charm." + +"I suppose so," said Dick, "but I generally like to know what is coming, +and then if I don't like it, I can get out of the way." + +"Well, we are all of us richer in experience." + +"And you in pocket," laughed Dick. "Don't forget that, my boy." + +"Oh, I have something that is worth a good deal more than the money that I +happened to get," said Jack, smiling. + +"What is that?" asked Percival. + +"The friendship of a lot of good fellows, and of one or two who are a good +deal more than mere good fellows, real friends, in fact." + +"Well, that is worth a good deal, of course, but it seems to me that one +always has plenty of friends if he has money." + +"If he keeps them when he has no money, then they are friends, indeed," +said Jack, "and I think that I can count upon mine in any case." + +"Then you are lucky, Jack." + +For all that they had enjoyed themselves while afloat, the Hilltop boys +were glad to be back at the Academy again among the old familiar scenes, +and the work of the school went on with renewed vigor, Jack, in +particular, giving his entire attention to it so as to be as high as +possible in his classes at the end of the term. + +The greater part of the boys at the Academy, as well as the doctor and all +of the professors, were his friends, and the fact that some of the boys +were not, and did all they could to injure him did not worry him, for he +thought little or nothing of it. + +At the end of the term he was at the head of his class, and was so close +upon Percival that the latter said with a good-natured grin: + +"You'll be up with me next term, Jack, whether I look out for myself or +not." + +"Well, we generally have pretty good times together, Dick," Jack replied, +"so I don't think you will be sorry." + +"Not a bit of it," said Dick. + +Those who have been interested in following the fortunes of the Hilltop +boys may be glad to continue their acquaintance with Jack Sheldon and his +friends and enemies in the next volume, "The Hilltop Boys on the River," +which, in addition to giving an account of many aquatic sports, contains +also a number of thrilling incidents, which serve to bring out the +characters of the boys to good advantage. + +It was at the end of the term, and many of the boys were preparing to go +home when Percival said to Jack: + +"The doctor is going to let us have a summer camp for a few weeks. We are +to live on the river, and have all the fun we want with the addition of +some study, just to keep our hands in. What do you say, Jack? Will you +stay over if I do?" + +"I may stay in any event, Dick. I want to get on as fast as I can, and +this will give me a chance." + +"Then if you stay, so will I," heartily, "and between you and me you will +find a lot more who will do it if they know you are to be here." + +"The more the merrier," said Jack. + + +THE END + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Hilltop Boys on Lost Island, by Cyril Burleigh + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HILLTOP BOYS ON LOST ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 14879.txt or 14879.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/4/8/7/14879/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Emmy and the PG Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/14879.zip b/14879.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..985287c --- /dev/null +++ b/14879.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92f979f --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #14879 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/14879) |
